The Road to Total Freedom A sociological analysis of scientology by Roy Wallis Criticizing Scientology does have a price, as Wallis found out, and L. Ron Hubbard wanted to get known - to deter criticism. The following appears in Chapter 4 of Stewart Lamont's book Religion Inc.: the Church of Scientology: In the early 1970s, sociologist Roy Wallis was completing his research project on Scientology eventually published under the title *The Road to Total Freedom* when he became the victim of the Guardians' paranoia. Ironically the book is now accepted by the Public Affairs office of the Church of Scientology as reasonable and fair (they even loaned me a copy) but at the time an undercover agent was sent to Stirling University where Wallis then taught. Posing as a student, he attempted to get Wallis to tell him if he was involved in the drug scene. Wallis recognized him from Saint Hill, so the student then changed his story, claiming to be a defector from the Church of Scientology. In 'The Moral Career of a Research Project' (published within *Doing Sociological Research* in 1977) Wallis describes what happened next: 'In the weeks following his visit a number of forged letters came to light, some of which were supposedly written by me. These letters sent to my university employers, colleagues and others, implicated me in a variety of acts from a homosexual love affair to spying for the drug squad. Because I had few enemies and because this attention followed so closely upon the receipt of my paper by the Church of Scientology organization, it did not seem too difficult to infer the source of these attempts to inconvenience me.' Article by Roy Wallis of 7 June 1973, "Religious sects and the fear of publicity". Here too, Wallis describe some strange instances of harassment: A later batch of letters was addressed to "The Chancellor" of Stirling University. The covering letter this time was purportedly from a disgusted landlady. Contained with it were two homosexual love letters of an obscene kind, written on Stirling Department of Sociology notepaper -- or more probably a photograph copy of the letter-head -- typed on a machine with a distinctive type-face very similar to my personal portable, and signed with my name. On investigation by the police the landlady was found not to exist. =================== The Road to Total Freedom A Sociological analysis of Scientology ROY WALLIS The Road to Total Freedom This book is a sociological study of a new quasi-religious movement, Scientology. Its author, Roy Wallis, traces the emergence of this movement as a lay psychotherapy - "Dianetics" and its development into an authoritarian sect. Drawing on formulations in the sociology of religion, he analyses the processes involved and presents a theory to account for the transformation of cult into sect. On the basis of over eighty interviews with members and former members, a typology of the motivations which led individuals to affiliate with the movements is derived, and the processes by which members become further committed to the movement are explored. The reasons which led a proportion of members to defect from the movement are also described. Scientology has been notable for the extent to which is has come into conflict with the state, medical agencies, and individuals critical of its practices. The author turns to the sociology of deviance to provide a model to account for the development of a 'moral crusade'against Scientology and to explain the way in which the movement reacted and adapted to a hostile environment. This study should find a place on courses in Religious Studies, the History of Religion, and the Sociology of Religion. It will be essential material for any attempt to understand the form and place of the new religions in advanced industrial societies. It is also likely to be appropriate material for courses on the Sociology of Social Movements. The controversial nature of the topic of this work may, however, endow it with a market appeal beyond the confines of the academic community. The Road to Total Freedom *A Sociological Analysis of Scientology* The Road to Total Freedom *A Sociological Analysis of Scientology* Roy Wallis NEW YORK COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY PRESs 1977 Copyright c 1976 Roy Wallis All rights reserved. Printed in Great Britain Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data Wallis, Roy. The Road to Total Freedom. Bibiography: p. Includes index. I. Scientology. I. Title. BP605.S2W34 1976 131'.35 76-27273 ISBN 0-231-04200-0 PREFACE There is a sence in which sociology is inevitably a subversive enterprise. The very act of refiecting on the behaviour of people and organizations entails that these activities do not bear their meaning and explanation on their face. The sociologist's pursuit of further or different knowledge after he has already been informed of the 'truth'of the matter by the individuals or organizations concerned, displays the fact that he does not accept the 'self- evident', and perhaps even that motivated by malice, he is prepared to tell some entirely different story. Hence, the sociologist poses a threat to the rhetorics and legitimations employed by social groups and a potential challenge to their definition of reality, and to the definitions of themselves which they present for public consumption. He therefore risks calling down upon himself the wrath and opprobrium of groups which he studies. Generally, the groups examined by sociologists are relatively powerless and their complaints may do little more than prick his own conscience or the consciences of his more radical colleagues. In other cases, however, the group examined may not be without power and in such instances, depending on the nature of the power and the society in which it is exercised, the sociologist may risk more severe if not necessarily more serious, consequences, I began my work on Scientology as a raw graduate student, fascinated by the relationship between beliefs, social organisation and society. While I had initially intended that Scientology be considered as one among a range of unorthodox system of belief to which I proposed to devote attention, I found myself increasingly interested by the rich body of material I was uncovenng on this multifaceted movement. I have recounted at length elsewhere (in my contribution 'The moral career of a research project'to Colin Bell and Howard Newby, editors, *Doing Sociological Research*, Allen and Unwin, London, 1976) the history of my research on Scientology. It remains, however, to summarize a few points salient to the final production of this book. As my opening remarks would suggest, the Church of Scientology was suspicious of my research. Having suffered at the hands of newspaper reporters, investigators for state and medical agencies, and government enquiries in many countries, my own work was readily placed by the leaders of the Church of Scientology into the category of hostile or critical commentary. My protestations that I had no axe to grind, and that I sought only to provide a coherent and vi PREFACE as-nearly-objecive account of Scientology as possible, were viewed with commendable scepticism by the church leadership. The Church of Scientology is not known for its willingness to take what it construes as criticism without recourse. Indeed its record of litigation must surely be without parallel in the modern world. It therefore seemed almost inevitable that my own final work would be the subject of lengthy and expensive litigation. In such a situation, the writer faces a dilemma. Does he 'tell the truth, and damn the consequences'? Or does he, in the light of the extreme severity of the British law of libel, reflect that in over a hundred thousand words of text, anyone can make a mistake? There is a powerful tension between the threat of censorship and the possibility of enormous cost in time, effort and money for a single error. But there is a further consideration. The sociologist has an *obligation* to the subjects of his research. Even if his relationship with them has sometimes approached open war, he owes them a duty not to misrepresent their activities and beliefs, the more so if they are in any respect a socially stigmatized or politically threatened collectivity. In my decision to make my manuscript available to the Church of Scientology, *both* of those considerations weighed heavily. Informing them in advance of what one intended to say had its dangers. Forewarned is, after all, forearmed for any legal battle. But the risk, in this case, paid off. It is my feeling that the church leadership appreciated the gesture, and while they remained adamant over a period of months that certain things should not be said, they were willing to compromise and to negotiate. These negotiations, covering several reams of typescript were salutory. I came to appreciate that things which had initially sounded innocuous to me could be read as pejorative or even invective. In due course, I made various modifications to the text in this light. As an example, I amended my argument that Hubbard was 'obsessed'with communism, to read that he was 'preoccupied'by it. I also deleted a comparison with the Nazi party and the Ss which seemed on reflection *unnecessarily* offensive to members of the Church of Scientology. I further incorporated into the text from various commentaries sent to me by the Church of Scientology, statements of their views on certain events on which we could not find common ground. As a final gesture to the Church I offered to include in the work, as an appendix, a commentary commissioned by the Church, on my work as a whole. This seemed to provide what they claimed had been denied them in the past, i.e. an adequate right of reply, for which reason they had been forced to seek recourse in the courts. Dr Jerry Simmons was commissioned by the Church to write this reply. His interesting paper 'On maintaining deviant belief systems', has often been cited by sociologists working in the field of unorthodox collectivities of believers.1 As a believer hmmself in this case, Dr Simmons inevitably rejects my study. 1 *Social Problems*, II, Winter (1964), pp. 250-6. vii PREFACE His main argument is that my methods are not adequate in that they do not fulfil the criteria of tradltional survey research, and that I theretore violate "the scientific method'. Dr Simmons fails to recognise that methods are tools and tools must be adapted to circumstances. The 'scientific method'is no more than an injunction to examine evidence dispassionately and critically. My study does not intend to be a piece of survey research. Dr Simmons'strictures are, therefore, at best, misplaced. There are no 'sampling errors' since there is no 'sample'. My respondents are ethnographic informants not randomly sampled survey respondents. That many of them were not practising Scientologists and were openly hostile to Scientology only tells us that my information *may* be biased and not that it *is*. As it happens, information secured from informants, whether devoted adherents or active opponents, could be checked against other informants or against documentary sources. Dr Simmons suggests that I was offered permission to interview over 4,000 believers for my study. This offer was not, I'm afraid, ever as clear to me as it was to Dr Simmons. He accuses me again of bias in sampling statements from documents rather than performing a content analysis, but again his argument is misplaced. Had I wished for an analysis of the content of the documents, I would have conducted a content analysis. But something said only once in a body of documentation may have as much influence on organizational and individual behaviour as something said a thousand times. Hence I utilized documentation as any historian would, seeking to locate influential statements and to cite statements which information from other sources had indicated were important for behaviour, rather than to analyse as a whole the content of documents which, in the case of Scientology as of many other organizations and social movements, are often written for public relations purposes. Ultimately, of course, which of us Dr Simmons or I is right on the questtion of the degree of bias in this book, is open to dispute. That is as it should be. I would be as foolish as Dr Simmons thinks me, if I believed I have said the last word on Scientology. It is right, and indeed exciting in its prospect, that debate about this movement will continue. I am hopeful that new information will continually come to light, and urge anyone with documentation on Scientology to send it to me, or to the Librarian of Stirling University, where an archive can be formed to preserve such material for future scholars. In the meantime, anyone hoping to resolve the matter can do no better than Dr Simmons suggests: begin your own investigation. Read Hubbard's *Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health* and compare it, in terms of objectivity, the 'scientific method', etc., with my book. CONTENTS Preface v Contents ix Acknowledgements xi Abbreviations xiii Introduction and Methodological Note 1 PART I THE SOCIOLOGY OF CULT AND SECT 1 *Cult and Sect: A Typology and a Theory* 11 PART II THE CULT AND ITs TRANSFORMATION 2 *The Cult Phase: Dianetics* 21 3 *Crisis and Transition* 77 PART III THE SECT: SCIENTOLOGY 4 *Theory and its Transmission* 103 5 *Social Organiation and Social Control* 127 6 *The Scientological Career: From Casual Client to Deployable Agent* 157 7 *Relations with State and Society* 190 8 *Reality Maintenance in a Deviant Belief System* 225 PART IV CONCLUSIONS *Conclusions* 245 APPENDICES I Special letter from Ron Howes 259 II HCO Ethics Order 261 III Executive Directive from L. Ron Hubbard 263 IV On Roy Wallis'Study J. L. Simmons, PhD 265 BIBLIOGRAPHY 270 INDEX 281 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS In a research enterprise of this kind innumerable debts are inevitably accumulated. For the first two years of the research I was fortunate to be a student at Nuffield College, Oxford. I am grateful to the Warden and Fellows for providing me with a home, facilities, and intellectual stimulation during this period. The Social Science Research Council generously provided me with a grant which enabled me to pursue this research. The Ofrex- Drexler Foundation also kindly provided me with a small grant at a crucial stage in my work. Professor Duncan Timms, Chairman of the Department of Sociology of Stirling University, greatly assisted my work by providing me with time, research funds and secretarial assistance. Without the aid of Cyril Vosper, the study would never have begun. I am also grateful to him for many stimulating conversations and useful leads in the course of the research. Mr P. Hetherington made available to me material otherwise unavailable in Great Britain on the early days of the movement. On a research visit to America, Mr and Mrs Don Rodgers, Mr and Mrs Ross Lamoureaux, A. E. van Vogt and his late wife, Mayne, Perry Chapdelaine, Beau Kitselman, and Waldo Boyd kindly provided hospitality and much useful material. There I benefited from conversations with Paulette Cooper and Robert Kaufman. Among the interview and questionnaire respondents to all of whom I am grateful, Miss Shelia Hoad, and Miss Carmen D'Allessio provided much assistance. Mrs Nan Mclean and Dr Russell Barton provided useful information and documentation. The Editors of the *News of the World*, *Mayfair*, the *Denver Post*, and of other newspapers and magazines too numerous to mention individually, and the management of Reuters, all made freely available copies of articles otherwise unobtainable, or provided me with facilities to examine their clipping files. I have benefited from discussions with Miss Mary Appleby, OBE, formerly secretary of the National Association for Mental Health (now the Mind Associa- tion); and with Mr David Gaiman, of the Guardian's Office of the Church of Scicntology who also arranged for me to interview students and staff at Saint Hill Manor. Dr Christopher Evans and Mr C. H. Rolph kindly showed me their manuscripts prior to publication. Earlier drafts of Chapter I appeared as part of an article 'Scientology: xii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS therapeutic cult to religious sect'in *Sociology*, 9, I (January 1975); and aspects of the theory were presented in 'The cult and its transformations'in *Sectarianism: Analyses of Religious and Non-Religious Sects* Roy Wallis, (Peter Owen, London, 1975). This latter work also contained an early formulation of sections of Chapter 7, under the title 'Societal reactions to Scientology: a study in the sociology of deviant religion'. For comments on earlier versions of Chapter 7, I am grateful to Professor Stanley Cohen, Dr David Downes, Dr Shelia Mitchell, and Dr Russell Dobash. The bulk of the manuscript has been read by Robert Kaufman and Richard Bland, and all of it by Professor David Martin and Dr Roderick Martin, whose comments and criticisms have been most helpful. Dr Bryan Wilson supervised my research for the doctoral thesis on which this book is based, and provided personal encouragement, sociological insight, and incisive editorial criticism. He has read many drafts of the manuscript and commented carefully and patiently upon each. I owe him a particular debt of gratitude. My wife and children have tolerated me throughout, a more difficult task than can easily be imagined. Parts of the manuscript have been typed by Pam Drysdale and Marion Govan. To them and to Grace Smith who, with my wife, performed the bulk of the secretarial tasks connected with the preparation of this work, I wish to express my thanks. Finally, I acknowledge a most profoumd debt to those who talked to me, completed my questionnaires, wrote letters, sent me information or otherwise assisted my research, but who must, for one reason or another, remain anonymous. None of those acknowledged here bear any responsibility for the final product. This book is dedicated to the memory of my late father, John C. Wallis. ABBREVIATIONS SCIENTOLOGY ABBREVIATIONS AD After Dianetics Anaten Analytical Attenuation AOLA Advanced Organization Los Angeles A-R-C Affinity, Reality and Communication BA Book Auditor BDA British Dianetic Association B. Scn. Batchelor of Scientology C.C.H. Communication, Control and Havingness Comm. Communication Dev T Developed and Unnecessary Traffic DFGB Dianetic Federation of Great Britain D of T Director of Training D Scn Doctor of Scientology E-meter Electropsychometer E/O Ethics Office *ES* L. Ron Hubbard, *Dianetics: Evolution of a Science* FSM Field Staff Member HAS Hubbard Association of Scientologists (also, Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist) HASI Hubbard Association of Scientologists International HCA Hubbard Certified Auditor HCO Hubbard Communication Office HDA Hubbard Dianetic Auditor HDRF Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation HGC Hubbard Guidance Centre HPA Hubbard Professional Auditor MEST Matter, Energy, Space and Time *MSMH* L. Ron Hubbard, *Dianetics: the Modern Science of Mental Health* NAAP National Academy of American Psychology *OEC* L. Ron Hubbard, *Organization Executive Course* Org Organisation xiv ABBREVIATIONS OT Operating Thetan OTC Operations and Transport Corporation (OTS) (Operations and Transport Services Ltd) PTS Potential Trouble Source Q & A Question and Answer Sec Secretary Sec Check Security Check S.P. Suppressive Person Stats Statistics T.R. Training Routine WW World Wide OTHER ABBREVIATIONS *AJS* *American Journal of Sociology* AMA American Medical Association *ASR* *American Sociological Review* *BJS* *British Journal of Sociology* FDA Food and Drug Administration *JSSR* *Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion* NAMH National Association for Mental Health INTRODUCTION AND METHODOLOGICAL NOTE A number of notable nineteenth-century rationalists held the view that the development of mankind resembled the development of the human individual. In his early, primitive state man was childlike in his mode of thought. His power of reason suffered severe limitations. It was said to be 'prelogical'in character.1 Men believed that things once associated with each other continued to influence each other when apart; that words had the power to alter the course of nature; and that objects similar in one major respect were similar in others.2 Primitive man was said to possess a magical world-view. Magic was held to have been born of man's ignorance of natural causation and his desire to infiuence and control the dangerous and threatening natural environment in which he found himself. On some accounts primitive man gradually learned that his magical methods were inefficacious. The law-like generalizations hitherto employed were discerned not to hold in all instances. Consequently, this account runs, he began to predicate the existence of supernatural beings, hke himself except for their superhuman powers, which might be mobilized to the good or to the detriment of mankind. Where formerly he had commanded events through the incantation of a formula regarded as inevitable in its consequences (other things being equal), he now propitiated these superior beings, seekdng to cozen and cajole them into interfering in the course of nature and human society.3 By this means the great world religions were said to have been born. Although this religious world-view was to prevail for many centuries, the nineteenth-century rationalists believed that they could perceive a change overtaking the intellect of civilized western man. The prevailing view of the world was again being challenged. As religion replaced magic, so science was coming to replace religion. As Man 'came of age'in Victorian Britain, so he cast off less mature modes of thought. A cosmos inhabited by arbitrary and capricious spirits and deities was giving way to a cosmos governed by natural laws, 1 Lucien Levy-Bruhl, *Primitive Mentality* (Allen & Unwin, London, 1923). 2 James, G. Frazer, *The Golden Bough* (Macmillan, New York, 1922). 3 Ibid. 2 INTRODUCTION AND METHODOLOGICAL NOTE mechanical in their functioning, operating upon objects rendered visible by an advanced scientific technology. This view was enshrined in the work of Sigmund Freud. Freud maintained that religion was an infantile obsessional neurosis born of anxiety and wish fulfilment. Science marked, and provided the means to further, the maturation of man. Science broke through the illusion and infantile projection. Scientific thought was therefore not merely more mature than religious thought, it was on Freud's account, psychologically healthier.1 Although both the logic and the empirical detail of these evolutionist accounts of the development of human thought have been challenged, a variant on this view remains incorporated in much contemporary thinking on the relationship between religion and social change. The spectacular advance of science in the nineteenth century is seen as one central feature of an account of the decline in the hold that religious beliefs have on man's actions, and the declining commitment displayed to religious institutions in most western societies.2 In short, a prevalent view holds that with the development of science and its increasingly evident ability both to explain the world in which we live, and to modify that world in the direction of human desire, secularization is an inevitable concomitant of the development of industrial societies. This view has its critics, of course, and we can here neither debate the conceptual problems incorporated in the notion of secularization,3 nor the empirical case of persistent high levels of religious affiliation in the United States of America.4 What is more central to the enterprise recorded in the following chapters is the fact that despite the enormous progress of science and the evident decline in religious commitment in most western nations, new religious movements have continued to appear at an apparently undiminished rate. Indeed since the end of the Second World War there has, if anything, been an increase in both the rate of formation of such movements and the rate of growth of their membership. This phenomenon is not restricted to western industrial nations. Japan too has experienced a rapid increase in the number of new religious movements, and the size of their followings.5 The industrialization and rationalization of contemporary, technologically advanced societies appears to have 1 Sigmund Freud, *The Future of an Illusion* (Hogarth, London, 1962). 2 Brian R. Wilson, *Religion and Secular Society* (Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, 69), pp. 57-74 3 For discusions of these problems, see: Vernon Pratt, *Religion and Secularization* (St Martin's Press, London, 1970); David Martin, 'Secularisation'in Julius Gould, ed., *Penguin Survey of the Social Sciences 1965* (Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, 1965); Idem, *The Religion and the Secular* (Routledge Kegan Paul, London, 1969); Idem, *The Sociology of English Religion* (SCM Press, London, 1967). 4 Wilson, op. cit., pp. 109-50. 5 H. Thomsen, *The New Religions of Japan* (Tuttle, Rutland, Vermont, 1963); H. N. McFarland, *The Rush Hour of the Gods* (Macmillan, New York, 1967); C.B. Offner and H. van Straelen, *Modern Japanese Religions* (Brill, Leiden, 1963). INTRODUCTION AND METHODOLOGICAL NOTE 3 produced problems for their members with which science has yet proven incompetent to cope. Rationalist and humanist intellectuals have tended to be puzzled by this flourishing of exotic new religious and quasi-religious movements in relatively secular societies. Many, viewing contemporary industrial society through sometimes unacknowledged evolutionary eyes, conceive such phenomena as 'regressive'in character. Resort to the occult and the supernatural is seen as a withdrawal from the realities of modern life, a retreat from the anonymity, the tensions, and the individualism of the modern world. For those with Marxist inclinations, the new religions are seen as a particularly bizarre form of 'false consciousness'. They have in general been regarded as peripheral to the central features of modern society. Since they are viewed as a fringe phenomenon, ephemeral, and even frivolous, they have not motivated any extensive sociological description or analysis. Published monographic studies of such movements by social scientists are rare.1 Only if they maintained clear links with the prevailing religious tradition2 or had political implications3 have these movements been regarded as sufficiently important to merit any considerable sociological attention.4 While it may be the case, however, that some new religious movements in advanced industrial societies are more or less explicitly attempts to escape from the more unattractive features of modern life: its impersonality, atomization, materialism and bureaucratization or attempts to resist it in form, other 1 Leon Festinger, Henry W. Rieken and Stanley Schachter, When Prophery Fails (Harper, New York, 1964); John Lofland, Doomsday Cult (Prenhce Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1966); Adam W. Eister, Drawing Room conversion (Duke University Press, Durham, North Carolina, 1950); H. T. Dohrman, California Cult: the Story of Mankind Unded (Beacon, Boston, 1958); Geoffrey K. Nelson, Spiritualism and Society (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 1969). Malcolm J. C. Calley, God's People (Oxford University Press, London, 1965); Richard Enroth, Edward Ericson and C. Breckinridge Peters, the Story of the Jesus People Paternoster, Exeter, 1972); Luther P. Gerlach and Virginia Hine, People, Pou er, Change (Bobbs-Merrill, New York, 1970). 3 Eric C. Lincoln, 7 the Black Muslims in America (Beacon, Boston, 1961); E. V Essien-Udom, Black Nationalism: a Search for Identity in America (Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, 1962); James A. Dator, Soka Gakka2: Budders of the Third Civilisation (University of Washington Press, Seattle, 1969); James W. White, the Sokagakkai and Mass Society (Stanford University Press, Stanford, California, 1970). The new religious movements in less developed societies have been better served. In part this must be due to the concern among anthropologists and sociologists to understand the mechanisms of socia change in hitherto largely stable societies. Moreover since such societies were less secularized, religious phenomena could be seen as playmg some central part in social change and adaptation. In 'secular'industrial societies, religion and its social-scientific study have been relegated to a very inferior S Benjamin Zablockd, the Joyful Cammunity (Penguin sooks, saltimore, Maryland, : 1971); Thomas Robbins and Dick Anthony, Getting straight with Meher Baba', JSSR 2 (June 1972), pp. 122-40; Erancine J. Daner, Conversion to Krishna than reject the values which prevail within it. They are bureaucratic and rationalistic in orientation, and sometimes thoroughly materialistic. They may be relatively impersonal and individualistic rather than communally based. They sometimes seek to incorporate science, or its rhetoric, into their legitimations. Such movements, Bryan Wilson has termed 'manipulationist'1 Rather than a means of escape from the world, of attaining other-worldly salvation, or of achieving a radical transformation of the prevailing society, they offer the believer some superior, esoteric means of succeeding within the status quo. They offer knowledge and techniques to enable the individual to improve his 'lifechances'; the means of achieving the valued goals of this world. The manipu- lationist movements appear, in terms of numbers of recruits and income, to be among the more successful of the new religions in industrial societies. Within this category fall Christian Science, the Japanese movement Soka Gakkai, Transcendental Meditation, and the subject of the present work, Scientology. Scientology is a movement which straddles the boundary between psychology and religion. It offers a graded hierarchy of 'auditing' (the quasi-therapeutic practice of the movement) and training, which will ultimately release fully all the individual's inner potential. Correct application of the knowledge purveyed by the movement will, it is claimed, lead to the freeing of the individual's superhumanly powerful spiritual nature. In the progress towards this desirable state, current human limitations psychosomatic illness, psychological and physical disabilities, lack of confidence, or competence will fall away, enabling the individual to cope more successfully with his environment. Training and 'auditing'are provided primarily by the central organizations of the movement which are administered on highly bureaucratic lines. The services provided by these organizations are expensive to purchase, and have been marketed with all the more aggressive techniques of modern salesmanship. The size of Scientology's following is almost impossible to estimate, but sub- stantial groups of followers exist throughout the English-speaking world; and smaller groups in Germany, Scandinavia, and France. The movement is able to command sufficient resources to maintain a large permanent staff and a fleet of vessels known as the 'Sea Org'. Scientology has aroused widespread controversy and occasional public hostility. It has been the subject of government 1 Bryan R. Wilson, Religious Sects (Weidenfeld & Nicolson, London 1970), pp. 14166. Consciousness: the transformation from hippie to religious ascetic, in Roy Wallis, ed., Sectarianistn: Analyses of Religious and Jon-Religious Sects (Peter Owen, London, tg75; Robert Lynn Adams and RobertJon Fox, 'Mainlining Jesus: the new trip-, Socitt 9 4 (l972), pp. So-6; Donald W. Peterson and Armand L. Mauss, 'The Cross and the Commune: an interpretation of the Jesus People', in Charles. Gloc, ed., religion investigations in a number of states and legislative sanction in others (these are discussed in Chapter 7). Scientology is of sociological interest for a number of reasons. Its recruits, as will be demonstrated in the following chapters, are not drawn from the categories of the traditionally dispossessed. They are not marginal individuals, but individuals who are members of groups and strata which are in many ways central to the character of industrial society. They are for the most part drawn from a relatively privileged, relatively comfortable, middle class. Analysis of this movement may therefore direct us to features of contemporary society which are a source of persistent alienation and anxiety, even to its most typical constituent groups. Scientology is of theoretical interest also because although the nature of its doctrine and practice differs from them radically, Scientology shares a number of characteristics with movements such as Communism, the Nazi Party, and Jehovah's Witnesses. Scientology is a source of data and further insight into the ctics and dynamics of totalitarian and sectarian movements. Moreover, in the cmlrse of its development Scientology has undergone a transformation from a loose, almost anarchic group of enthusiasts for a lay psychotherapy, Dianetics, to a tightly controlled and rigorously disciplined following for a quasi-religious movement, Scientology. It therefore provides an opportunity to explore a little understood transformation, that of a cult into a sect. The chapters which follow analyse the history, the membership, the beliefs and practices, the structure and functioning, and the changing nature of the relationship of this movement to the wider society. In chapter one, a typology of ideological collectivities is presented, and a theory of the development of cults into sects. Cults are presented as highly individualistic collectivities prone to fission and disintegration. The transformation of a cult into a sect is viewed as a strategy by means of which leaders seek to perpetuate and to enhance their status by arrogating authority in an attempt to create a stable and cohesive following. Chapter two describes and analyses the emergence of Dianetics, exploring the origins, the nature and the development of its beliefs and practices, the character of its followers, and its mode of organization. In chapter three the strains and tensions which threatened the disruption of the movement are considered, and the processes by which the movement's leaders sought to resolve these problems. Chapter four presents the beliefs and practices of the new gmosis, Scientology, on the basis of which organizational transformation was carried through. The progressive rationalization of the practise and teaching of Scientology was an important component of the process by which the leader was enabled to secure unchallenged control of the movement. In chapter five the manner in which this control was exercised through an increasingly bureaucratic administration is discussed. Chapter six analyses the motivations of recruits to Scientology, and the process through which, as individuals become increasingly committed to the tion in the pursuit of organizational ends. In chapter seven a model drawn from the sociology of deviance, the 'deviance-amplification'model, is employed to analyse the controversy and hostility in which this movement was involved during the 19605, and the nature of the movement's response. In chapter eight Scientology is viewed as a deviant version of social reality, and a number of mechanisms are described by which this reality is sustained. In the concluding chapter Scientology is located within a view of secularization and its impact on the prevailing religious climate; and a number of the major themes explored in the work are summarized. McthodolugJ The methodology of the study is eclectic. Since the aim of the research was primarily that of generating data concerning certain broad themes rather than testing a limited and defined set of hypotheses, various methods were employed in order to maximize the information available, and at the same time to provide a method of 'triangulation', whereby one data source could be checked against another. The principal source of information has been documentary. L. Ron Hubbard was a prolific writer for some years before his creation of Dianetics, and the movement has, throughout the quarter of a century of its existence, been the source of many millions of words. Much of this material was of ephemeral interest, and much that wcs produced in the early years is no longer available. Fortunately, some individuals in England and America have retained collec. tions of old documentation a dusty reminder of an earlier enthusiasm and these collections proved an invaluable source of histoncal information. Containing, as they often did, the works of schismatics and heretics, notebooks and letters, these documentary sources often fulfilled both methodological needs. Study was made of the now extensive, although by no means complete, collection of more recent material in the Bntish Museum. In the United States, legal records and supporting documents were examined. Individuals made other documents and tape-recordings available to me, as did the Church of Scientology on certain occasions. The second important source of information was from interviews. 83 individuals were interviewed, of whom 35 had become involved in the movement during its Dianetics phasel and 43 after the transition to Scientology. The remaining 5 individuals were never committed to the movement, but had I Dianeties as a form of theory and prachce is shll employed by the movement, However, I use the term throughout, unless contextuallY indicated, to refer to u thasc of the movemcnt, prior to the development of Scientology. 'Dianeticist'usually refers to tomeone who joined the movement during thu phase, or to someone who continued Interviews were principally occasions for respondents to talk freely on certain themes to which I sought to direct them. Usually, the interviews were tape-recorded unless the informant objected on the grounds that some traceable record of our conversation might fall into hostile hands; or when the surroundings made recording difficult. The interviews varied greatly in length, from three-quarters of an hour to a total of over ten hours. The yield from these procedures was inevitably uneven in the quantity and quality of usable material produced. Interview respondents were generated in a number of ways. Names of potential informants were originally supplied by a former member. These individuals in turn supplied further names, some former members, some still committed in various ways to the movement. Other interview respondents were generated as a result of a questionnaire which was circulated. This questionnaire method was relatively unfruitful m terms of conventional survey critena. Of some 150 questionnaires sent out over several months, only 46 completed schedules were returned. As well as sending questionnaires to individuals whose names were supplied by informants, questionnaire respondents also provided further names. A very dated mailing list of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists Internahonal was provided by one informant, and the names sampled. It was this which led to the lo v return-rate. The mailing list was some eight years out of date, and very few of the questiommaires sent to the sample from it were returned. Questionnaires were sent only to United Kingdom residents. A very brief period was spent in participant observation. At an early stage in the research, the author went to the movement's headquarters, Saint Hill Manor, to takc a Communications Course. Despite later claims by representatives of the movement that the author acted unethically by not revealing his sociological mterest, the author was simply responding to widespread advertising inviting members of the public to take this course and at no point made any effort to conceal his identity. After two days, he found it impossible to continue with the course without having to lie directly about his acceptance of its content, and withdrew. A number of other individuals and agencies have been contacted during the course of the research, and many sent long letters and other documents presenting aspects of their involvement with this movement. While very little published material on Scientology was available when the study was begun, at the time of writing some seventeen systematic and lengthy accounts exist, ranging from the journalistic to the apologetic, including five lengthy government inquiries or sponsored studies.l I Paulette Cooper, rhe Standal of Sntolagy (Tower, New York, 1971 ); Cynl Vosper rhc Mind Bcndas (Neville Spearman, London, 1971); George Malko, SvicnlolagJ: Ihc INTRODUCTION AND UETHODOLOGICAL NOTt Now religioa (Dell, New York, 1970); Robert Kaufman, Inside Scicntolog (Olympia, New York, 1972); Maurice Burrell, Saentolos-y: What B Is and What It Does (Lake- land, London, 1970); C. H. Rolph, BelieD6 What You Like (Andre Deutsch, London, 1973); Chriseopher Evans, Cults of Unreason (Harrap, London, 1973); David R. Dalton, rwo Disparatc Philosophes (Regency, London 1973); Omar V. Garrison, 7hehriddcnSto/yofScicntolory(ArlingtonBookz,London, 1974); HarrietWhitehead, 'Reasonably fantastic: some perspectives on Scientology, science fiction and occultism', in Irving 1. Zaretsky and Mark Leone (eds), Religious Mouements n Contemporary Amrrica (Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1974); John A. Lee, Sectarian Healers aad llypnotherapy (Queen's Printer, Toronto, 970); Walter Braddeson, Scientolo!!yfor the Millions (Sherbourne, Los Angeles, 1969); Helen O'Bnen, Dianetics in Lmbo (Whitmore, Philadelphia, 1966); SirJohn G. Foster, Enquiry into thzPracticrand Efects of Srientoloy (HMSO, London, 197l ); Kevin V. Anderson, Report of the Board of Inguiry into Scientology (Government Printer, Melbourne, 1965); Sir Guy Richardson Powles and E. V. Dumbleton, Report of the Commission of Inquiry into the lubbard Scientology Orzanisation in Nera Zealand (Government Printer, Wellington, New Zealand, 1969); G. P. C. Kotze, et al., Repor of the Commission of Enquiry into Scirntology for rg7z (Government Printer, Pretoria, South Africa, 1973). It should be noted that of these works, that by Burrell was withdrawn shortly after it appeared, and the publishers of the A TYPOLOGY AND A THEORY entihcahon Sects have been the focus of considerable research enterprise in the sociology of religion, and much of this endeavour has been directed to the issue of whether, or under what conditions, sects become transformed into denominations I This dominating area of concern has distracted attention from other types of ideological collectivity and other possible processes. An analogous but different procetz, to which little attention has been paid, is that of the transformation of cultz into sects. Until recently, cults have been regarded as rather trivial social phenomena, unworthy of systematic sociological attention. More important perhaps, the process of transformation of cults into sects has, on some accounts, been rendered not merely empirically unlikely, but a priori impossible. Consider, for example, Glock and Stark's def nition. Cults they argue are religious movements which draw meir inspiration from other than the primary religion of the eulture, and...are not schismatic movements in the same sense as Consider, for example, Glock and Stark's denition. Cults they argue are religious movements which draw their inspiration from other than the primary religion of the culture, and...are not schismatic movements in the same sense as sectz whore concern is with preserving a purer form of the tradihonal faith. Glock and Stark demne cult and sect in terms of the conrnt of belie Cults have theoloFcally alien beliefs, sects have more rigorous or more fundamentaluzt variants of the prevailing theology, and are schismatic in origm. On this basis there could be individual convernon from one to another, but not organizational transformation. While Glock and Stark draw an impenetrable theological boundary between cult and sect, others such as Lofland and Dohrman blur any boundary between I H. R Niebuhr, / he Social Sourccs of Denominationalism (Holt, Rinehart Winston, New York, 925); Bryan R. Wilson, 'An analysis of seet development', ASR, 24 ('959), PP 3-15- Charles r Glock and Rodney Stark, religion and Socict. in rcnsion (Rand McNally, Chicago, 1965), p. 245. them at all Lodand, in his definition of cults, describes them as 'little groups'which break off from the conventional consensus and espouse vely different views of the renl, the possible and the morall while Dohrman suggests that the concept of 'cult'will refer to that group, secular, religious, or both, that has deviated from what our American Society considers normative forms of religion, cconomics, or poLitics, and has substituted a new and often unique view of the individual, his world, and how this v orld may be attained Z Thesc forms of definition seem inadcquate from a number of points of vie-v 1 If dcviance is the idcntifying characteristic of cult belicfs as suggested by Lofiand and Dohrman, Cllristian schismatic and LtercticaL forms of bclief, such as thosc of Christian Science, the Iormons, Jehovah's 'v'itnesses, and even the Salvation rmy, become the ideologies of cults The distinction between cult and sect disappear5 t 2 If, as Glock and Stark suggest, cults are to be identlfied by their alien 'inspiration', and sects by their concern to preserve the purity of the 'traditional faith'and their schismatic origins, cults and sccts are t, pes of ideological collectivity which bear no developmental relationship to each other We cannot predica of a cult its possible transformation into a sect. More important, however, this definition ignores a crucial sociological feature, that is the social organization of the collectivities concerned The theological cntenon of classification employed by Glock and Stark provides us with no insight into the similarities in mode of organization and methods of control over adherents of such theologically diverse movements as Christian Science, Scientology,aJehovah's Witnesses, etc. Deviance, it has been suggested, is a distinguishing feature of both cult anl sect. Cult and sect are deviant in relation to the respectable, the normatively sanctioned, forms of belief prevailing at any time. Today they are deviant in comparison with prevailing indifference, agnostirism, or denominational Christian orthodoxy.S A feature which distinguishes betv een them is that, like IJohn Lofland, Doomsday Cult (Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliflfs, Ne w Jeney, 1966), p. 1. 'H. T. Dohrman, CalifoMia Cult: tle Story af Mankind United (Beacon Press, Boston, 958), p. x. 'As it does in the work of some theologians for e:cample, A. A. Hoekema, i hs our Majar Cults (Eerdmans, Grand Rapids, 196g). : For a comparison of Christian Science and Scientology, see Roy Wallis, 'A comparative analysis of problems and processes of change in two manipulationist movements: Christian Science and Scientology'in 'rhe Contemoorary fetamorhosis of Religion? Acts of the l2th International Conference on the Sociology of Religion (The Hague, Netherlands, August, 1973, PP Jr7-Z2 5 On the Prevailing religious climate in Britain and America, see Bryan R. Wilson, Religion in Secular Soriety (Penguin Books, Harmondsworth, 1969); Will Herberg, Protestant-Catholic-ew (Doublcday Anchor, Ncw York, :960); Rodney Stark and the church, the sect is conceived by its adherents to be uniquely Iegitimate as a means of access to truth or salvation. The cult, like the denomination, is conceived by followers to be pluralisticallv legitimate, one of a variety of paths to the truth or salvation.l This provides us with the following typology: A ypologv of Ideological CollectiDiiiesr Respectable DeDiant Uniquely legitimate Church Sect Plutalistically legitimate Denomination Cult A theory of culi deDelopment Although not all new religious movements go through any simple undirectional sequence of stages,3 it is worth emphasizing that some do undergo transformation from one type of collectivity to another. The best known case, although less typical than was once believed, is the development of sects into denominahons. It is argued here that some new religious movements emerge as cults, and of these, some develop into sects. Colin Campbell has proposed the notion of the culhc milieu to refer to the cultural underground from which cults arise. This cultic milieu he describes as Mueh broader, deeper and historieally based [sicl than the contemporary movement known as the underground, it includes all denant belief-systems and their associated practices. Unorthodox science, alien and heretical religion, deviant medicine, all comprise elements of such an underground. In addition, it includes the collectivities, institutions, individuals and media of communication associated with these beliefs. Substantively it includes the worlds of the occult and the magical, of spiritualism and psychic phenomena, of mystiQsm and new thought, of faith I The notions of unique and pluralistic legitimacy were first employed by Roland Robertson, 7. he Sociological Interpretation of 12cligion (BlackweD, Oxford, l 970), p. I 23, in slightly different fashion. David Martin has also drawn attention to the pluralistic legibmacy of the cult and the denommnation, See the appendix, 'The denomination'in Dand Marhn, Paafsm (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 1965). 'In the context of some ideological collectivities the label 'church'would be inappropnate, as indeed might some of the others. In the case of political movements, for example, what one has in mind here is the Nazi party in Germany after I gg,, or the Bolshevik party in Russia after 1922. In terms of churches, Catholicism would typically fit this category, as would the Calvinism of Calvin's Geneva. Catholicism in contemporary America, however, is clearly denominational. S The Quakers, for example, appear to have fluctuated between sectarianism and denominationalism, see Elizabeth Isiehei, 'From sect to denomination among English Quakers'in Bryan Wilson, ed., Patttns of Sectalianism (Heinemann, London, 1967), pp. 161-81. Charles Glock, American Pidy: the Naturc af Pdigiaus Commitment (University of California Press, Berkeley, 1968). healing and nature cure. This heterogeneous assortrnent of culhlral itenns can be regarded despite its apparent diversity, as constituting a single entity the entity of the cultic milieu.l This idea seems a helpful one in broadly characterizing the background from which cults emerge. Cults differentiate themselves from this background as more or less temporary associations of 'seekers'organized around some common interest, the researches or the revelations of an individual. The belief systems around which they are organized are typically broadly based syntheses of ideas and practices available within the cultic milieu and sometimes beyond, adapted, supplemented, and organized through the insights of their founders.' Cults are generally described as exhibiting a number of typical features. They are depicted as oriented towards the problems of individuals, loosely structured, tolerant, non-exclusive, they make few demands on members, possess no clear distinction between members and non-members, have a rapid turnover of membership, and are transient collectives. Their boundaries are vague and undefined, and their belief systems are said to be 'fluctuating'.3 These features of the cult can be accounted for in terms of a central characteristic of cult organization, which I shall refer to as 'epistemological individualism'.5 By epistemological individualism I mean to suggest that the cult has no clear locus of final authority beyond the individual member. Unlike the sect, the ideal typical cult lacks any source of legitimate attributions of heresy. Hence in movements such as spiritulism,S New Thought,5 and much of the flying saucer movement,7 so vague is the range of accepted teaching that 'heresy'is a concept I Colin Campbell, 'The cult, the cultic milieu and secularization' in Michael Hill ed. A Sociologcal relrbook of Rdigwn in Britain, No. 5 (SCM Press London, tg72) p. Ir2. For some of the pseudo-6cientific Culb to have developed, see Martin Gardner 17ads and allacies in the Name of Scence (Dover Publications, New York, 1957). S See Geoffrey K. Nelson, 'The concept of cult', Sociological Pcriew, 16, 3 (19ba), pp. 351-6 t, for a review of the charactenstics of the cults. 5 Davld Martin has stressed that 'The fundamental cnterion of the cult is...individualism', David Marhn, PaciJism (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 1965), p. 194. However, in contrast to my own formulation, Martin regards the sect as exhibiting either 'authoritarianism or...almost total lack of authority'(Ibid, p. 185). He also employs an implicitly theological distinction. Culb are conceived to be theologically alien, while sects fall within the Chnstian tradition and are marked by the extremlsm wlth which they reject contemporary society. 5 Geoflrey K. Nelson, Spiritualism and Society (Routledge & Kegan Paul, Londo 5 Charles S. Braden, Spirits in Rebllwn: th Rise and Development of New 7houg (Southern Methodlst Univer3ity Press, Dallas, Texas, 1963); J. Stillson Judah, 7 listory and Phlosophy of the Met:physical Morements in Amerlca (Westminster Pres Philadelphia, 1967). 'H. Taylor Buckner, 'The flying saucerians: a lingering cult Ntw Society, g Se tember 1965. An exception is the Aetherius iociety, which has moved very muc closer than Buckner's groups towards sectarianism. See Roy Wrllis, 'The Aethenl without clear application, The determination of what constitutes acceptable doctrine is a matter to be decided by the individual member. Lacking any authoritative source of attributions of heresy there can be no clear boundaries between (I) cult ideology and the surrounding cultic milieu, nor, in the absence of authoritative tests of doctrine or membership, between (2) members and non-members. There are, therefore, few barriers to doctrinal adaptation and change. Since the determination of doctrine lies with the members, cults cannot command the loyalty of their membership which remains only partially committed. Commitment being slight, resources for the control of members are lacking. Members typically move between groups, and between belief systems adopting components to fit into the body of truth already gleaned. The loyalties of members are thus often shared between ideological collectivities, and this leads to tolerance. Membership changes rapidly as members move on from one group to another,l and the collectivities themselves tend to be transient as charismatic leaders emerge and attempt to control the activities of the following and this, in turn, leads to alienation; or as dissension anses due to the relatively limited basis of shared belie Since any particular cult is only one among many possible patbs to the truth or salvation, membership may decline through sheer indifference. In order to retain or bolster membership, appeal may be made to an ever wider range of interests, leading to ideological diffuseness and the reduced relevance of the cult beliefs for the individuaps salvation.2 Power lies in the hands of the consumer, and for the individual's salvation.2 Power lies in the hands of the consumer, and leaders may often be forced tD cater for consumer interests rather than directing them, or risk membership decline. Cults then, are fragile institutions. They typically face a problem of doctrina precariousness, that is, the ideological distance between the cult doctrine and the cultic milieu from which it was derived is typically slight. Ideologically the cult is, therefore, poorly differentiated from its background. A membership primarily recruited from other cultic groups is liable to be selective in its acceptance of the doctrine and disposed to create a new synthesis of the cult's teachings with other belief-systems, thus threatening the reabsorption of the cult into the cultic milieu. I Buckner suggests 'A typieal occult seeker will probably have been a Rosicrucian, a member of Mankind United, a Theosophist, and also a member of four or five smaller specific cults. The pattern of memberzhip is one of continuous movement from one idea to another Seekers stay with a cult unhl they are satisfied that they ean learn no more from it or that it has nothing further to offer, and then move on'. H. Taylor Buckner, 'The flying saucenans: an open door cult'in Marcello Truzzi, ed., Sociology and Evtryday Life (Prentice-Hall, Engiewood Cliffs, Nev-Jersey, tg68), pp. 225-6. 5Buekner, op. cit. (196$), suggests such a process occurred in the flying saucer grou,or which he observed. Society: a case study in the formation of a mystagogic congregahon, Sociatogicat Review, 22,1 (l974),pp.27-44.ReprintedinRoyWallis,ed., Seclarianism:.nalysesafltetigious and Jon-h'eigias Secls (Peter Ov en, London, l975). 111 THE SOCIOLOGY OF CULT AND SECT Cults similarly face a problem of authority, deriving from two features of cultic movements. Furst, their membership is predominantly composed of seekers who see a variety of paths to the truth or salvation and who regard it as their right to select those ideas and practices which wLI lead towards this goal. Second, cults are typically service-oriented, purveying an experience, know- ledge or technique through teachers and practitioners. Hence charisma tends to be dispersed toward5 the lower echelons. Membership (or clientele) loyalties are often centred on the local teacher or practitioner rather than on the movement as a whole. There is therefore a perennial threat of schism and secession as local teachers or practitioners assert their autonomy. Third, cults tend to face a problem of commitment. They are viewed as one among a range of paths to truth or salvation rather than a unique path. They typically dispense commodities of a limited and specific kind. The involvement of the membership tends, therefore, to be occasional, temporary and segmentary. Retaining, institutional- izing and enhancing membership commitment therefore presents a problem to cults which, if unresoved, may lead to passive and limited involvement, apathy, and declining adherence. Sectarianism as stratey In the face of these problems of organizational fragility, the possibility of developing a cohesiye sectanan collectivitv has had considerable appeal to some developing a cohesive sectarian colleetivity has had eonsiderable appeal to some eult leaders. Seets may emerge in a variety of ways, as sehismatie movements from existing denominations, as a result of interdenominational erusades, or tbrough a proeess of development from eults. The dimensions of the seet have been mueh debated.l Among those that have been advaneed, eharaeteristies, sueh as the esehatologieal nature of the seet stressed by Troeltseh, but also such eharaeter istics as aseetieism, the aehieved basis of membership, an ethieal orientation, and egalitarianism, seem in retrospect to have been features of the sect in partieular soeio-historieal eireumstanees rather than timeless, or universal dimensions of seetarianism.2 Those features advaneed as eentral to the concepl of sect which have stood the test of time, therefore, seem to centre on the right to exclusion, a self-conception as an elect or elite, totalitarianism, and hostility towards, or separation from, the state or society. The suggestion advaneed here is that these dimensions of seetarianism are I senton Johnson, 'A critical appraisal of the ehureh-sect typology', ASR, 2 (9S7), pp. 88-92; idem, 'On church and sect', ASR, 28 (1963), pp. 539-49; idem Church and sect revisited', 7SSR, m, 2 (1971), pp. 124-37; J. Milton Yinger, rhe Scienti ic Study of Relieion (Collier-Macmillan, New York, 1970); Bryan R. WiLson, Sects and: Society (Heinemann, London, 1961). I have argued this point in Roy Wallis, 'The sectarianism of 5cientology'in Michael Hill, ed., A Sociologioal reaTtook of Religion in sitain, No. 6 (5CM Press, London, 1973), pp 36-S5- related to the characteristic which underlies sect organization - 'epistemological authoritarianism Sects possess some authoritative locus for the legitimate attribution of heresy.l Sects lay a claim to possess unique and privileged access to the truth or salvation. Their committed adherents typically regard all those outside the confines of the collectivity as 'in error'. The truth must be protected from defilement or misuse and therefore extens*e control is necessary over those to whom access is permitted, and the exclusion of the unworthy. Those who remain, therefore, believe themselves to have proven their superlor status. Hostility to state or society readily follows. The state demands acceptance oEits own version of the truth in some particulars. In those areas it defines as its legitimate concern it can brook no rivals taxes must be paid, births registered, children educated, wars fought whatever the revelation. Thus state and society may threaten, and even directly confiict with, the sectarian's notion of what constitutes the truth, sometimes forcing the sect to defend its vision by isolation and withdrawal. The transition from cult to sect, therefore, involves the arrogation of authority. In order for a cohesive sectarian group to emerge from the diffuse, individualistic origins of a cult, a prior process of expropriation of authority must transpire This centra ization of authority is typically legitimized by a claim to a unique revelation which locates some source or sources of authority concerning doctrinal innovation and interpretatiOn beyond the individu member or prachtioner, usually in the person of the revelator himself. Propounding a new gnosis and centralizing authority permits the exercise of greater control over the collectivity through the elimination or underrnining of alternative loci of power and the transmutation of independent practitioners and teachers into organizational functionanes. It facilitates the establishment of clearer cognitive boundaries around the belief-system; the abandonment of elements which most closelv link it to the cultic milieu; and the introduction of new doctrinal elements which effectively distinguish it from competitors. Doctrine may be expanded to incorporate a systematic metaphysics increasing its scope beyond the mere provision of a rahonale for a specific and limited form of practice. Thus a wider and deeper commitment is encouraged. Since the new doctrine is endowed with unique salvational efficacy it provides a focus for more than segmentary and occasional involvement, and a rationale for insulating the believer, for example, by the denigration of alternative sources of ideology and involvement, and by endowing the world and competing belief-systems with formerly unsuspected danger. The emergence of a charismatic leader provides a 'Where such authority lies may not always be obvious, even to members. It may sometimes be shared between two or more loci, a situation liable to lead to conflict, and a power-struggle, as, for example, in the struggle between the prophets and thl aposfles in the Catholic Apostolic Church See Kenneth Jones, 'The Catholie Apostolie Church: a study in diflfused commitmenfl in vlichael Hill, ed., A Sociological erbook oJ Religion in liricin, No. 5 SCM Press, London, 1972), ppm37-60. 18 THr SOCIOLOGY or CHLT AD SHCT focus of loyalty of a supra-local kind. Together these factors assist in the transmutation of a clientele into a following. A successfully implemented strategy of sectarianization, therefore, provides one viable and attractive solution to the cultic problem of institutional fragility.l I Aspects of his theoretical structure have been devdoped in Roy Wallis, 'Ideologv, authority and the developnnent of cultic nnovernents', StciaI Reearch, 41, 2 (197i), DIANETICS Background to the cult The founder of Dianetics and Scientology, L. Ron Hubbard, is reported to have been born m Igm at Tilden, Nebraska. His father was an officer in the US navy and appears to have seen ser ice in the East, on which occasions his son may have spent vacations with him. He was raised for some years by his maternal grandfather who ov ned a ranch in Montana, and spent his early teens in Washington DC, where he graduated to George Washington University. According to the testimony of the Registrar of George Washington University, Hubbard attended the summer session in 1931, and the fall and spring sessions 1931-32. He was placed on probation in September 1931 and failed to return for the fall 1932 sersion.l His early adulthood is somewhat difficult to trace. He appears to have led a mobile life, acquiring a number of skills and working in various jobs. Arnong the occupations m which he is reported to have been engaged during this period, are pilot, US Marine, radio entertainer, scriptwriter and explorer. Hubbard was also a prolific wnter of pulp magazine adventure, phantasy, and science fiction stories and novels in the same genres. Hubbard was commissioned into the navy before the outbreak of the Second World War and is reported to have spent some time in Oak Knoll, a military hospital. There he is reported and his own statements lend some credibility to this account to have interested himself particularly in the patients suffering from mental or emotional disorders to whom he talked, and to have sought out books dealing with the subject.2 Eollowing the war, Hubbard parted from his first wife and two children to go 'In the liSht of Hubbard's later claims to competence in physics it is worthy of note that in a course on dynamics sound and liSht he aehieved a grade E, in a course on electricity and masnetism a srade D, and in a course on modern physieal phenomena molecular and atomic physics he was awarded a srade F. Stenographic rranscript, Poun,ing Church of Scientology u. U.S.A, in US Court of Claims, No. 226-61, Washinstcn D Por example, in a story reported in the Withita Eagle, 24 April 1 95 r. 22 THZ CULT AND ITS TRANSFORMATION to Holly vood as a scriptwTiter. What success he may have had at this vocation is uncertain, but dunng the following three years Hubbard became a major writer for .4stounding Science Fiction, acquired an expert knowledge of the practice of hypnosis, and became briefiy involved with Jack Parsons, a follower of Aleister Crowley in Pasadena. During his period in Hollywood, Hubbard claims i got a nurse, wrapped a towe around my head and became a swami, and by 1947 achieved 'clearing'.' Probably some time during 1948 Hubbard wrote a book outlining his ideas for a new form of psychotherapy, later published in revised form as he Original / hesis, for which he was unable to find a publisher at the time. By 1 949, Hubbard was living in Bay Head, New Jersey, where he appears to have interested John W. Campbell Jr, editor of Astounding Science Fiction, in his therapeutic ideas, and indeed to have relieved him, at least temporarily, of chronic sinusitis.3 4 Gaining John W. Campbell as a disciple was indeed fortunate. Campbell was an established editor of a respected science fiction magazine with a considerable follo-ving. He was acquainted with doctors, scientists, publishers and others who could lend their support to Dianetics, Hubbard's new psychotherapy, and commanded access to an important medium of communication within and beyond the cultic milieu. Campbell succeeded in interesting a Michigan general practitioner v. ho occasionally contributed to Astounding, Dr J. A. Winter. After some correspondence with Hubbard, 'Vinter visited Hubbard's house in Bay Head, New Jersey, where the latter had a small clientele on whom he was practising and developing his techmi:ue. Winter relates: larrivedinBayHead,N.J.onOctoberr, Ig4g,andimmediatelybecameimmersed in a life of dianetics and very little else. I observed two of the patients wbom Hubbard had under treatment at this time, and spent hours each day watching him send these men 'down the time-traek'. After some observation of the reaction of I Alexander.Mitchel', 'The odd beginnings of Ron Hubbard's career', Sunday 7 imts, 5 October tg69, p. Q; eorrespondence with members and former members of the Ordo Templi Orientis; and interviews with acquaintances of Hubbard at this time. See also Chapter 4. It should be noted that the Sunday 7 imes article contained errors for which ib publuhers rendered an apology and paid an out of eourt settlement. 2 L. Ron Hubbard, 'The story of dianetics and scientology', Lectu7es on Cleaing recorded at the Londrn Congress tgs8 (Hubbard Communications Omce, London 8). 5 Martin Gardner, f.ds and sallacies in the Name of Science (Dover Publications, New York, 1957), p. o64. Much of this account of Hubbard's life is based on George Malko, Scientology: the NowRellgion(Dell,NewYork, tg70),pp.27-41,andGardner,op.cit.,modifiedinthe light of interviews wi:h early colleagues and acquaintances of Hubbard. See also Chrutopher Evans, Culs of Unreason (Harrap, London, rg73). While the account offered here is nat to Qy knowledge inaccurate, it should be noted that Malko's book has been withdrawn b, its publishers who also paid a legal settlement. others, I concluded that my learning of this technique would be enhanced by sub- mitting myself to therapy. I took my place on the couch, spending sn average of three hours a day trying to follow the directions for recalling 'impediments'. The experience was intriguing; I found that I could remember much more than I had thought I could, and I frequently experienced the discomfort which is known as 'restimulation'. While listening to ubbard 'running'one of his patients, or vhile being 'run myself, I ould find myself developing unaccountable pains in various portlons of my anatomy, or becoming extremely fatigued and somnolent. I had mghtmares of being choked, of having my genitalia cut off, and I was convinced that dlanetles as a method could produce effects.' Having experienced these effects in therapy and discovering that he could produce them in others, Winter moved to ew Jersey to work with Hubbard. There with Campbell and Hubbard he vorked on a systematic formulation of the theory and practice, modifying nomenclature. A paper giving a 'resume of the principles and methodology of dianetic therapy'was submitted by Winter to the ournal of the American sledical Association, but was rejected. A revised version including case histories supplied by Hubbard was submitted to the American ournal of Psychiatry, but again rejected.r Winter was also unsuccessful in his attempts to persuade other medical practitioners to try out the therapy. Hubbard therefore decided to write a book directed to the laity rather than the medical profession, and Campbeil commissioned an article from him on Dianetics for Astounding. This article was previewed by Campbell in his editoriais in extremely enthusiastic terms: in longer range view...the item that most interests me at the moment is an article on the most important subject conceivable. This is not a hoax artiele. It ir an article on the science of the mind, of human thought. It is not an article on psychology that isn't a science. It's not General Semantics. It is a totally new science called dianetics, and it does precisely what a scirncc of thought should do. Its power is almost unbelievable; it proves the mind not only can but does rule the body eompletely; following the sharply defined basic laws dianetics sets forth, physical ills such as uicers, asthma and arthritis can be cured, as can all other psychosomatic ills....It is, quite simply, impossible to exaggerate the importance of a true science of human thought.'I assure you of two things: you will find the article fascinating, and it is of more importance than you ean readily realise.4 And finally: Next month's issue will, I believe, cause one full-scale explosion across the country. We are carrying a sixteen thousand word article entitled 'Dianetics...An Joseph A. Winter, A Doctor s Report on Dianetics: rheory and I herapy (Julian Press, New York, 1 95 l ) p m. 2 Ibid., p. 18. 'John W. Campbell, 'In times to come', Astounding Science Fichon, 44, 4 (December '949), p. 80. 'John W. Campbell, Astounding Science Fiction 4j, 1 (March Igso), p. 4. Introduction to a New Science', by L. Ron Hubbard. It will, I believe, be the first publication of the material. It is, I assure you in full and absoiute sincerity, one of the most important articles ever published. In this article, reporting on Hubbard's own research into the engineering question of how the human mind operates, immensely important basic discoverie. are related. Among them: A technique of psychotherapy has been developed which Will cure any insanity not due to organic de;truction of the brain. A technique mhat gives a man a perfect, indelible, total memory, and perfect, errorless ability to compute hu problems. A basic answer, and a technique for curing not alleviating - uicers, arthritis, asthma, and many other nongerm diseases. A totally new conception of the truly incredible ability and power of the human mind. Evidence that insanity is contagious, and is not hrrsditaty. Thls is no wild meory. It is not mysticism. It is a coldly precise engineering description of how the human mind operates, and how to go about restoring correct operation tested and used on some two hundred and fifty cases. And it makes only one overall claim: the methods logically developed from that description worl;. The memory stimulation technique is so powerful that, within thirty minutes of entering therapy, most people will recall in full detail their own birth. I have observed it in action, and used the techniques mysebf. I leave it to your judgement: Will such an alticle be of interest to you? It is not only a fact article of the highest importance; it is the story of the ultimate adventure an exploration in the strangat of all tcrra inrognita; the human mind. No stranger adventure appeared in the Arabian Nights than Hubbard's experience, using his new techniqua, in plowing through the strange jungle of distorted thoughts within a human mind. To find, beyond that zone of madnas, a computing mechanism of ultimate and incredible emciency and perfection! To find that a fuUy ane) enormously able and altruistic personality is trapped deep in every human mind however insane or criminal it may appear on the outside !l These editorial previews attracted inquiries from individuals seeking therapy and traimng, and in April 1950, the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation was established to provide the services for which a demand was appearjng. rhcory and practite of Dianetics The eagerly awaited article appeared in the May issue of Astounling.Z There John W. Campbell, 'In tima to come', eistounding Scicnct Fictwn, 45, 2 (Apnl l 950), 5 L Ron Hubbard, 'Dianetia: the evolution of a science', Astounding Scicncc /'iction, 45, 3 (May l950), pp. 45-87. Repnnted with some minor modifications as Dianetics: the Evolution of a Scicncc (Publications Organisation World Wide, 1968), hereafter referred to as ES. An earlier article on Dianetics had appeared in a publieation of the New York Explorers Club, L. Ron Hubbard, 'Terra incognita: the mind', Ihe Extorcr's ournat, 28, 1 (winteSpnng 195O), pp. 1-4, 52. This article presents Hubbard presented a model of the mind as a computer. The 'optimum'mind, Hubbard argued, would have perfect recall of all sense-impressions which had ever impinged upon it, and vastly improved mental agility beyond that of the normal brain. Since this level of optumum functioning is potentially available to every mind, Hubbard called this the 'basic personality': tho basic personalities contacted were invariably strong, hardy, and constructively good ! They were the same personalities as the patients had in a normal state minu certain mental powers, plus electronic demons and plus general unhappiness.l The basic personality was also called a 'clear'. This term was derived from the operation of a calculating machine, in which depressed numbers are released. If left unreleased, the depressed numbers will result in a systematic inaccuracy in future computations. Since the 'normal'mind fell far short of the heights postulated by Hubbard for the basic personality, he argued that like the com puter with a 'held down seven', the normal mind was operahng under the constraints of severe 'aberrations'which limited its capacities and caused mis-computation. These aberrations resulted from pain. Pain was a threat to survival (which Hubbard argues is the basic principle of existence). Therefore the mind the sane, analytical mind sought to avoid it. Evolution had provided a mechanism which made this possible. The 'Reactive Mind'had evolved as a means of protecting the sensitive computing machinery of the 'Analytical Mind'from damage in the face of threats to survival. The reachve mind thinks in identities. It is a stimulus-response mind. Its actions The reactive mmnd thmnks in idenPities. It is a stimulus.response mind. Ib action are exteriorly determined. It has no power of choice. It pnts phyrical pain datt forward during moments of physical pain in an effort to save the organism. So long as its mandates and commands are obged it withholds mhe physical pain. As soon as the organism starts to go against its commands, it indicts the pain.'In moments of pain, unconsciousness or emotional trauma, the analytical mind shuts off and the reactive mind comes into operation. The reactive mind operates on the basis of information stored in the reactive memory banks. The contenb of these reactive banks are 'engrams'and 'locks'.S An engram is a recording of the full perceptic content of a moment of pain, unconsciousness, or emotional loss. Hence, Hubbard argued that wmle it was 5, P 3- 'Ibid., p. 62. Ibid., p. 63. In part of the original Asounding article, the term 'norn'was used instead of 'engram'. Dianetics as an aid to expedition commanders with umbalanced personnel. It had little or no impact. Dianeticists and Scientologists do not in general know ot its existence, and it is of interest solely because it employs the term 'comanome'rather than the earlier term 'impediment', or the later term engram-. This lends some support to Winter's version of the derivation o Dianehc terminology, and hence to his claim that the work ot Richard Semon was unknown to Hubbard at this time. See below, page 36. 20 THE CULT AND ITS TRANSFORMATION believed by orthodox psychology that during periods of unconsciousness, nothing was perceived, he had discovered that there was no period when the organism did not perceive. Perception, however, was performed by different components of the mind the analytical mind during periods of normal consciousness, the reacDive mind duLing periods of 'analytical attentuation'('anaten'), that is what were otherwise believed to be periods of unconsciousness. At some future date should the individual enter an environment which contained any of this perceptic content, the analytical mind would begin to shut off, the reactive mind would come into operation and the individual would experience some of the pain originally contained in the engram, as a warning to leave the situation of danger. For example: Here's how an engram can be established: Mary age 2, knocked out by a dog, dog bites. Content of engram: anaten; age 2 (physical structure); smell of environment and dog; sight of dog jaws gaping and white teeth; organic sensation of pain in back of head (hit pavement); pain in posterior; dog bite in cheek; tactile of dog fur, concrete (elbows on pavement), hot dog breath; emotion; physical pain plus cndocrine response; audio of dog growl and passing car. What Mary does with the engram: she does not 'remember'the incident but somehmes plays she is a dog Jumping on people and biting them. Otherwise no reaction. Then at age ro similar circumstances, no great anaten, the engram is restimulated. After this she has headaches when dogs bark or when cars pass that sound like that car, but only responds to the engram when she is tired or harassed otherwise. The engram was first dormant data waihng just in case. Next it was keyed-in stu^f we Then at age m similar circumstances, no great anaten, the engram is reshmulated. After this she has headaches when dogs bark or when cars pass that sound iike hzt car, but only responds to the engram when she is tired or harassed otherwise. The engram was first dormant data waiting just in case. Next it was keyed-in stuff we have to watch out for. Then it was thereafter restimulated whenever any combina- tion of its perceptics appeared while Mary was in slight anaten (weary). When forry years of age she responded in exactly the same way, and still had not the slightest conscious understanding of the real reason !l If in the formation of the engram words are spoken, these words may have a later effect similar to that of a post-hypnotic suggestion. If the words art subsequently repeated, the engram is 'keyed-in'or partially restimulated, and if 'the individual is slightly anaten weary, ill, sleepy'the engram will be fully restimulated, leading him to behave in aberrated ways. The purpose of Dianetic therapy, therefore, was to gain access to and locate engrams, and 'erase'them from the reactive mind, thus eradicating their effects in the form of psychosomatic illness, emotional tension, or lowered capability, by permitting the analytical mind to operate unimpeded. Hubbard claimed to have a technique which would remove an engramic 'memory'from the reactive mind, refiling it in the memory of the analytical mind where it no longer had engramic effects.Z lxhausting the reactive mind of engrams hence has a number of highly desirable consequences. The individual becomes 'self-determined'rather than having his actions determined by his IES,pp.65-6. Ibid., p. 70. engramS. The analytical mind being a perfect computer would always supply the correct answer from the information fed in, when relieved of the engrams which lead to error.l The individual's IQwould rise dramatically. He would be free of all psychological or psychosomatic illness, his resistance to physical illness would be vastly improved, and he would be able to cure himself of other illnesses or injuries much more rapidly. His memory would vastly improve. He would, in short be a 'clear'. As Hubbard describes it: The experience of his entire life is available to the rlstr and he has all his inherent mental ability and imagination free to use it. His physical vitality and health are markedly improved and all psycho-somatic illnerses have vanished and will not return. He has greater re-istance to actual disease. And he is adaptable to and able to change his environment. He is not 'adjusted'; he is dynamic. His ethical and moral standards are high, his ability to seek and experience pleasure is great. His personality i5 heightened and he i. ereative and constructive. It i9 not yet known how mueh longevity is added to a life in the process of clearing, but in view of the automatic rebalancing of the endocrine system, the lowered incidence of accident and the improvement of general physical tone, it is most eertainly raised. As a standard of comparison, a clear is to the contemporary norm as the eontemporary norm is to a contemporary institutional case....A clear, for instance, has complete recall of everything which has ever happened to him or anything he has ever studied. He does mental computations, such as those of chess, for example, v hich a normal would do in half an hour, in ten or fifteen seconds....He is entirely self-determmned. And hus ereative imagination is high. He ean do a swift study of anything within his intelleetual capacity, which is inherent, and the study would be the equivalent to him of a year or two of training when he war 'normal'. His vigor, persistence and tenacity are very mueh higher than anyone has thought possible. The only obstacle to this desirable state was that while 'locks'- severe restimulations of engrams could be released by 'returning' the individual to the restimulating situation, releasing engrams and hence clearing the reactive mind required that the earliest engram (the 'basic-basic') be located and cleared. Then the therapy could move on to later engrams. Hubbard, claimed in his Astounding article that his 'pre-clears'patients) had first been found to have engrams resulting from birth, but even these did not turn out to be the earliest. The earliest engrams turned out to occur in the period shortly after conception 5 Hubbard's radical claim therefore was that the source of much human illness and incapacity lay in 'pre-natal'engrams. The commonest source of pre-natal engrams Hubbard claimed was attempted abortions. IES,p.76. L. Ron Hubbard, Dianetics: th: Modern Scenee of Mental Health (Hubbard College of Scientology, East Grinstead, 1968; first publisbed by Hermitage House, New York, 1950), pp 170-l. Thus book will be referred to hereafter as MSMH. 'n the Astauneiing article (p. 81) Hubbard states that the earliest engram he had found occurred twenty-four hours after conCepQon. In the version of this arfiele printed subsequently as ES p. 86, this had been amended to read Shortly eforr concetlon.. THE CULT AND ITS TRANSFORMATION Therapy proceeded in the following manner: The pre-clear lay on a bed or couch in a quiet room. The auditor tells hinn to look at the ceiling. The auditor says: 'When I count from one to seven your eyes will close'. The auditor counts from one to seven and Iceeps counting quietly and pleasantly until the patient close. his eyes. A tremble of the lashes will be noticed in optimum reuerie.l Hubbard insisted that this process of inducing 'Dianetic reverie'was quite different from hypnosis. To ensure against hypnotic suggeshon, however, a canceller is installed. 7:hat is, the pre-clear is told: In the future, when I utter the word Gncelled, everything which I have said to you while you are in a therapy session will be cancelled and will have no force with you. Any suggestion I hrve made to you will be without force v-hen I say the word cancelkd. o you understand?Z The pre-clear is assured he vill be aware of everything that happens. When the pre-clear has entered the state of reverie he is requested to return to childhood, to an incident involving a pleasant experience and to go through it from the beginning recounting all the perceptual detail involved in the incident. This is to give the pre-clear the idea of what is expected. If he cannot recall (or 'relive'in Hubbard's view) such an early incident, he is returned to a more recent incident. After further prelirninaries the auditor directs the pre-clear to return to 'basic-basic'. He does this by direchng the 'file-clerk'(a hypothetical entity which 'monitors' the memory banks and selects appropriate material on request by the auditor)3 to return to the incident necessary to resolve the case. Generally, the basic-basic is not located so simply, however, and other engramic material will be brought up. This has to be 'reduced', that is the pre-clear is asked to return to the begiDning of the incident and recount all the perceptual detail involved in the incident. The pre-clear is directed to recount this incident until all the emotion involved in it is discharged. MSMH, p. 159. 'MSMH, p. 200. S Ibid., p. 198. The cnteria for what counts as the reduction or erasure of an engram aro given by Hubbard as follows: 'To reduee means to take all the eharge or pain out of an incident. This means to have the pre-elear recount the incident from heginmng to end (while returned to it in revene) over and over again, piceing up all the somatics and perceptions present just as though the incident were happening at that moment. To reduce means, teehnieally, to render free of aberrative material as far as possible to mahe the case progress. 'To "erase" an engram means to recount it until it has vanished enhrely....If the engram is early, if it has no material earlier which will suspend it, that engrann will "erase'. The patient, trying to find it again for a second or sixth reeounting will suddenly find out he has no faintest idea whatwas in it. SI'vlfl, p. 287. The 'file-clerk'is then asked for 'the next incident required to resolve this case', and the process is repeated. Ideally, basic-basic would be located and erased and the pre-clear then progressively cleared of all subsequent engrams and locks. Often, however, this would not occur and it would therefore be necessary to end the session at some convenient pomt, usually after the reduction of an engram. (The modal length of a Dianetics session was generally around two hours, but when the pre-clear was 'stuck in an incident', that is, an engram, it might occasionally last several hours,) The pre-clear would be told to 'come up to present time'. The auditor might then question him as to the time, location, etc., to ensure that he was 'in present time'. He would then say 'Cancelled' and end the session. ...(work continues until the auditor has worked the patient enough for the period) ...Come to present hme. Are you in present time? (Yes) (Use canceller word). When I count from five to one and snap my fingers you will feel alert. Five, four, three, two, one. (snap) 'The thrust of the auditing activity was to get the pre-clear to return to the 'basic area', that is, the area of pre-natal experience, contact the basic-basic engram and erase it, and then move along the 'time-track'erasing later life engrams until the individual was cleared. In order to reach the basic-basic, ho-vever, it was generally believed necessary to reduce, or discharge the painful emotion from later life trauma which blocked access to it. In the course of therapy the pre-clear was often unable to contact an earlier engramic incident and would verbalize this inability with a phrase such as 'I can't go back at this point'.8 Such a phrase is an engramic command, which must be overcome by means of 'repeater'technique. This technique simply involves getting the pre-clear to repeat the phrase over and over again, similar phrases, and anything else the pre-clear might add. For example: Woman: All I get is 'Take her away'. Auditor: Go over that again. Woman: Take her away [repeated three timesl. Auditor: Go over it again. Woman: Take her away. Auditor: Go over it again Woman: No no, I won't. Auditor: Go over it again Woman: I won't I won't, I wont, I wont. Auditor: Go over it again take her away. Go over the phrase again. Take he away. Woman: Take her away [cryingl No, no. I MSMH, p. 202. : MSlqH, p. 124. u TIIE CULT AND ITS TRANSFORMATION Auditor: Go over the phrase, take her away. Woman: Take...take [cryingl, no, no. Auditor: Go over the words 'no, no'. Woman: No, no, no. Auditor: Go over it again. Woman: No. Auditor: Go over it again. Woman: [Moaning... don't...Auditor: Go over it again, go over 'don't'. Woman: [Crvingl. Auditor: Go over the word 'don't'. Woman: Don't, don't, don't, don't, [Etc.ll Repetition of such phrases, Hubbard argues 'sucks the patient back down the track and into contact with an engram wbich contains it',2 sometimes facilitating the reduction of tbat engTam, or otherwise releasing emotional charge from the reactive bank. Another important technique was that of securing a 'dash answer'. This technique was typically employed to discover where on the turte-track the pre clear was stuck, that is v-hen an engram had occmTed which had since been a major source of aberration, and to discover the nature of the incident.3 In the first case, the auditor would tell the pre-clear, 'When I eount to five...a phrase will flash into your mmnd to describe where you are on the track. One, two, three, four, five!''Late pre-natal', says the pre-clear, or 'yesterday'or whatever occurs to him.'UICUI WaS SUmi, IllamS ynen an ellgram naCt OCCUI.:.. Wllmll nac smce ueen a major source of abenation, and to discover the nature of the incident.3 Counting was later replaced by snapping the fingers, in order to discover the nature of an incident about which the pre-clear, unaided, vas not fortheoming: The auditor asks a series of questions wbich will identify the incident and receives flash answers on a yes-no basis. The auditor says, 'When I snap my fingers you will answer yes or no to me following question': 'Hospital?'(snap!), and the pre-clear answers yes or no. Such a series of quesdons and answers might run as follows: 'Accident?''Yes''X3spital?''No''Mother?''Yes' 'Outdoors?''No''Fall down?' 'This example is taken from an actual auditing situation, a recording of a public demonstration of Dianetic auditing, given by L. Ron Hubbard on 28 September 195l. For further illustrations of repeater technique in Dianetics sessions, see Walter Braddeson, Sciensoloyft the Millions (Sherbourne Press, Los Angeles,lg6g), pp, 83-5 87-9, 9l. : MSMH, p. V15. t MSMH, p. 296; L Ron Hubbard Science of Suruiuol (Hubbard Dianetic Founda tion Inc., Wicbita, Kaosas, 1951), I, pp. m4-5; 11, pp. 57-8. All references are to tb Tenth Printing, published by Hubbard College of Scientology, :ast Grinstead Sussex, 1 967 Hereafter referred to simply as Science of Surviu sl. 'hlSMH, p. 296. THE CULT PHAsr: DlArTIcs 3 'No''Cut?''Yes''Kitchen? Yes'. And tuddenly Lho pre-ciear may remember the incident or get a visio of the scene or remember or get a soric recall of what his mother said to him,, 1 'rhe backgound to the theory atld pTattite of Dianetits Dianetics was a form of abreaction therapy, with strong similarities to a variety of techniques then in use. Since Hubbard himseif has asserted the originality of the entire theory and practice and acknowledges having been induenced only in a most general way by other writers, it is difficult to be certain of the sources of his synthesis. Ideas which approximate to many aspects of the theory and practice of Dianetics were currently available m orthodox and fringe psychology, although it is not certain how much Hubbard may have derived from them, and it is clear that he added manv entirely original elements of his own. The theory that aspects of human behaviour might be explained as responses to traumatically (and, of course, other) conditioned stimuli was prominent in psychology following the work of Pavlov and Watson. Pavlov's work on the induction of 'experimental neuroses'in dogs was taken up by psychiatrists impressed by the correspondence between his ciinical descriptions of these neu- roses and the acute war neuroses they observed in evacuated soldiers.2 'Phe therapy developed to treat these neuroses was an abreaction therapy, described as follows by Sargant: A drlla wolld he adminit,red to a...labent...and as it starred to take effect, A drug would be administered to a... patient...and as it started to take effect, an endeavour would be made to make him re-live the episodes that had caused his breakdown. Sometimes the episode, or episodes, had been mentally suppressed, and the memory would have to be brought to me surface again. At other times it was fully remembered, but the strong emotions originally attached to it had since been suppressed. The marked improvement in the patients nervous condition was attri- buted to the releasing of these original emotions.'The technique of suggesting quite imaginary situations to a patient under drugs, leading to abreaction of fear or anger was found to be as equally effective in the restoration of mental health, as getting him to re-live actual traumatic experiences.4 The therapeutic role of abreaction had been systematically explored first by Breuer and Freud,s whose investigations revealed that the root of many hysterical symptoms lay in the experience of psychological trauma: Science of Surviual, H, pp 57-8. 'William Sargant, Bttlefor the Mnd (Pan Books, London, 1 959). Ibid., Pr7 Ibid., pp. 17-18. 6Joseph breuer and Sigmund Freud, Sludies in Hysteria, Vol 11 of the Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of 8igmund Freud (Hogarth Press, London, Ig I Hr CULT AND ITS TRANSb'ORMATlON Any experience which calls up distTessing affects such ai those of hight, anxiety, shame or physieal pain may operate as a trauma of this kind. The affect associated with the traumatic situation is repressed rather than discharged when the individual is unable to react due to social circumstances or because it involved something he wished to forget, or when the expenence occurred while the patient was in a 'dissociated'or 'hypnoid'state of mind, that is, when under conditions of: severely paralysing affects, such as fright, or during positively abnormal psychical states, such as the semi-hypno;ic twilight state of day-dreaming, auto-hypnoses, and so on.'The memory of the traumatic experience is either partially or completely out of normal consciousness but can be aroused 'in accordance with the law-s of association...by a new experience which sets it going owing to a similarity with the pathogenic experience'.S The aim of therapy was therefore to bring the original experience with its associated affect into consciousness, and get the patient to describe the event in detail, thereby arousing and discharging the accompanying affect: We found...that each individual hysterical symptom immediately and permanently disappeared when v e had succeeded in bringing clearly to light the memory of the event by which it v as provoked and in arousing its accompanyi affect, and when the patient had described that event in the greatest possible detail and had put the affeet into words...' Althouh Freud first employcd hvDnosis as a mn f I Although Freud first employed hyPnosis as a means of locating traumatic material and bringing it to consciousness, he shortly found that some patient could not be effectively hypnotized. This led him to the creation of a new technique for extending the pahent's memory. He would ask his patients if they recalled what occasioned the symptoms. He assured them they did know: . After this I became still more insistent; I told the patients to lie down and deliberately close their eyes in order to 'concentrate'...I then found that without any hypnosis new recollections emerged whieh went further back and which probabi related to our topic.'Should the patient still prove recalcitrant, Freud would then apply manual pressure to the patient's head, assuring him that when he did this a recollection would come to mmnd P The parallels with early Dianetic practice are quite striking. With only minor modifications in practice and terminology Dianetic theory and practice might 'Ibid.,p.6. 'Ibid., p. m. 'Ibid., p. r6. i Ibid., p. 6, emphasis omitted. Ibid., p. z68. Ibid., p. z70. .......ll A ,. I I A N I I l: b aa have been adapted from that of early Freud. That this is more than merely a possibility is suggested by John W. Campbell's letter to Dr Joseph Winter in July 1949 telling of Hubbard's discoveries, 'His approach is, actually, based on some very early work of Freud's, some work of other men, and a lot of original research'.l The process of engram formation resembles the mechanism of repression elaborated by Freud, and Hubbard's distinction between the analytical and the reactive mind loosely fits Freud's distinction of the conscious and unconscious. There are even hints in Freud's discussion of the analysis of hysteria which strongly suggest an ongin for Hubbard's notion of the 'file-clerk', for example: consequences of the manuall pressure give one a deceptive impression of there being a superior intelligenee outside the patients consciousness which keeps a large amount of psychical material arranged for particular purposes and has fixed a planned order for its return to consciousness. or yet more directly, it was as though we were ellamining a dossier that had been kept in good order. The analysis of my patient Emmy von N. contained similar files of memories..These files form a quite general feature of every analysis and their contents al-vays emerge in a chronological order...'although the order was the reverse of the actual experiential order. Hubbard's 'file-clerk'did not always deal with matters in such a systematic fashion. In one published comment, Hubbard admitted a considerable psychoana- In one published comment, Hubbard admitted a considerable psychoanalytic influence on early Dianetics: lytic influence on early Dianetics: In the earhest befjinning of Dianetics it is possible to trace a corsiderable psychoanalytic influerce. There was the matter of ransacking the past; the matter of believing with Freud mat if one could talk over his difficulties they would alleviate and there was the matter of coneentrating on early childhood. Our first improve ment on psycho-analysis itseh consisted of the abandonment of talk alone and the direct address to the incident in its own area of time as a mental image picture susceptible to erasure. But many of the things which Freud thought might exist, such as 'life in the womb', 'birth trauma', we in Dianetics and Scientology confirmed and for them provided an adequate alleviation. The discovery of the engram is entirely the property of Dianetics. Methods of its erasure are also owned entirely by Dianetics, but both of these were pointed to by early Freudian analysis and Hypnohsm.'Despite the fact that Freud had abandoned the practice, hypnotic abreactive therapy was widely developed during the 19305 and 1 g40s.r The phenomena of Cited in Winter, op. cit., p. 3. reuer and Freud, op. cit., p. 272. Ibid., p. z88. 4 L Ron Hubbard, 'A critique of psycho-analysis 3', Cerhinly, 9, 7 (1962, p. g. 5 8ee the discussion of and reference to, earlier work in Jacob H Conn, 'Hypnosyn- thesis: III Hypnotherapy of chronic war neuroses with a discussion of the value of 34 THL CULT AND ITS TRANSrORVATlON spontaneous and induced regression had also been explored under hypnosis,l and it was known that age regression could be induced by suggestion in a non- hypnotic state.3 Moreover, the phenomenon of hypnotically age-regTessed patients reporting details of intra-uterine life, on being told they were at an appropriate age, had been observed.3 In the practice of hypnosis a distinction was sometimes drawn between regTeSSion, described as a 'half-conscious dramatisation of the present understanding of that previous time', and reuiuiication, described as 'the type of time regression in which the hypnotic situation itself ceases and the subject is plunged directly into the chronological past'. The term regression was generaLly used for both kinds of phenomena, and some doubt was thrown on the status of such a process of returning to early periods of childhood, when Young in a controlled experimental study showed that a sample of controls requested to simulate the performances of three-year-olds at measured by a series of tests were able to approximate such performances more accurately than hypnotized subjects ordered to regress to their third birthday. Young felt the results of his experiment better supported an explanation in terms of which the hypnotized subjects 'v ere unwittingly playing a role, and playing it less skilfully than the controls by virtue of having voluntarily surrendered their critical attitudes during the trance...'than an explanation in terms of any actual return, or recovery of actual memories of the time in question.5 Hubbard was clearly familiar with some of this work. He was an experienced practitioner of hypnosis, and in MSMH carefully distinguished returning and reliving in Dianetics from regression and revivification in hypnosis.C Although the 'recalling'of the experience of birth and prenatal life had been 'Milton H. Erickson, 'Hypnotic treatment of acute hysterical depression: report of acaseArchiuesofNeurologyandpsychiaty46(lg4l)p.l76i Merton M. Cill,'Spontaneous regression on the induetion of hypno5i5, Bullehn of the Menninger Clinic, 12, 2 (1948), pp. 41-8. Leonard T. Maholick, The infant in the adult', Psychasomatic Medicine, t t (1949), pp. 295-337- 5J. H Masserman, Yhe dvDamics of hypnosis and brief psychotherapy' Archiues of Neurology and Psychaty, 46 (1941), ppm 76-9. 'Milton H. Enckson and Lawrence S. Kuble, Succe55ful treatment of a case of acute hysterical depression by return under hypno5i5 to a critical phase of childhood', Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 4 (1941), pp. 585 609. 5 Paul Campbell YounS, Hypnotic regremion fact or artifact?' 3aurnal of Aonormal and Social Psychology 35 (1940), pp. 273-8. 6 MSMH p. 12. The reason given for the terminological substitution is that regression had pejorahve connotahons, and 'revivificahon was something that happened under hypnosis. As Dianeties did not employ hypno5i5, reliving'was more appropriate. abreaction, regression, and revivification, 30unal of Cinical and Bxerisnenlal Hymosis (1953), pp. 29-43; Lewis R Wolberg, Hynoanaiysis (Grune & Stratton, -ew York 1945). THr CULT PHASL: DIAI'IZTICS 35 noted in hypnotized sabjects, it was little explored in the main streams of psychology. Experimental work had been conducted on the possibility of conditioning the unborn child with considerable success during late pregnancy,l but the influence of the experience of birth and pre-natal life on later psychological development was most actively explored by Otto Rank and his followers. Rank held that the origins of neurosis lay not in the Oedipus complex, but in the trauma of birth.t Phyllis Greenacre developed this theory fuTther, suggesting that events in intra-uterine life, particularly after the seventh month of pregnancy when responsiveness to sound begins to appear, might have a traumatic effect on the foetus leading to reactions akin to anxiety and influencing later psychological development.a Finally, Nandor Fodor, in a book published by the publishers of llSM only the year before Hubbard's book, also argued that pre-natal traumata were the cause of later life neuroses, and, curiously presaging Hubbard's thought, argued that...nature left the unborn child unprotected against the violence of parental intercourse in the advanced stage. of gestation, and thus exposed it to an ordeal the traumaticnatureofwhichisclearlytraceableindreamsthrough-outourlives. : and that accidents su fered by the mother may expose the unborn to physical shoct s through the protective amniotic cushion....'' The need to relive'the rcpressed memory of birth and pre-natal trauma The need to 'relive'the repressed memory of birth and pre-natal trauma stressed by Fodor,7 also appears in a book by an English healer.e There Eeman discusses pre-natal memory and the successful treatment of a number of cases of apparently organic disability by a non-hypnotic abreactive therapy based on re-living traumatic experiences. I David K. Spelt, 'The conditioning of the human foetus in ut6ro', ournal of Fxperitnenhl Psycholog, 38 (1948), pp. 338-46. 2 Otto Rank, rhe rrauma of Buth (Harcourt Brace & Co, New York, 1929). J Phyllis Greenacre, 'The predisposition to anxiety, Psychoanalyic Quarterly, m (l94l)J pp. 66-94- Nandor Fodor, rhe Search for the Beloued: a Clmlcal Investigation of the rrauma of Brth and Pre-natal (:;onditioning (Hermitage Press, New York, 1949), p. 3og For a resume of Rank, Greenacre and Fodor, see J. A. C. Brown, Freud and the PostFrradians (PenguinBooks,Harmondsworth, Ig64),pp.32-s.Thepublisherof MSMH, a member of the Bay Head cirele, assured me that Hubbard did not know of Fodor's work publisbed in that first year before the public appearance of Dianetics. This may, of course, have been the case. Hov. ever, Fodor suggests that the unborn child may have knowledge of what is going on outside the womb by means of telepathy. Hubbard takes pams to rebut the thesis of telepathically derived knowledge, wichout mentioning Fodor, MSMH, pp. 3zo-1. 'Fodor, op. Clt., p. 193. L E. Eeman, G-operatiue Healing (Erederick Muller, London, 1947). pp. 1oz-z4 The practice of securing 'flash answers', known as a eechnique of induced association also existed in the practice of hypnotherapy. Brenman and Gill refer to such a technique, which was employed if a patient was unable to answer a question in therapy, or if the answer was unenlightening: the general formula applied was: 'I will count to a certain number and when I reach thae number you will tell me the first thing that occuri to you in eonnectien with so-and-so.'l The notion of 'reverie'is referred to in the work of Baudouins but not as a state to be induced for therapeutic purposes. The notion of the 'engram'alsr need not have been sought far.a It was a commonly current term used to designate a memory trace, or an altered condition in tissue or neura structure as a result of excitation or stimulus and was employed by a number of psychologists.4 Hubbard's theories regarding the operation of the reactive mind, which 'computes in identities'may owe something to Count Alfred Korzybski, whose General Semantics located the source of many of Man's llls in misguided tendency to think in terms of identification, or to his follower Hayakawa.s How much Hubbard's theones derived from Richard Semon's work is now I Margaret srenman and Merton M. Gill, pnotherapy: a Surre of I hc Lieraturc (Internahonal Umversihes Press, New Yor, 1947), p. a4. 2 Charlrs saudouin Saggestwn and Autosuggeston (Allen Unwin, London, Igzo), 1 Margaret Brenman and Merton M. Gill, ypnothrrapy: a Surrey of t hc Literatwe (Internadonal Universities Press, New York, 1947), p. 84. Charles Baudouin, Suggestion and Autoruggcston (Allen & Unwin, London, 1920), p. 130. Wmter claims the search went no farther than Dorland's Medical Dietionary (W. B. Saunders & Co, Philadelphia, 1936). See Winter, op. cit., p. 18. Richard Semon, rhc Mn6m6 (Allen & Unwin, London, 1921); K. Koffka, Principles of Gcstait Psychalogy (Harcourt & Brace, New York, 1935); Charles K. Ogden and I. A. Iichards, 'rhe Meaning of Meaning (Kegam Paul, London, 1946); and Karl S. Lashley, 'In search of the engram', Society of xp6rim6nlal Biolog)l Symposium JVo. st - Physioi6gical Mechanisms in Animal P6haviour (Cambndge University Press, Cambridge, 950), pp. 454 82. 6 5, I. Hayakawa, 'From science-fiction to fiction-seience', I'rC, 8 (1951), p. 285; Paul Kecskemeti, 'A review of General Semantics', JVew Lead6r, 38, 17 (25 April 1955), pp. Z4-5; Alfred Korzybski, Scieru andSanity (International Non-Anitotelian Library Publishing Co, New York, 1933); Gardner, op. cit., Chapter 23 Some Dianetieists saw clear parallels: 'Korzybskd's...work is implicit in Hubbard's', '...Hubbard [is obviously an old and expert student of general semantirs...'Dianotes, 1, 5 (December 1951), p. 1 m In some of his later works, Hubbard does credit Korzybski along with Aristotle, Isaac Newton, Confucius, etc. a 'source material', e.g. the 'Foreword'to L. Ron Hubbard, Scitntolog o goaod, sm edn (Hubbard College of Scientology, East Grinstead, Susser. 1967). 'S. I. Hayakawa, Laneuagc in rhought and Action (Allen & Unwin, London, 1965). The first US edition appeared in 1949. This book is also notable in this context for its emphasis on the role of surDiuai as a motivating principle, an idea prominent in Hub- bard's writing. diffic-llt to determine. Semon's 'mnemic psychology'certainly appears to have anticipated some Hubbardian ideas. Semon proposed the existence of a mnemic property, that is, a tendency for organic tissue to be modified as a result of stimulation. This modification produced by the stimulus, Semon called an engram.l This stimulus impression could be reactivated, or in Semon's termin ology, 'ecphoriSed by the complete or partial recurrence of 'the energetic conditions which ruled at the generation of the engram'.2 Under conditions of the strongest 'ecphoric effect', the mnemiC state of exci[ation reproduces the original excitation in all its proper proportions, inclusive of time values.'Semon describeS such an engram and its ecphory from bis own expenence: We were onee standing by the Bay of Saples and saw Capri Iying before us; near by an organ-grinder played on a large barrel organ; a peculiar smell of oil reacbed usfromaneigbbouring'trattorialithesunwasbeatingpitilesslyanourbacksi and our boots in which we had been tramping for hours, pinched us. Many years after, a similar smell of oil ecpborised most vividly the optic engram of Capri, and even now this smell has invariably the same effect.t In his later intmiC Psycholog, Semon stresses the vividness of 'mnemic sensations': When associatiS ely...there is ecphorised the mnemic image of some old teaeher whose stupid grammatical contentiousness and generr l pedantry made him the chief object of our boyhood hatred thirty years ago we do not merely 'remember'this person, dead for fifteen years past, but we sec him in the flesh. Thus the wbole simultaneous stratum of the engram-complex to which he belongr in our dream, and which has 'ecphorised'him as its central figure, gains reality, appearing not as the ecphory of an old stratum but as that of a present one...We are ourselves thirty years younger; we are again going to school and having to pass our final examinations.5 This is, of course, all highly remimscent of Hubbard's theory. The engram is substantially the same in each case, and indeed in his early work Hubbard suggested that the engram was retained as a cellular recordmg.S Ecphory and restimulation are exact parallels and both are evoked through association. Hubbard goes very much further than Semon, however. Hubbard's engram is created during periods of unconsciousness, pain, or emotional losr, while Semon's is created during normal consciousness. When restimulated, it takes Richard Semon, rhe Mneme (Allen & Unwin, London, 1921). 2 Ibid..p. 145'Ibid., P149' Ibid., p. 92. t Ricbard Semon, /llnemic Psycholo y (Allen & Unwin, London, 1923), p, 221. Semon planned a further work Pahology of Mneme whicb would treat the subiect of the disappearance of engrams. However, as far as I can discover, this work was never written. For example,.SMH, p 7 n complete command of the individual, rather than being a further, albeit sometimes powerful, stimulus. There is no suggestion in Semon's work that engrams are a cause of psychosomatic illness, nor practices for the elimination of engrams. If Hubbard was influenced by Semon's work, little more was derived from this source than the notions of the engrarn and its restimulation, ideas which were available elsewhere, as I have indicated.l Unfortunately, the fact that 'engram'was not the first choice of terminology for Hubbard's pubhshed work does not altogether settle the matter. Hubbard first used the term 'impediment', then 'norn' and 'comanone'(the latter at Winter's suggestion2), and not until then was 'engram'publicly used. Hubbard may have begun with the notion of engram derived from Semon (or elsewhere) and sought an alternative terminology to distinguish his own ideas from those other conceptualizations which emploved the term. Winter is, however, emphatic that during the Bayhead penod, '...Semon's work was unknown to our group'.3 In the absence of any stronger evidence. Winter's word must be accepted. Deuelopments in theory und ,tuchce Dianetics theory and practice developed rapidly. By the end of l950 in a series of lectures in Galifornia, Hubbard introduced a distinction that formed the basis of further theoredcal change, between 'MEST'and 'theta'. MEST (Matter, Energy, Space, Time) was Hubbard's acronvm for the matenal or physical Energy, Space, Time) was Hubbard's acronym for the material or physica'universe, whmle theta stood for the universe of thought.'Hubbard also introduced the notion of the A-R-C (Amnity, Reality, Communication) triangle. This involved the idea that these three components were mutually related so that 'when reahty is low affimty and communication wil be low. When com- mumcation is high, amnity and reality will be high'.5 Moreover, Hubbard estabiished a fundamental principle of the movement's epistemology: Reality i5 that upon which we agree If I say there are twelve black cats on the rtage and you don't agree someone is insane. The prime insanity is not to agree with another's reality.' Agreement and reahty are synonymous. We agree upon romething: it becomes reahty. We don't agree. There isn't reahty.7 See Koftka, op. eit., Ogden and Richards, op. cit., and Lashley, op. cit. Winter, op. cit., p. 17-18. 'Winter, op. cit., p. 18, L. Ron Hubbard's ltotes on the Lcctur7s of L. Rotl uboard, Edited by the Stahf of the California Foundation (Hubbard Communications Omce Ltd, Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, 1962). From lectures delivered late 1950. Eirst published 195. Hubbard's predilectiols for acronyns and contractions to form new words probably dates from his naval days. i he practice is particularly prominent among U.S. milhary personnel, S ibid., p. 9. Ibid., pp 17-18. 7 Ibid., p. 57. Y he dynamic ibrinciple of ex*eice S URVI VE ! Survival, considered as the single and sole Purpose, subdivides into four dyrarnics.By symbiote is meant all entities and energies which aid survival. DYNAMIC ONE is the urge of the individual toward survival for the individual and his symbiotes. DYNAMIC TWO is the urge of the individual toward survival through procreation; it includes both the sex act and the raising of progeny, the care of children and their symbiotes. DYNAMIC THREE is the urge of the individual toward survival for the group or the group for the group and includes the symbiotes of that group. DYNAMIC FOUR is the urge of the individual toward survival for Mankind or the urge toward survival of Mankind for Mankind as well as the group for Mankind, etc., and includes the symbiotes of ankind.1 By the end of I950 these had increased to seven: Fifth Dynamic Life Sixth Dynamic MEST Seventh Dynamic Theta By August I95I a further dynamic had been added and some of the others modified DYNAMIC FIVE is the urge to survive as a life organism and ernbraces all living organisms. DYNAMIC SIX is the urge to survive as part of the physical universe and includes the survival of the physical universe. DYNAMIC FIVE is the urge to survive as a life organism and embraces all living organusms. DYNAMIC SEVEN is the urge toward survival in a spiritual sense. DYNAMIC EIGHT is the urge toward survival as a part of or ward of a Supreme Being.3 The optimum solution to any problem, Hubbard argued was the 'solution which brings the greatest benefit to the greatest number of dynamics'.4 At this point Hubbard had not developed the theory of lianetics beyond a concern with the current lifetime. However, the period in which engrams could occur had been pushed back so that 'now, they have found an aberrative sperm and ovum series. Normally, however, the earliest engram is one day after conception. '5 I MSM, pp37-83 Hubbard, Notes on the Lectres, pp. 95-6. 3 Science of Survi7)al, I, p. xi. 4 Hubbard, Notes on the I ect1lres, p. 96. 6 Ibid., p. 13I. Winter also comments on this period: 'InYestigation of the "past death" or the "last death" in less imaginative patients had only a brief popularity. It was replaced by the ''sperm-ovum sequence, which was defined as the ''recolle tionS of occurrences at the moment of a person's conception ' Winter op. cit., p. 189. A definite public commitment by Hubbard to 'past lives'did not occur unt after Hubbard's break with Don Purcell and the Wichita Foundation,l in 195 although he made reference to past lives and deaths in Science of Sunlival put lished in ugust 1951.' The concept of 'theta'was expanded to incorporate not only thought, but 'life-force, elan vital, the spirit, the soul..d3 Theta, Hubbard argued, was constantly becoming entangled wih MEST. When they came together 'forcefully'and 'intermingled "permanently"'an engram was formed.9 Theta and MEST became 'enturbulated'in the reactive mind Processing therefore involved releasing the theta held in the reactive mind as 'entheta' 'enturbulated theta) and restoring ir to the analytical mind. Science of Survwal was organized around the 'Tone Scale'. This scale purported to indicate a range of characteristics associated with the amount of 'free theta'available to the analytic mind. Locating a pre-clear in terms of ke criteria on the scale permitted the prediction of other characteristics possessed by that individual (or group). Hence, being at 1 l on the tone scale meant one was in a state of 'covert hostility'and therefore psychotic.9 Among the other features of such an individual are that he is 'incapable, capricious, irresponsible'. Point 4 o on the tone scale meant that the individual was a MEST clear, he would be 'Near accident proof. No psveho-somatic ills. Nearly immune to bacteria' and he would have a 'high courage leve'.'T he tone scale also provided the basis for political observations by Hubbard. In Science of Survival, for example, liberalism is identmed as 'higher-toned'than fascism, which is 'higher-toned'than communism.S One major innovation in technique was that of 'straight-wire' processing, or 'straight memory': 1 The history of Hubbard's relationship vrith and secession from Don Purcell and the Wchlta Eoundation is detailed below (pp. 7 7-95). Science of Survwa(, I, p. 61, Hubbard states: 'The subject of past deaths and past lives ls so fnll of tension that as early as lastJuly [Igso-Ed.l the board of trustees of the Foundation sought to pass a resolution banning the entire subject.'He would onlv eommlt humtelf to the view that some past life and past death expenences 'seem to be valid and reaH. , He also insisted these experiences should be run as normal engrams, and not mvalidated or neglected. Sclence of Survivtl, 11, p. g5. 3Ibid.,l,p.4. 'Ibid.,l,p.8. S Hubbard was wont to describe those who disagreed with him as 'I 1'In the light of the later campaign in Scientology for civil rights for the insritutionaiized mental patient, it is interesting to observe that in Saente vf Survival individuals below 2.0 on the tone scale are identified as 'psychotic'and Hubbard argues 'any person from 2.0 kmd. Science of Survioel, 1, p 131 r 'Hubbard Chart of Human Evaluation and Dianetic Procersing' supplied as a loose sheet with Science of Survival. 7 Ibid. Sciencc of Survivai, 1, p. 124. Straight memory consists of the pre-clear's staying in present time with his eyes wide open and being asked to remember certain things which have been said to him and done to him during his life time. He is not asked to return to these incidents. He is asked only to recognise their existence.l It was specifically directed at the pre-clear who 'has difficulty remembering'but seems to have been used as a tacit coaching device to instruct pre-clears who had difficulty contacting incidents in auditing. If the pre-clear says bluntly that he cannot remember tbings, it is up to the auditor to encourage and validate this pre-clear's memory. If the pre-clear says 'I can't remember names', the auditor says, 'Well, what is the name of your business associateThepre-clearsays, Oh,hisnameisJones!'Theauditorhasproventothe pre-clear that the pre-clear can remember at least one name.'Coaching the pre-clear may have had an important part in the effective running of Dianetic auditing. For example: There is a triek of reaching conception in a case...The auditor asks the pre-clear to run a moment of sexual pleasure, and then when his pre-clear, who does not have to recount this moment aloud appears to be settled into that moment, the adit r dennends )hat the pre-clecr go innmediky o concrption. The pre-clear will normally do 50,, ,s In this case, Hubbard is auditing a woman and has returned her to infancy: Woman: I'm imagining being a baby. Hubbard: All right. What do you see there. Wbat's your visio as you're Iying there being a baby? Woman: I guesS there was a crib. Hubbard: Let's take a look at it. Woman : All I can see. Just holding on to the side of the crib. Hubbard: You'reholdingon.Howyoufeellyingthereinthecrib? Woman: I'm sitting. Hubbard: You're sitting in the crib. And wbo comes into the room? Woman: [unclear, possibly a namel. Hubbard: What does he look like ? [Mother entersl Hubbard: t..l All right, now what's her voice sound like ? Woman: I don't understand it. Hubbard: What's she saying. What language? Is it a different language? Woman: Yes. Hubbard: Well wbat language is it? All rigbt, pick up the fiBt word she says, how's Ibid., II, p. 68. S Srience of Svrvivai, 11, p. 69. Ibid., 11, pp. 17g-4. (My emphasis.) THE CULT AND ITS TRANSFORIATION it sound? Go to the moment of the first word she says. How does it sound ? Woman: [Laughsl Hubbard: What is it? Woman: Maboushsa.l A further major technical change was the introduction of 'lock scanning'. Locks and engrams were held to form chains of similar kinds of incident for example, all occasions when the pre-clear suffercd a break in affinity, or an enforced agreement. It was claimed that to run each of these incidents in early Dianetic fashion would be far too lengthy a process, but that an equt lly effective and far speedier procedure was simply to get the pre-clear to 'scan'in his mind similar types of incidents from the earliest to the latest. The auditor asks the file clerk if there is a type of incident which can be scanned in the ease. The file clrrk, at a snap of the auditor's fingers, answers yes or no. The auditor requests the name of the type of incident. The file clerk gives the name of the type of incident. The auditor then tells the pre-clear to go to the earliest available moment on this chair. of locks...the auditor tells the pre-clear to scan from this earliest moment to present time through all incidents of the type named.a Scanning such chains several times, Hubbard argued, was an effective way of converting entheta into theta (that is freeing theta). Hubbard's next major work after SGe7ce of Sunitcl marked a turning point in the developrnent of the theory and practice of the movennent. While Dianctics convertmg entneta mm theta (that IS treemg theta). Hubbard's next major work after Science of Survit el marked a turning point in the development of the theory and practice of the movement. While Dianetics had hitherto maintained that engrams were a result of what had been done to the pre-clear, Advanced Procedure and As ionts presented the idea that the individual was responsible for his engrams: Evervthing which is wrong with [the pre-clearl he has selectively and particularly chosen to be wrong with him.3 'L. Ron Hubbard, Reeordjng of a public demonstration of Dianetie auditing, September tgsn For a clear caze of eoaching see the auditing session reported by Joseph Winter, reprinted in Gardner, op. cit., pp. r76-8. The following aceount of a reporter's unsuccezsful auditing session reported in a magazine also seems apposite: 'The expenment by one of the foremost practihoners in the new seience was not a success. My "engrams" were playing hard-to-get, or my pre-natal recording device was faultv. After two hours of attempting to recall the phrases heard in cbildhood or before, Schofield switched on the lights and said: "You should read The Book [MSMHl more carefully".' RolandWild,'Everymanhisownpsyehoanalyst',/ llusraed(305eptemherl950),p. 18. It is not my intention to suggest that 'eoaching'was consciously carned out by auditors rather, as many inveztigations into psychotherapy and psychological experiment show, the therapist or experimenter may give many unconscious cues as to what he wants or expectz from his patient or subjeet. r Science of Suruiuat, vol. 1 l, pp. Ir4-5. L. Ron Hubbard, Aduanced Procedure and Azioms (hereafter APA) (Central Press, Wiebita, Kansas, 1951), p. 7. Quotations are from the fourth edition, 1962, published by Hubbard Communieationz Omce Ltd, East Gnnztead, Sussex. Each individual at some time in the past chose some means of securing sympathy or 'co-operation on the part of the environment'l which seemed at the time necessary for his survival. This v as called the 'service facsimile'.a Thereafter, the individual became subject to the service facsimile, believing it essential to his continued survival. Restoring the individual's self-determinism therefore required the release of the service facsimile.a This volume also contained the 'Definitions, Logics and Axioms', a set of numbered assertions descnbed as 'logics', 'corollaries', 'axioms'and 'definitions', for example: Axiom 68 The single arbitrary in any organism is time. Axiom 69 - Physieal universe perceptions and efforts are received by an organism a force waves, convert by facsimile into thetc and are thus stored. Definition: andomity is the mis-a ignment through the internal or external efforts by other forms of life or the material universe of the efforts of an organism, and is imposed on the physical organism by counter efforts in the environment.t Hubbard's next significant book, although first issued at the Wichita Foundation made a clear commitment to immortality and employed the term scientology', providing the vehicle for his secession from the Wichita Dianeticists on the basis of a new 'science'. Social oenization end development With the publication of MSllfH and the article in Astounding, Dianetics emerged organizationally in two forms. Organized around L. Ron Hubbard was the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation [hereafter referred to as the Foundation the Elizabeth Foundation, or HDRFl, incorporated in April tgso in Elizabeth, I'ew Jersey. The Foundation had a board of directors, presided over by Hubbard Branches of the Foundation had also been established in other major Amencan cities, so that by November 1950 there were branches in Los Angeles, New York, Washington, Chicago and Honolulu. The Foundations in Elizabeth and Los Angeles were offering an 'intensive, full-time course, lasting four weeks for professional auditors',S as well as courses of therapy, while the other Foundations mainly provided therapy. The board of directors was composed of five others apart from Hubbard and his second wife Sara, including John W. Campbell, Joseph Winter, the publisher of ll,ISlH, Arthur Ceppos, and a lawyer, C. Parker Morgan. Each Foundation had a staff of professional auditors and instructors, and those in New Jersey and Los Angeles had a small research staff employing Dianeticists and trained l Ibid., p. 7. S I t is the means he uscs to exeuse his failures. e term engram was largely replaced by 'facsimile'from this point L Ron Hubbard, 'Definitions, logics and axioms, APA, p. 35. S Adverhsement in Astounding, 46, 3 (November l9sO), back cover. psychologists. The E izabeth Foundation employed some thirty people on its staflf. Numbers at the other Foundations fluctuated. While an organizational structure was emerging within the Foundations, however, 'grass-roots'organizations of a rudimentary kind had emerged spontaneously. With the appearance of Hubbard's article and book, individuals all over America and in Great Britain began practising the technique. Many began with members of their own family or with friends, co-auditing each other, and enthusiastically proselytizing among their acquaintances. Some publicised their activities through advertisements in newspapers and magazines,l or through newspaper stories.S Some wrote to booksellers, or the Foundations to locate others in their area interested in the practice. In this fashion, numerous small groups rapidly appeared with names such as: The Bristol Dianetic Group, The Connecticut Valley Dianetic Association, The Central London Group of Dianeticists, etc. With one or more enthusiasts organizing group activities, arranging meetings and contacting members, these groups had a fluctuating membersbip, and little formal structure. They generally met one or two evenings a week. The 'senior'Dianeticist present (senior in the sense that he had been practising longest or, less frequently, because he had taken some official training), would normally glve a lecture, a demonstration, or conduct group-auditing. After a break, members would then team up in pajrs for co-auditing.3 Communication bet veen the groups, between isolate d individual followers, and betw.en followers and the Foundations w as initiallv laraelv bv letter. The early Communication between the groups, between isolated individual followers, and between followers and the Foundations was initially largely by letter. The early followers were prolific correspondents. The more enthusiastic among them kept up correspondence with as many as a dozen others, detailing in their letters the cases they were running (or auditing) at the time; the activities of their group; new developments m theory and practice (vhether retailed from official Dianetic sources or their own innovations) and rumours of adminrstrative or political developments at the Foundations; as well as social and personal news. As some of these groups became established, however, mimeoed news-sheets were produced, along the lines of the 'fanzines'which link together science-fiction enthusiasts. Gheaply produced, they provided a means for the leading independent figures and groups prachsing Dianetics to remain in contact with a dispersed and growing list of correspondents These mimeoed bulletins were an important feature of Dianetics, providing the sense of a Dianetic community4 for the 'See for example, Life Presarer, 1, 1 ( June 95g, pp. 5-6; 1, 2 (July 1953), n p S See for example, rhe People, 24 February 1952, p. g. r The organisational model for these groups was, I think fairly evidently, the clubs of science fiction enthusiasts. Kingsley Amis refers to these clubs and their 'fanzines': 'groups in a score of major cihes and dozens of othens....Many elubs will meet weekly, have a hierarchy of officials, hold organised discussmns, and mimeograph or even print a magazine.'Kingsley Amis, eru Mcp of Hell (New English Library, London, 1963), p. 49. Among the dishnctive symbols of the Dianetic community was ffie pracfise o amateur following, as well as a later focus for, and a medium through which to express, discontent at the redirection of the movement by Hubbard. The usual amateur bulletin would contain one or more articles on the theory or practice of Dianetics; discussions of cases audited; details of group meetings; information on innovatiOns in theory and practice by recent graduates of Foundation courses or members of other groups; social information concerning figures in the Dianetic world; letters of encouragement or complaint; nohces of recent publications; etc.l The Foundation also issued a publication,3 in a slightly more sober stvle, containing articles by Hubbard and Foundation staff, and details of courses, tape-recordings and books available. Individuals within the Dianetic community rapidly became weLI-known through letters, articles and personal stories in the group bulletins, and enthusiasts would make a point of visiting each other while in the neighbourhood of other Dianehcists on holiday or on business, often stopping offa while to try out each other's auditing techniques.3 As the Foundations began training and certifying 'professional' auditors, other elements were added to the structure of the Dianetic community. Some trained auditors gravitated to leadership positions in the local amateur groups, virtually transforming the membership into a pnvate clientele. In the Dianetics period this was, however, quite exceptional. Some set up entirely new private practices. Others were absorbed into the staff of the Foundations themselves. Some adopted a peripatetic form of practice, travelling around and engaging in a period of practice m one area before moving on to another. A picture of how the lrofessional oractice of Dianetics was ideallv envisaed A picture of how the profexsional practice of Dianetics was ideally envisaged is presented in one of the American newsletters: A Dianeticist has his shingle out and a lady enters the waiting room. She has been troubled with her problems for some time now and feeli that she may not be operating as optimum as she would like. Still she does not feel that a 'Nut Doctor, [psychiatrist is the answer. She has heard that Dianetics has helped cases like hers, and after much mental hash and re-hash, she has decided to investigate. What's there to lose? A pleasant girl, in a simple street dress has received her, has asked the usual questions, and then inrtructed her to have a seat after telling her that the counselor would see her shortly. I here is a buzzing and the receptionist rises and motions her I During late lgjt to early 1952 there were at least seventeen of these bulletins or newsletters in America. There were probably never more than five in Britain. That of the Elizabeth Foundation was ealled rhe Diana nic, but this was ephemeral and rhe Dianeie Audiar's Bullein became the established Foundation periodical. See, for example,.ife Preserver, 1, 3 (September 9s3), p. 8; Interviews. signing letters to other members 'In ARC'instead of 'Best wishes'(ARC standing fo Amnity, Reaiity and Communieation, the Communicahon Triangle', all the element of which must be present for adequate communicahon to occur, aecording to Hub bard.) See, for example, correspondence in Dianoes, 1, 5 (I)ecember 1951). 46 THE CULT AND iTS TRANSFORMATION to the door, politely shows her into the counselor's omce and then leaves. Th Auditor addresses the case in such a manner as to ascertain the problem and at th same tlme relax the patient as much as possible. There is no sales talk on Dianetic no appeal at this time to assimilate its concepts. This would ha e nothing to do witn the womans problems. She has come to the A.uditor for help as if he were a doctor, and in a sense that is exactly what he is. If he can help her he does, if not he lets her know and she goes her way. There is no converting, sales talk, or education. Treatment is what she wanted and treatment she should have, nothing more.l Practitioners trained by the Foundation were eligible for Associate Membership in the HDRF, as were others interested in the practice of Dianetics, for a $15 annual fee. In return for this fee they were entitled to receive he Dianetic Auditor's Bulletin, the Foundation periodical publication, in which they learnt of advances in theorv and technique, and notification of new books, and lecturt or demonstrahon tapes by Hubbard. There was, however, little or no control over those who graduated from the Foundation courses. They received a certificate as an HDA (Hubbard Dianehc Auditor) and were henceforth entitled to practice their new-found profession wherever they chose. This was a source of concern to some board members of the Foundation 2 I he er ergence of Dianetics in Britain In Britain, the problem of adequate contact with the central organization was further compounded by the relative expense of Foundation courres and the cost of travel, which considerably restricted the number of British Dianeticists who took professional training at this period. Foundation and other publications were difficult to secure due to currency exchange control restrictions. Copies of amateur group newsletters were sometimes obtained on an exchange basis between editors, and many of the American newsletters had a policy of supplying their publications in exchange for a written contribution of some kind either technical, theoretical or merely social. Hence there was some transatlantic contact between amateur gTOUpS, but relatively little between British amateur groups and the Foundation. This became particularly the case as the Foundations were beset by immediate and local problems wbich drew attention away from the outlying Dianetic groups. Dianetics in Britain developed spontaneously as the result of interest aroused in readers of Astoundiing and their acquaintances, by Campbell's editorials and Hubbard's article. Imported copies of .ISM became available in mid-lgso and several Dianetic groups were started, five in London, others in Bristol, Chorley, Hull, Glasgow and elsewherc. A correspondence network emerged as individuals contacted each other through booksellers. Early Foundation materials were retyped by hand and circulated, and enthusiasts made personal I l)ianotes, 1, 2 (June-July 1952), p. 2. Winter, op. Qt, p. 3o. THr CULT PHAsr: DIANLTICS visits to other Dianeticists to learn more of auditing.l Later one or two were t, visit the American Foundations for training, but by the end of l950 there were only three Associate Members of the Foundation in Britain.a These three incividuals organized a 'postal group'called the British Dianetic Association (BDA) to reproduce and distribute Foundation materials. Some eighty to ninety people joined the BDA for a small subscnption but it went into voluntary liquidation in June 1 95 l. Access to Foundation materials and their distribution was the prime problem facing the British Dianetic groups. InJanuary 195l a Central London Group of Dianeticists was formed and joined by some forty members of the BDA fiving in or near London 'to give people a chance to get together and exchange views and to find potential co-auditors',3 and to encourage the formation of further local groupsdl The liquidation of the BDA led to attempts to establish a national Dianetic association on a sounder legal and financial footing. In November 195l the Dianetic Association Ltd was incorporated to facilitate the distribution ol material and establish a Dianetic library. A British edition of MSMH was produced. Many gTOUpS and local leaders felt that communication nevertheless remained a problem, hampering the development of the movement and one of the larger London groups, the Dianetics Study Group, sought to bring about a federation of Dianetic gTOUpS throughout the country: With a view tc creahn an oranisat'on which wouid be consonant with Hubbard's With a view to creating an or2anisation which would be consonant with Hubbard's democrahc and humanist prinQples [sicl, in whieh the vaice of every minority wovld be given full, fair and balaneed representation, and would steadily work up to professional standards.r A meeting was held in June 1952, with representatives of a number of local amateur gTOUpS, at which a Dianetic Federation of Great Britam was formed.7 Subsequently the DFGB absorbed the Dianetic Association Ltd.s Thus the only organization for the movement as a whole in Bntain was a loose federation of amateur gTOUpS, the role of the central oganization being primarily the distribution of material from America. The American Foundations similarly provided a weak central organization for the amateur gTOUpS in the USA, with little or no control over the membership and practihoners at large. I Interiews. t I7ul Dianrticist, uncertain date and issue no. probably 1952, p. 4; Dianotrs 1, 7 (Jan-Feb 1952), p. 8. A hr Dioneticist, uncertain date and issue no. probably 1952, p. 4. Dirnotrs, 1, 7 (Jan-Feb. :952), p. 9. 5 This was a somewhat edited version. Letter from Secretary Dianehc Study Group, N.W.3, to other L'ianeticists, n.d. probably early 1952. 7 Anon 'Dianetic Federation of Great sritain (Preliminary Report) , n.d., typeseript. 8 Presrrer, 1, 1 (June l9s3), p 2- In its origins and form of organization, based primarily around local groups of amateur enthusiasts, with professional or semi-professional practitioners sometimes at their head, Dianetics closely resembled spiritualism. The spiritualist movement which emerged after the publicity given to the Fox family and the Rochester Rappings in 1848 rapidly spread throughout the United States and beyond. lediumship was believed to be a gift which many or most people possessed, and local cireles of enthusiasts grew up around those in whom this gift was manifested. Emergence of organizational cruis Since local groups varied in composition or orientation, some leaders were unprepared to co-operate to any great extent with others v-hose methods, promotion, or personality were a source of friction. The democratic basis of the movement was manifested in the suspicion with which local groups viewed any loss of autonomy or any attempt to vest a central organization with more than a minimum of authority. In this respect there is a strong resemblance between Dianetics and such cultic movements as spiritualism and New Thought. These two movements were, like Dianetics, composed of a variety of groups which shared a number of ideological themes but were otherwise heterogeneous. The 'epistemological individualism'of these movements is manifested in their democratic ideologies: ..the special characteristic of the Spiritlahst movement fro n the beginning has ideoLogical themes but were otherwlse heterogeneous. l ne eplaeulng individualism'of these movements is manifested in their democratic ideologies:...the special characteristic of the Spiritualist movement from the beginning has been its demoeratic character. There has been neither recognised leader nor authoritative statement of creed. This characteristic ...gave breadth, toleranee, and exparsiveness to the movement. ..and rendered it possible for the new belief to combine with almost any pre-existing system of doctnne.'The individuaListic and democratic nature of New Thought was founded on a belief that knowledge of God is ultimately a highly personal, intuitive, experiential matter, how [thenl can it submit to any limitation upon its freedom of expression ?3 Both spirituaLism and ew Thought emerged around multiple leaders who shared onLy a limited basis of belief and practice. Leaders of the spiritualist movement synthesized its beliefs with socialism, free love, and oriental philosophy, whiLe New Thought leaders differentially emphasized the strands of I Geoffrey K. Nelson, Spiritualism and Soaaty (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 1969); FranLc Podmore, Modem Sl)iritualism: a History amd Critiasm (Methuen, London, 1902); Roy Wallis, 'Ideology, authority and the development of cultic movements', Social Res.arch, 41, 2 (197,), pp. 299-327. 'Podmore, op. cit., p. 199. ' Charles Braden, S)irits in Rebsllion tha Rise and Develolomen: of Jew rhought (Southern Methodist Univenity Press, Dallas, Texas, tg63), p. 2m Phineas Quimby, Warren Felt Evans, Transcendeneahsm, Swedenborgianism, and traditional Christianity, from which the movement's beliefs had developed, or introduced new strands from Theosophy or Rosicrucianism. Many spiritualists had an aversion to formal oreanization: Many local societies failed to survive as a result of the individualistic attitude of Spiritualists and the casual and ineffective type of organisation these societies were forced to adopt in order to appease the libertarian and anarchistic views of their members.'Many ISiew Thought leaders had taken up their vocation after alienation from the authoritarianism of Christian Scicnce and refused to establish more than minimal, formal organization or to attempt to exercise any far-reaching control over their following. After more than half a century only a very loose International New Thought !rlliance, commanding little loyalty, has been established. Dianetics, spiritualism and New Thought emerged as 'spontaneous' cultsS v hich came into existence in many places more or less simultaneously. From the very beginnings of these movements there had been many local autonomous leaders, and they were almost invariably opposed to the attempts of any individual to arrogate authority. The central organizations of Dianetics were poorly administered. Hubbard was lecturing in various parts of the country and commuting between Los Angeles and New York during late l950 and early 1951, giving little direction to either of these Foundations in day-to-day administration, and progressively alienating other board members by his practice of initiating developments without consulting them, and by what some of them viewed as his increasingly evident authorttarianism. Large numbers of staff were recruited in the early months, without adequate superision. Foundation income was expended on the assumption that the Dianetics boom would long continue. However, by the beginning of 1951 applications for training and therapy began to drop off and income correspondingly fell. In part, the decline in new recruits to Foundation services was precipitated by attacks on Dianetics by doctors and psychiatrists in the press and scathing reviews of Hubbard's book. Recruitment may, to some extent, have been affected by the publicity given to Hubbard's second wife, Sara Northrup Hubbard, who in her suit for divorce claimed to have psycbiatric evidence that Hubbard was a severe paranoid. (She lost her suit, Hubbard vinning a counter suit. Sara Northrup Hubbard later signed a statement to the effect that the 'things I have said about L. Ron Hubbard in the courts and the I Geoffrey K. Nelson, 'The analysis of a eult: Spiritualism', Social Compass, 15, 6 (1968), p. 475. Geoffrey K Ielson, 'The Spiritualist movement and the need for a redefinition of cult', 755R, 8 (1969), p. 156. public prints have been grossly exaggerated or entirely false'.)l In particular, nowever, the decline in numbers was due to the failure of Dianetics to live up to its early promise in the eyes of the public. The 'clear'who would emerge after only twenty hours of auditing had not made his appearance. The clears proclaimed by Hubbard did not seem to live up to expectations One of these indeed was Sara orthrup Hubbard. Another was a Miss Sonya Bianca whom Hubbard exhibited before a large audience in Los Angeles, but who failed the simplest tests of memory.3 Many individuals who had been worhng at the technique found their cases had improved little or not at all, and gave up. The Elizabeth Foundation moved towards a financial crisis. Hubbard saw the need to take some action to cope with this situation,3 but Joseph Winter and Hubbard's publisher resigned from the board of directors in October l950 Winter to set up a private Dianetic practice in New York. C. Parker Morgan resigned in January 195l and John W. Campbell in March 19l. Creditors began to demand payment of their bills and Hubbard, faced with financial disaster and threats of commitment by his wife Sara, resigned in April 195 and departed to Cuba.4 3 Don Purcell, a Wichita businessman, offered to assist the Foundation out of its difficultie5. The Foundation was centrahzed and its assets moved to Wichita, Kansas in AprillMay 195l, where Purcell made funds and a building available. Purcell becamc President of the Foundation and Hubbard its Vice-presiden and Chairman of the board of directors on hms return from Cuba. The other branches were closed down and the number of staff drastically reduced. The New Jesey creditors, however, pressed for settlement of the Elizabeth Foundation's debts, and a court decuion declared the Kansas operation its successor I Statement by Sara Nortbrup Hubbard, 1 l June 195l, copy made available by the Church of Scientology. 'Interviews. a 'Various memoranda from L. Ron Hubbard were read and discussed which indicated extreme urgency in...forwarding and exeeuting plans for centralisation in a faourable plaee..d HDRF, NewJeBey, Executive Management Committee of the Board of Trustees, Minutes of 22 January 1 95 n 'John W. Maloney, a member of the board of directors of both the Elizabeth, N.J. and the later Wichita Foundations, asserh in a letter to Dianedcists titied, 'A factual report on the Hubbard Dianetic Foundation, 23 February 1952: 'In November of 195O the combined income of the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundations did not quite total one-tenth of ih payrollP it is clear that a number of staffmembes had not been paid for some time since many were listed as creditoB in the ensuing bankruptcy Cbristopher Evans asserts that Hubbard went to Puerm R ico. Since Purcell arranged for Hubbards return from Cuba, and Sara NoBhrup Hubbard produced a letter in court from Hubbard in Cuba, I blieYe EYans to be mistaken. The point is, however, not of any importance. See Christopher sEYans, Calk of Unreason (Harrap, London, 1973). and liable lor its debts 1 A receiver v as appointed. A compromise settlement ot the claims was negotiated, but new claims were filed by other creditors.5 In February rgS2 Hubbard resigned as Chairman and Vice-president and sold his stock in the corporation for a consideration of 51 and an agreement to the effect that he would be allowed to set up an independent school, Hubbard College, in Wicbita, and receive assistance in establishing it. Don Purcell then entered the Foundation into voluntary bankruptcy. Shortly after Hubbards resignation, it was alleged that:.... certain articles mysteriously disappeared from the Foundation's offices. Those things which vanished were the mailing list, the addressograph piates, tapes bearing the recorded leetures of lr Hubbard, typewriters, sound recorders, sound transcribers and other equipment. At a preliminary hearing held in March, 1952, ar [Jl Elliott [a personal associate of Hubbardl teshfied that he inadvertantly removed these articles from rhe premises. The tapes were in three boxes, each of which weighed more than twenty-five pounds.a A restraining order was issued against Hubbard and Elliott, and the tapes and mailing lists were eventuallv returned to the Foundation, although it was alleged that the tapes had been mutilated. (Omcials of the Scientology organization dispute this account of what transpired. They argue that Don Purcell had permitted all the items concerned to be removed to the new school, Hubbard College. They allege that Don Purcell then went back on this agreement that Hubbard could establish Hubbard College.) Late in 1952 a warrant was issued ordering Hubbard to appear before a Federal Court for failing to return $9000 wrongfully witbdrawn from the Wichita Foundation. A compromise was again negotiated, Hubbard agreeing to pay $1000 and return the car originally supplied by the Foundation.6 In April 1952 assets of the Wichita Foundation were auctioned under the auspices of the Bankruptcy Court. Purcell entered a bid of $6124 and, as the highest bidder, wasgranted possession of these assets including the publishing nghts on.l.ISl/IH, the copyrights outstanding in the Foundation's name, and the sole right to the title 'Hubbard Dianetic Foundation'. Hubbard, bad meanwhile moved to Phoenix, where he established Scientology. Membeship 2nd motinationr The cirele around Ron Hubbard at Bay Head, ewJersey, contained in microcosm the characteristics that typified much of the following of Dianetics after its I llubbard Dianeiic Foundation /no. In Bankruptoy 'o. 37g-B-z, District Court of the United States for the District of Kansas. a Including Joseph Winter-s sister, who had subsequently married John W. Campbell. She and Winter had each put up sooo to finance the Elizabeth Foundation. Letter from Owens, Moore and Beck, attorneys acting for Purcell, to Dianeticists, 20 May 1952. 'ubbard DmnetiG oundation Ino. In Bankrupky, op. cit. Ibid. 52 THF CULT AND ITS TRANSFORATION public presentation. Campbell suffered from chronic sinusitis. He had a wide, if sporadic, knowledge of modern natural-scientific developments and an acute ignorance of the social sciences and psychology. His model of science was pragmatist and technological. He was prone to sudden enthusiasmi for new ideas which led to a profound suspension of his critical faculties.l Winter was a doctor of medicine with little knowledge of psychiatry and psychology He was unhappy with the trend in medicine towards greater specialization and compartmentalization, with the consequent absence of a vision of the patient as a whole. He had earlier sought this holism in General Semantics, 'and while I agree with Korzybski that "the word is not the object", I found no satisfactory explanation for how such a confusion between levels of abstraction had arisen in the first place.'S He sought answers to questions that medical science was unable to provide: I became aware again of the perplexity vhich plagues all doctors the 'why'of human bebaviour. I thought of all the questions which had gone unanswered or which had been ansv ered in a tentative or equivocal manner of questions which were frequently unasked because of their presumed unanswerability. Why did Mr M attempt to commit suicide? Why was it that Mrs began tO hear voices telLing her to kill her new-born babv? Why did an inteligent man like Mr P find it necessary to drink a quart of whiskey every day? Why did Mrs T have coronary occlu- sion? The list of questions beginning v ith why'could be extended indefinitely. They al had one element in ommnn T w nf nn atifar fnr an nf hrn sary to drmk a quart of whUikey ever day? Why dld Mrs T have eoronary ocelusion? The list of questions beginning witb 'why'could be extended indefinitely. They all bad one element in common: I knew of no satisfactory answer for any of them. The 'answers'and explanations wbich I had learned in medical school and which I passed on to my patients were superficial, taking into account only the preceding link in the chain of causality. A pabent would ask me, 'Why does a person get coronary occlusion?'and I would arawer glibly, 'Because there is a narrowing of the lumen of the coronary arteries'. And with that answer he would appear to be satisfied.'Dr Winter, however, was not. He wanted to know why it had happened in this particular case,g and how it could be treated or prevented. Others in that Gardner, op. cit., pp. 346-7 Brian Aldiss observes of him: 'Even the hardheaded Gampbell, who saw in seience and applied science "the salvation, the raising of mankind", even Campbell believed that the impossibility of getting somethjng for nothing migbt be transcended by a formula of incantabon hence his extraordinary noOon tbat seventy-five per cent of the brain (and the most powerful part) lay unrsed, his belief in psionics, and his pursuit of cults such as Dianetics...[etel '. Brian W. Aldiss, Billion rear Sprtt (Weidenfeld & Nicolson, London, 1973. p. n38. t Winter, op. cit., pp. 7-8. a Winter, op. cit., p. 6. It has, of course, not escaped us that this w-as a question of some importanee to the Azande. E E. Evans-Pritchard, Witchatft, Oracles and Magic among the zlzandt (Clarendon Press, Oford, 1937). early cirele led to Hubbard by Campbell, were conscious of the possibility of improvement in their lives. One bad suffered trauma in childhood and had long experienced a sense of social isolation, and social inadequacy, for which he had sought a cure in the literature of hypnosis and suggestion, and in psychotherapy: So before Dianetics arrived, I was looking for something that would get the anguish out of me and speed up the therapeutic process so I could be comfortable...I had learned to chart my path very cautiously and carefully through a lot of shoals, through things that were like this there were certain people...I couldn't approach, or certain people on certain subjects, because I would burst into tears now I'm talking about me as an adult...40 years old. There were things I couldn't go and ask my boss for or about because I v ould burst into tears. That's not acceptable behaviour, so I learned how to stay off of subjects so that wouldn't happen. And I was a very the modern word is 'uptight'- kind of person just from being unable to do so many things like that for various reasons. I had very little freedom in relating to other people. So I was ready for Hubbard when he came along [...l Well I think the reason that it seemed so important is basically that I wasn't happy, and there was happiness here. There was a promise...that I could bypass ail my troubles and come out in the clear without having to face them. And there was an absolution ...the engram is something that has been done to you which determines your behaviour I Others had been involved in a variety of psychotherapeutic practices. The early cirele at Bay Head was white, and pnmarily engaged in professional or semi-professional occupations. Although as the movement gained a mass following it wa5 to spread both up and down the social scale, it remained pre-eminently middle class. Information on the following of the Dianetic movement is, of course, very limited, but a number of clues are available. Early in 1952, for example the editors of one prominent Dianetic newsletter organized a survey of their readership (mainly, but not exclusively in the United States). It is uncertain how many questionnaires were distributed, but 198 replies were received.5 The age distribution of their respondents was as follows: Ag Numba 2 I-26 20 2 7-40 1 oo 44-51 [sicl 37 51 + 17 74 Interview early Dianeticist and member of the Bay ead cirele rh Di2nuls 1, 23 (IsJune 1952) The average age, they estimated, was about 38. The sex distribution of the respondents showed a marked male over-repre- sentation 140 men, 59 women.l As would be expected from the age distnbution, most were or had been marned. Mantal status Number Single 42 Married 126 Widowed 3 Separated 8 Divoreed 5 184 Of those who were married JVumber of ehidren Number 38 2 44 3 27 4 6 nost had children. It is not clear how many of the remaining 27 had more than 4 children, and how many had none. The religious amliations o the respondents showed the largest proportions to The religious amliations of the respondents showed the largest proportions to be Protestant and 'agnostic'. Reliiors afiliation Namber Agnostic 69 Protestant 68 Christian [sicl 12 Catholic 8 Quaker 4 Jewish g Other' 16 l60 An attempt was al50 made to determine the occupations of subscribers. I Clearly either the number of replies received or that of the number of men or women among the respondents is an error. Since it is not clear which, I simply report the figures given, 'Those in the category 'other'belonged to diverse cults, occult groups or marginal sects Mormon, Baha'i, Religious Science, Rosicrucian, etc. 'Psychological''Techmcal' Occup f ion Dianetic Auditors Psychologists Related work Engineers Physicists Chemists Research scientists Other technical 'Medicai and MDs Health' Nurses 2 Otherl 10 'Professional' Teachers Professor Lawyers 2 Clergy 2 Armed Forces 3 Artists g Writers 4 Others 5 'Business's go 'Miscellaneous' Homemakers [sicl 21 Students Children The education level of respondents was claimed to be well above average. Educational attainm6nt Numbtlr Ended with grammar9 school Ended with high school Had one or more years of college Held one or more degrees Bachelors of Science Bachelors of Arts Masters of Science Masters of Arts Ph.Ds. MDs DD DSe vlisceilaneous Doctors [sicl t hose tlster in the otner category nemnged to various limited, marginal or quasitherapeutic professions: pharmacist, osteopath, chiropractor, dietician, naturopath, etc. 2 In such occupations as 'newspaper work', manufacturer, manager, mechanic, truck driver, clerical, salesman, etc. 'That is, elementary. The editors found that r35 of their respondents were readers of science fiction. They also found that 9I had read the speculative philosophical work of Count Alfred Korzybski and 102 that of his popularizer, S. I. Hayakawa. The general picture that emerges is of a following of white,l young to early middle-aged, adults, mainly married with families, from predominantly Protestant backgrounds and with Protestant or no religious amliation, whitecollar occupations and a high school or college education. They were pre dominantly consumers of science-fiction literature,J and many had already ventured into the 'cultic milieu', having acquainted themselves with at least one quasi-philosophical-psychological system. Despite the obvious limitations ol these figures, they remain the only ones available from the period. The broad conclusions to which they lead can, moreover, be supplemented by further observations. A similar picture emerges from the nine respondents to my questionnaire who had been associated with Dianetics during its first two years in Britain. Among these, the average age at which they took up Dianetics was 38 years with a range of between 28 and 5S years of age.J Six were married, two separated or divorced and one was single Parents were overwhelmingly Anglican. Sever were employed in white-collar occupations, self-employed or of independem means, and only two were employed in manual occupations. Educational level were above average for Britain with oniy three having left Jchool before 1 5 years of age, three having attended university. At least six had first heard of Dianetics through the articie in =istvunding Science ietron. Of the thirty-one Dianeticists I Aithough there may have been one or two others, the oniy non-wbite individual I have ever heard of in the context of Dianetics prachce was the chauffeur of a preclear, who received a brief course of auditing. J In many respecb hey are eiose to the characteristics of science-fiction fans as descrjbed by Kingsley Amis: 'Males greatiy predominate over females...As regards age, the average would come Jomewhere in the later twenties, witb a spnnkling of sehool children and a number of veteran fans...As for occupafion, not unnaturaily there is a pronounced technologicai or scienhfic bias, with engineers, chemisb, reJearch workers, and Jo on accounting for perhaps forty per cent of readers...Other groups mentioned rs numerieally important are the non-scienhfic pro&ssions, college studenb, and the armed forces.'Kingsley Amis, Ncw aps of ell (New English Library, London, 1963), p. so. Unfortunately Amis cites no sources for these views. The average age of Dianehcists is probably higher due to the appeal of a therapeufic cult to the older and more illnessprone, otherwjse these observations redect the characteristics of Dianeticisb, as we wouid expect. 3 The twenty-four inciividuals in Colbert's study had an average age of 36 years. The educational achievement of this group was distributed as follows: below high school, I;highschool,s;highschoolgraduate,g;beyondhi5hschool, s;eollegedegree and hlgher educahon, 4. John Colbert, An Evalvation of Danehc hcrapy, Thesis for the degree of Master of Seienee in Education, School of Educahon, The City College, New Yoric, rgSI p. g2. interviewed in Britain and America, from vhom this information was secured only two had manual oceupations at the time of their entry into Dianetics, and most when queried commented on the predominantly middle-class eomposition of the movement. Over half of them had prior involvement in marginal religious, philosophical or therapeutic prachces, Rosicrucianism, Theosophy, Christian Science, Baha'i, General Semantics, Krishnamurti, hypnosis, or Jungian analysis.1 A number of others had experience of more orthodox psychotherapies. It is possible to gain a fuller picture of the backgrounds and motivatiOns of those who entered Dianehcs from the interview material, and biographical sketches or other details in Dianetic newsletters and other publications. One mode of entry into Dianetics seems to have been through a process of 'drift', in which individuals in search of answers to the problem of meaning passed through a variety of metaphysical groups or marginal healing movements before locating an answer, at least temporarily, in Dianetics An example of this pattern is provided in a biographical sketch by a New Zealand Dianeticist. Presenting his concern as a question of 'what made people tick?', he read widely in religion and psycbology for the answer. Religion and medicine seemed too limited in what they could offer, or insufficiently practical. Even psychology...while having exciting possibilities, seemed very narrow in viewpoint with a lot of varying theory but very litde to offer which had practical application There was little here which one could use confidently, knowing that it would lead to improve- ment for the other individual or onerelfi'He at first planned to be a minister, until the Depression forced him into other work, little here which one could use confidently, knowing that it would lead to improvement for the other individual or onesehf.'but my interest in healing, religion and psyebology continued unabated. There were not many orthodox or unorthodox methods of healing which did not attract my attention, nor indeed, were there many religions which I did not investigate. At the age of seventeen I became very interested in mysticism. Aldous Huxley and lvelyn Underhill became my mentors and the Hindu, Bud&ist and Taoist Seriptures, along with the Christian Myscics, my text books. Reluctantly I dropped all idea of psychology delivering an answer. ..Psychology was no longer concerned with the psyche or soul of man, it was dealing with trivialities. Shortly after this period I became interested in Ouspensky and Gurdjieff, men who had much to contribute, much to offer by way of original thought and knowledge. I was excited too by an Australian, F. M. Alexander. Here, at last, was someone who had derived knowledge from direct observation of man. Here was someone who had very practical advice backed up by solid theory and practice....3 I Possibly by asking the wrong question, the Danoes readership survey may have undereshmated the degree of prior marginal religious, healing or occult involvement of the sample. 'Marcus Tooley, Peole ee Humen (Graham Ltd, Aukland, N Z., 1955). This and the foilohing quotahons nre taken from pages 1-7. 'Ibid He later came into contact with a healer expelled from the BMA for his un orthodox methods, at that time practising dietary and faith healing in ew Zealand, and another man who proved adept at hand reading: I was amazed at the accurate character analysis and physical diagnosis which he gave. I had not imagined that anyone could be so accurate in depicting my various idiosyncracies, emotional traits and medical history ! Furthermore he was able to tell me of various things vhich had happened to affect my life and the age when these had occurred. Here was knowledse which had wide possibilities and it was not long before I was reading books by.. . psychologists and medical authorities...anc others who were experts in this study.l He began practising a form of therapy based on hand-reading, getting his clients to talk about painful incidents which he located in their hands. He found that after talking them out, and often re-experiencing much of them, their condition generaliy improved. In s 952 he read.l-SM and found there a statement of all his earlier beiiefs and suspicions about the mind, and workable techniques for therapeutic success. This typical seeker pattern is also apparent in the origins of one DianeticsScientology newsletter: The Ghost vvas started as a personal letter from Clem and Lois Johnson to thei. Eriend in L'ianetics, Scientology, Huna, Spiritualism and other occult fieldi including herbs and medicine. fThel editor has taken yogi, Spirituaiism and Huna in his stride toward the TRUTH, accepting them all as so much data, and rqecting them as more data was received.: This seeker pattern is exhibited in the descriptions of their development given by two other Dianeticists, later to achieve prominence as heretics of Scientology: In high school my primary interest lay in the sciences. I followed through with this interest in college and then worked for a time in physics. During this time and after, I searched fervently through many religions, not only all the major ones, but a goodly number of esoterie cults that are so numerous in Southern California. Ir addition to that, I practised various forms of exercises, and invested numerous hours in the meditations of sundry groups. Though I could demonstrate abilitv in music and art, I ultimately abandoned the serious pursuit of these fields, for I found no final answers to Life in them.S I Ibid. 2 rhe Ghost of Scientology, g (I March 1953), p. 7. ClemJohnson elsewhere indicated that he aiso be'onged to, or had passed through: the British Society of Dowsers, the Borderland Science Research Association ( all borderland sciences including spiritu- alism and the riddle of the dying discs ), Institute of Mentalphysics ( Edwin C. Dingle s schoo'of metaphysics or Yoga ), and the Brotherhood of the White Temple. Ghost of StientologY 1 l ( 15 June 1 953), p. 4. S Charles Bcrner, Preface: a self-introduction and some acknowledgements in H. Charles Berncr and Richard Williams, .4ei/1tism: a i\er Religion (Adams Press, Chicago, 1970), p. 3. Thruout [sicl these many years, I had merely gone thru [sicl the motions of being an engineer. It vas with dimculty that I was able to keep my attention from the eonstant gnawing feeling v-ithin me, that I should be doing something other than what I was doing. Just what I 'should'be doing, I did not know. This became acute, in g8.Forsixweekslsuheredanervousbreakdown.Now,lknow-lsimplywasnot 'doing my own tbing'. I constantly investigated, sampled every diflferent religion, cult, ism I could find. They all seemed to, in their own flavour, try to explain Spiritualiy in terms of agreements upon solids. They took a partial truth, centred upon it, created a limited, local frame of reference, represented it to be tptal and ultimate truth. [ l It is an understatement to say that I was merely lonely. I beheld the specter of other so-called 'truth-seekers', vrho so ardently sought some solid, infinite system of truths which would overwhelm them - and would precisely fit the present hangups which owned them. wondered if I were such. Psychology was of no interest to me, as it posited that man was nothing more than a complex meat mechanism. It seemed to me that most psychiatrists should be in the patient's chair, rather than acting as therapist. [ l InJuly, Igso,mydentisteasuallyremarkedthatafnendofhis,anotherdentist,was experimenting with a new fad, called Dianetics. s I left the chair, I felt the imperative urge to get the book. I drove seven miles out of my way, to the nearest 'ihortly after, he began co-auditing with a colleague at work. book store, bought it. I read it tbru [sicl.l Shortly after, he began co-auditing with a colleague at work. Others came into the orbit of Dianetics as some member of an amateur psychology or philosophy discussion group with which they were associated drew their attention to this development: Well, we work away here on Dianetics....Dianetics seemS quite the best thing yet...althoughJung's Analytical Psychology did give us more vivid inspiration.r The original EIouston Dianeties Society grew directly out of the local General Semanties Society..t; The search for therapeutic efficacy was a prominent Source of motivation ffir many Dianeticists. Although none of my intervieweeS claimed any physical illness at the time of their eDtry, at least six were suffering from severe illnesses which they recognied to have a primarily mental or emotional origin. A number sought a means of curing others, usually other members of their own fa.nily, of conditions as diverse as cancer, schi:zophrenia or agoraphobia For example: y attention was called to a newspaper ad. in San Francisco, I think it was around 95l. There was a big ad. in the paper about Dianetics and about L. Ron ubbard, I Frank S. Sullivan, Adrentunes in Reincfrn2tion (CSA Press, Clayton, Georgia, 971), pp. 17-l9 5Letter from the Australian Psychplogy Center, Dinnotes, 1, 9 lo (March-April 1952), p. 8. Correspondent, 'rhe Aberree, 2, 4 (July-August, 1955). who was going to lecture in Oakland. I happened to have at the time a big problem with my son who had been hospitalised...He was out of the army several yeans and he was not getting any better. So when I saw this ad. I got very interested and I thought, well this might be helpful...I decided to go in for it, and I went to hear L. Ron Hubbard lecture.l The case of Don Purcell who financed the transition to Wichita is typical of many who were experiencing diffuse psychosomatic illness or a sense of lowered efficiency: In 1948 I was in pretty sad shape, My energy level was so low that I was unable to do more than half a day's work and the work I did do was pretty ineffective. My condition became so serious that I finally went to a Doctor friend of mine, a Fellow of the Ma o Clinic. He gave me a thorough examination and suggested tbat I see a psychiatrist. This I did. The final prescription of the psychiatrist was a long rest at the hospital with insulin shock treatment. This may give you some idea of my general condition at that time. However, for some obscure reason, I decided to decline the prescription of the psychiatrist and to go on a good fishing vacation instead. When I returned I fel quite a. bit improved. About this time my father and 1, who had been in partnerzhip for many years, decided to dissolve our partnership. As soon as the partnership was dissolved I began to improve remarkably. Within a couple of months I was putting in a full day, although I still experienced quite a bit of nervous and physical upsetment. In May 1950 I read about dianetics and immediately went to Elizabeth to learn almough I still expenenced quite a bit of nervow and physical upsetment. In May l950 I read about diaretics and immediately went to Ehzaheth to learn more about it. I had high hopes of becoming a 'clear'in a couple of months or ;o. I knew, somehow, mat within the framework of dianetics was the thing I wanted. ,, ,a A simmlar story is told by a correspondent to a Dianetics magazine: Having been always very emotional and nervow, there were so many 'buttons'in my environment that I was constantly bothered by strange feelings in my stomach, my heart action was irregular and my throat was irritated or there was a choking sensation. Even after years of metaphysical studies and various courses in psychology, mental healing, etc. those conditions persisted. After my first session with her [a Dianetic auditorl I began to feel happier, and more free of all those disturbing things. DuringAprilandMayIhadread Dianstcs: AzheModernScifnceof Mtntal lralth and Scienct of Suruiual, and had gone over the handbook twice, just reading it and doing a few locks on my own. The auditor took me through birth and even through my 'Service Facsimile'. Many crises in my life were reeognised for what they were worth and I have not had any of the old emotional reactions since.a A large number of Dlaneticists, although it is impossible to say what proportion they comprised, had a strong sense of capacities latent within them Inter iew: American Dianeticist. e Don G. Purcell, 'Starting Point', Dianetifs 'roday, 3, 9 (September 1954), n.p. e Dianctic Auditor's Bulletin, 3, g (September 1952), p. aSo. which could be brought to the surface if only a method could be found. John W. Campbell,forexample,hadarguedin 937thatweareonlyusingaquarterof our brain capacity. he total capacity of the mind, even at present is to all intenti and purposes, infinite. Could the full equipment be hooked into a functioning unit, the resulting intelligence should be able to conquer a world witbout much difficulty I It was not for a further twelve years that he was to be offered by Hubbard a convincing means of achieving this end. From my interviews, it is clear, however, that this vas a goal widely, if vaguely, aspired to: It bad always been, for many years, a feeling of mine tbat one specifically myseh and by inference other human beings don't perform with roo % efficiency, either mentally or physically, but mentally particularly. Hubbard's thesis of the 'helddown seven' and so on seemed to be a rational and satisfying erplanation, and from that, the immediate urge was to try and do something about it.'We were basically a group of musicians, one was a writer, another a painter....[What was it that attracted you to something of this kind?l I had been looking for something that gave a step hy step...a methodology that was workable, that you could use to help yourself or somebody else...I used to put it in terms of: Why is one person more creative than another...what was the creative drive, what was thedifferenceandhowcouldyoubringitoutineachone?Howcouldyouincreaseit ? I guess all of us had pretty well read the Iansas City Library dry, and found nothing the difference and how could you bring it out in each one? How could you increase it? I guess all of us had pretty well read the Kansas City Library dry, and found nothing in the scientific, psychological, the mystical, or the religious. Nothing seemed to 'click'. There's a lot of methodologies, and 'we've got the answers', but nothing 'clicked'and this sort of clicked with all of us. It was sometmng we could all do to each other.'Or, as in this case, a sense of faculties not fully utilized combined with a general sense of purposelessness and meaninglessness: In 1947 I was really at very loose ends. You see, I have a very high IQ and I knew it. I'd had my IQ tested by the Veterans Admimstration when I came back from overseas. My first question to the psychometrist was: What the hell good is it? I'm miserable, I don't know what to do with it. What do you do with a gift like this, it's never done any good for me? I was very near suicide at the time, because I couldn't make head or tail out of what's the use...what's life all about? I didn't have any particular mental prohlem which even today I recognise. It was just: why am I here, where am I going, what's it all about, and why am I singled out for a high IQ and what the hell good is it? But tbat was incidental really, because I said, well, if you have a high IQ you ought to be able to figure this out in nothing flat. All the answers ought to come to you, but they don't....I was seriously considering John W. Campbell, 'The story behind the story', rhrilling WtndeT Storits (August ) as cited in Aldiss, op. cit., p. 241. Interview: British Dianeticist. Interview: Amencan Dianeticist. suicide. So along came Dianeticr, verything fell into place, smack ! I knew then he is a possibility of gettin all these answers I An nglish ouestionnaire respondent indicated that he had hoped Dianeti would prove to be the solution to his sense of frustration at not being able ful to use talents I possess. Others admitted to a deep sense of inferiority or i security before they heard of Dianetics, which they hoped that it would enab them to overcome. Colbert s sample of American Dianeticists indicated the following range o personal problem5: interpersonal relationships, 15; disturbing subjective states (nervousness, anxiety, irritability, self-consciousness, lack of concentration) 15; intellectual and memory disturbances, 7; vocational adjustment, 3; fami relationships, 3; alcohoism, z; psychosomatic symptoms, 14; lack of driveenergy, I; sexual adjustment and male-female relationship problems, 5 miscellaneous problems, 4 5 These accountS permit a typification of the motivation of Dianetics recruits The three categories of motivation which can be distinguished are: (I) tht problem-solver; (z) the truth-seeker; and (3) the career-oriented. Since th last two types seem to involve fewer Dianetics recruits, than the first, we shal begin with these. The career-oriented Dr Joseph Winter is close to being a paradigm case of this type of motivation. As a medical practitioner he was dissatisfied with the inability of medicine to provide solutions to all the problems which his patients presented. He was growing aware of the role of psychological factors in physical illness and hoped to find in Dianetics a set of tools whmch would enable him more adequately to carry out his therapeutic role. A former clinical psychologist whom I interviewed displayed predominantly the same motivation. He had been employing a method of group psychotherapy on a Freudian basis in his hospital work and was profoundly dissatisfied with its efficacy. At a period when psychopharmacological treatment was only just beginning on any scale, and when the only alternatives to lengthy and only sporadically successful psychotherapy were custodial care and psychosurgery which he regarded as misconceived, Dianetics offered a revolutionary new therapeutic tool. The truth-seeker lany individuals were attracted to Dianetics when they came upon it at some point during a life-long search for meaning and truth. During the course of this search they had often examined the literature of popular philosophy and psychology, of religion, metaphysics and occultism. Science fiction, with its panoramic vision of man, hme, and the cosmos, also provided many with an insight into the meaning of life and human behaviour. Dianetics, with its Interview: American Dianehcist. olbert, op. cit., p. mo. Subjects indicated more than one problem each. assertive claims to infallibility offered to answer many of the questions which puzzled such individuals, albeit in a rather mechanistic manner; and moreover offered a practical and easily operationalized technique to put into effect the truths which it had uncovered. The motivation of many was, it should be stressed, multi-determined. Although the previous two types of motivation appear to have been important for a number of recruits, many, perhaps most, also sought solutions to concrete problems. The problem-solver The problem-solver was an individual with a concern for self-improvement based upon an acute awareness of his failure to attain the standards of achievement normatively approved and culturally reinforced in the society around him. While rendered significant by their social meaning, his failures might be either physically, mentally or socially based. His concern might be for physicel improvement and oriented towards recovery from ill health, overcoming physical disability, or eradicating a stigmatizing physical characteristic. His concern might be for psychological improvement of a more or less extensive character. At its most severe the problem would be an acute or chronic mental illness of a disabling psychotic or neurotic kind. Less drashcally, it would be an awareness that certain mental attributes v. ere inadequately controlled or ineffective poor memory, persistent minor guilt or anxiety, unwanted behaviour patterns or habits. His concern might be for social improvememt, based on failure to achieve personal ambitions or social expectations, or on difficultieS in interpersonal relations These three classes of disability and henee sources of coneern for improvement are likely to coincide in the same individual. A highly typieal case was the combination of physical and psychological disability in the form of psychosomatic illness, ineapaeity which had, or was believed by its sufferer to have, an emohonal basis. All three types of disability bear the soeiologieal feature of a recogmized failure to achieve expeeted and normatively valued standards of role performanee or status attainment. They involve a dispanty between the level of status and competent role-performance to which the individual aspired and that which he had aetually achieved, a disparity generally eonceptualized in terms of 'relative deprivation'. he appeal of Dianetics in modern society Thomas Luckmann and Peter Berger have pointed to general features of advanced industrial societies which would account for this sense of failure and 'relative deprivation'. They have argued that personal identity becomes particularly precarious in urban industnal society.l Increased social and 'Thomas Luckmann and Peter sert er Social mobility and per onal identity', Eurolean jonat of SGioloey 5 (1964), pp. 331-43. geographical mobility produce a blurring of the class structure and of criteria for locating the social status of others in interaction, and relative uncertainty concerning one's ovvn status location. The existence of multiple cnteria for status ranking gives rise to the possibility of stats incOnsistency. As Luckmann and Berger suggest, If status is relatively uncertain and relatively inconsistent, conditions are created tbat are unfavourable for the consisteney and stability of the self.l Rationalizahon of production shifts emphasis from ascnbed to achieved bases of status placement. Individual achievement becomes a major means of status placement, increasing social mobility. Increased mobility in turn creates an cXpcctation of mobility, and the inculcation of general mobility aspirations which cannot, however, be realized by all. Standards of adequate achievement are no longer defined by traditional status groups in which most people live out their lives and which establish an horizon on expectations of achievement. Standards are estabbshed rather by the status groups in which membership is sought, and since achievement is valued intnnsically, there can be no clear horizon of expectations. There can, therefore, also be no clear cnterion of adequate achievement, resulting for many in a persisting sense of failure.3 Moreover, increased mobility, the breakdown of established status groups, and the disappearance of cohesive communities in which relationships are personal rather than role-articulated, results in a precariousness of social interaction.a In the absence of clear means of identifying others and tradihonally estabbshed means of conducting social intercourse, social interaction has a fragility and unpredictability which makes any social interaction a potential source of embarrassment and threat to the identity which actors proffer for recognition. Social interaction in anonymous urban industrial societies has to be negotiated without the aid of elaborate formulae of civility and identity markers typical of pre-industrial societies. The skills required for such negotiations are inadequately acquired by a proportion of the population. In societies with a democratic ethos, stressing the equality of members and a mobility ethos in whmch: Mobility is no longer a means to an end, but becomes an end in itself and thereby a yardstick for other values in the life of the individual Ibid., p. 335 'Jacob Tuckman and Robert J. Kleiner, 'Discrepancy between aspiration and achievement as a predictor of schizophrenia', Behavioural Sciencs, 7 (1962), 443-7 suggest that frustration, caused by a discrepancy between actual and desired group membership, may be a cauae of schizophrenia. a For graphic accounh of this 'interpersonal precariousne33 see the works of Erving Goffman, particularly his Presentation of Self in L:ucryday Lifs (Doubleday Anchor, New York,lgsg),andBhariourinPublirPlaces(FreePre33,NewYorkl963). 3ee Erving Goffman, 'Symbols of class status, BS, 2 (195l ), p. 295. uckmann and Berger, op. cit., p. 34o Failure to achieve the levels of mobility, wealth, or even sexual access aspired to, are defined as failures of the inrdiriducl rather than a consequence of socially structured constraints on opportunity, or of an unrealistic ideology in the light of opportunities available. Luckmann and Berger suggest two broad patterns of adaptation to such failure withdrawal and mobi3ity Machiavellianism.l At their most extreme, these patterns may be represented by withdrawal into psychosis and isolation, and Machiavellianism of a kind in which any means to mobility are construed as appropriate, for example, crime. Less extreme forms of adaptation would be, for example, legitimating failure through movement into the sick-role, or seeking additional or superior means of recuring mobility. The latter might include securing further educational qualifications which lacked any intrinsic interest to the individual, simply as a means of 'getting ahead'; seeking training in the presentahon of self through Dale Carnegie courses or books on 'how to win friends and influence people', or seeking esoteric means of securing mobility through the acquisition of hidden knowledge. Dianetics was presented as a means of improving the individual's chances of status mobility, a means of achieving normatively established levels of aspiration. It offered a rationale for failure in social mobility and in social interaction. It provided an explanation in terms of traumatic incidents in which the individual had been unwittingly involved, and thereby relieved him of responsibility for his failure. All the past mistakes, iailures and sources of guilt could be wiped out.2 Most important, it oflfered a means of eradicahng the persisting causes of his failure, and thus of attaining the level of achievement to whmch he aspired. The theory of Dianetics assured its follower that his ' true self ', his conception of what he believed he was really capable of achieving, was indeed at he conceived it. It reamrmed this idealization of self and promised a means of eliminating the barriers to its fulfilment, of eradicating the gap between his 'true self'and the identity that was typically confirmed in social interaction. Moreover, Dianetics provided a means of understanding not only oneself, but also others, a way of categorizing and accounting for their behaviour, and a guide to appropriate responses.t r Af hA 1.1 nf h nt n wh.^h he nirfd. The The further question remains, however, of why Dianetics was seen as an Ibid., p. 3l 'Helen O'Brien, a prominent early Dianeticist suggests: 'The tremendous appeal of dianetics came from Hubbard's apparent certainty that you could easily clear yourself in present time of the heritage of woe from past misadventures.' Helen O'Brien, Dianetics in Limmbo (Whitmore Publishing Co, Philadelphia, 1966), p. 72- Dianetics literature and the letters and recollections of Dianehcists are full of commentary on others in terms of Huhbards tone scaleb Locahng them on the tone seale provided a way to account for their behaviour, eplaining ib occurrence and provid- ing prescriptions for reaction to it. acceptable and legibmate solution to the problems with which recruits were faced The answer to this question would seem to be that they had either tried alternative systems of belief and practice and found them unsuccessful, or they had rejected such alternative systems as inappropriate to their situation. Many of those interyiewed claimed an acquaintance with the literature of psychology, and expressed dissatisfaction with it. Psychology as far as they could see in the 19405 was split between behaviounsm and psychoanalysis. Behaviourist psychology seemed to have little or no relevance to man in general and no solution to their problems in particular. Psychoanalysis, while addressing many of the problems which they faced and offering solutions to them, had two major drawbacks. Firstly, analysis seemed an inordinately lengthy process, often lasting several years, Secondly, it was too expensive for most to consider it as a practical proposition. Those who were suffering physical ills or disabilities had generally tried medical means of overcoming them, but found little satisfaction from medical professionals, few of whom recognized the essentially psychological or social basis of many of the complaints presented to them. Ill-equipped through lack ol training to cope with the needs of such patients, they resorted to pharmacological or surgical treatments which, while successful in some cases, left other feeling the need for a treatment practice which took greater account of man as a whole. Others, suffering chronic illnesses for which medical treatment had proved unsuccessful or from illnesses for which effective therapeutic interventions had not yet been discovered, had exhausted all he resources that orthodox medicine could offer. In the case of those suffering both physical and mental problems, the individuals concerned had generally sought solutions in a variety of other therapeutic practices before they came in contact with Dianetics. Bureaucratization and the scale of modern urban society produce a context in which many individuals experience a lack of control over their destiny and environment, a sense of being moved and constrained by forces beyond their control. any of those who did not conceptualize their situation in medical or psychological terms experienced the world in which they lived as more or le5s unpredictable, chaotic, or meaningless. They sought some means of greater control over their environments and their reactions to it. Related to this, a small proportion were engaged in therapeutic work of a limited or marginal kind, and saw considerable limitations in the tools they had available. A further small proportion claimed a simple intellectual curiosity, which had earlier led them to other systems of self-improvement, metaphysics or occult knowledge. While science held great promise, having delivered technological 'cargo', and having proved a powerful tool in the improvement of matenal conditions, it had done little to solve perennial and increasing problems of psychological ellbeing, to provide cures for certain forms of illness, or to equip man better to cope with his social environment. Dianetics followers tended to conceptualize appropriate solutions to such problems as bcing 'scientific'in form. Their conception of science was, however, a lay conception (albeit a lay conception which has from time to time been offered as an academic account in the form of Pragmatism). It was technological and instrumental in form. What constituted a science was a body of knowledge which appeared to explain some set of phenomena in a rational and consistent way and which provided a means of intervening in the processes involved so as to achieve successful or desired out comes. Their test of standing of any body of knowledge was: does it work? That is, do interventions of the prescribed form issue in desired outcomes? When, after a Dianetic session, they felt better than before, they concluded that it worked I They tended to expect that new and important scientific developments would appear through media or institutions marginal to the scientific community. Their conception of this community v-as one of an elitist group with vested interests in the promotion of particular theories and practices, unwilling to accommod tte new ideas or even to give them a fair hearing. Hence the innovator would generally need to find a more marginal institutional base in order to get bis revolutionary new thoughts heard. Dianeticists appear to have held a belief in the immanence of linowledge that it was frcely available and anyone who applied himself might expect to secure radically new or deeper insights into the nature of the world. They also held a belief in the elitism of science3 that scientists had arrived at their own views to which they were unwilling to permit any radical challenge. Since orthodox science was so conservative on this account, the intellectually curious might seek truth in less orthodox realms - metaphysical or occult groups, marginal healing, philosophical or psychological movements, or science fiction. Science fiction proviaed all that science lacked, filling in the lacunae of scientific knowledge or competence with fictional or speculative detail, and blurring the distinction between the empirical and the desirable.3 Converts to Dianetics were mobilized to accept an unorthodox system of belief and practice by the urgency of their need, which orthodox systems had been unable to meet, or by a conviction that radical developments in knowledge were to be anticipated outside the domain of the institutions of orthodoxy, which lacked the vision to generate them. John W. Campbell was an infiuential figure in the science-fiction world and neighbouring regions of the cultic milieu. His readership saw him as a man of vision, willing to give any idea a hearing. When Campbell gave his support to 'For a fuller treatment of this condation of science and technology in popular culture, see Oscar Handlin, 'Science and technology in popular culture'in Gerald Holton, ed., Science an Culure (Beacon, Boston, 1967), pp. 184-93. D On this point, one of the clear attractions of Dianetics as that anyone could do it. Although esoteric, it did no require lengthy and rigorous training. 'Otdinary'people coulddoitforcachother.Seeforexample, LfeP1eserler,1,l (June 1953). 3 And of course, the undesirable and horrific. See Kingslcy Amis, ,Vew.las of He)l (New English Library, London, t963). Dianetics, interest was aroused on the basis of his prestige and his enthusiastic acclaim of this new science of the mmnd. On the publication of Hubbard's Dianetic writings, the idea of 'clear' li::e that of 'flying saucer'became a hnd of Rorschach blot,l a vague and amorphous image upon which any individual could impose his aspirations. Being clear, however Hubbard might define it, meant being able to do all those things which one currently could not do, and to which one aspired so desperately.s he self-improcement and healing cults Dianetics has a place in a continuing tradition of self-improvement movements in the recent history of the l;nited States. Enormously accelerated social mobility and an ideology of individual achievement led to the emergence of a concern for infallible technique5 that would ensure success for the mobility-oriented. This was a particularly pressing concern for those who had failed in, or failed to gain access to, the major channels of mobility in modern industrial societies, the institutions of higher education. The late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries saw the appearance of various movements and organizations which offered access to advanced, occult, metaphysical, or otherwise esoteric knowledge, and some which, more cynically, merely offered certification that access to such knowledge or training had been obtained. The 'diploma-mill'became an established, if derogated, institution. Movements such as New Thought suggested that prosperity and success were available to everyone. The use of a few r,Lmple techniques would enable anyone to overcome the limitations which he believed held him back.3 Dianetics also found a place in the continuing tradition of healing movements in the United States. Indeed, the two tradihons overlapped to a very high degree, movements within this domain offering both healing and self-improvement, and certifying 'professional'competence in the practices purveyed 'The develop- ment of science, paticularly medical science, during the nineteenth century, led, it has been argued, to increased expectations regarding physical health and comfort. These expectations were in excess of what medicine could actually achieve. See H. Taylor Buckner, 'The flying saucerians a lingering cult', New Society (9 September 1965). s For a sensitive and illuminating appraisal of the relahonship between Dianetics and Scientology and occulflsm, psychoanalvsis, science, pseudo-science, etc., see Harnet Whitehead, 'Reasonably fantastic: some perspectives on Scientology, science fiction and occulhsm'in Irving 1. Zaretsky and Mark Leone, Religious Morements in Gontemporary Americ: (Princeton Umversity Press, Princeton, 1974). s A. W. Gnswold, ':ew Thought: a cfflt of success, A 75, 4o, 3 (l934), pp 308-18. For an account of a number of such diploma-mills', healing and 'psychological'practices, see Lee R 3teiner, Where lo People rake Iheir rroucles? (Houghton Mifflin, soston, 1945). The great breakthroughs in medical research by Lister, Pasteur and many others had created a new level of expectation that medicine could defeat man s age-old enemies of pain and disease. Iew accomplishments in engineering, agriculture and public sanitation brought the hope of a healthier, more comfortable life to the lowest citizen. But it was a long time after many of these advancez became theoretically possible that they were actuaLly realised for the average perscn...1 From about 1860 to at least 1300, in the experience of all but the wealthiest claszes, there was a very real gap betueen the ultimate promise and the actual performance in medicine and public health measures. The medieval resignation to disease and pain was gone, but the modern means of accomplishing general health and wellbeing for the whole population were not yet fully mobilized.r The new heaiing movements such as Chrlstian Science and New Thought offered means of overcoming this gap between expectation and performance in the realm of physical healing while medicine became increasingly specialized and compartmentaiized and allopathic medicine directed attention to the diseasc rather than the individual, leading to a depersonaiization of the practi- tioner-client relationship, the new healing movements retained a personal orientation, a concern for the whole man.3 Hence it has been argued that the role of the practitioner in suci movements is closer to that of the psychotherapis than of the medical practiioner. The thereapeutic success claimed by such movements is generally attributed to mistai en diagnosis,t the placebo effect 5 spontaneous remission, and the mobilization of the patient s expectation of healing.7 This expectation can be heightened and directed by the therapist in subtle, and often unconscious ways, particularly if his own belief in the emcacy of the practice is strongly held The non-directive or evocative therapies employed afford a strong temptation to the therapist to induce the patient to express material that confirniz his theories, because he can regard it as independent evidence for them; and the patient is induced to accept the therapist s formuiations because he believes them to be his own. The therapist s very determination not to direct his patients may itself create an ambiguous situation that may increase the patient s suggestibility, and also arouse h s anxiety and resentment, which...may act as an incenti e to change.9 John A. Lee, Sectarian lleaiers and Hypnotherapy (Queen s Printer, Toronto, 1970), P 7- n Ibid. 3 Ibid., p 5. R. W. England, Some aspeets of Christian Science as reflected in letters of teshmony, A 7S, 59, 5 (1954), pp448-53 Ibid. E. Th. Cassee, Deviant illness behaviour: patients of mesmerists, Sociai Sc/ence and./l.ledcine, 3 (1970, pp. 389-96. 7 Jerome D. Erank Persuasion and Heaing (Johns Hopkins Pren Baltimore 196 ). bid., p. 68. id. 70 THE CULT AND ITs TRANSFORMATION Even in the absence of conscious or unconscious 'coaching', the patient generally arrives for therapy with a fairly clear idea of the performance that he will be expected to produce. From material he has read, stones he has heard, or from generally available cultural stereotypes, he will construct an anhcipatory image of the appropriate performance. In the case of Dianetics, reports of the practice were so widely published in newspapers and magazines that few preclears can have presented themselves for auditing without some knowledge of what experiences, were the session suecessful, they would undergo. As, through the early twentieth century, medical practice became more competent to deal with physical illness, expectations of health and well-being became increasingly centred on the psychological domain and the difficulties of interpersonal relations. Movements like Chnstian Science and New Thought which had claimed efficacy in handling physical illness lost ground, while other3 arose offering psychological well-being; relcase of mental and emotional tensions; cures for psychosomatic and neurotic illness; techniques for releasing hidden inner abilities; and means of 'making friends and infiuencing people'.l n such areas science has yet achieved little concrete progress, and the market remains open to cultic gToups offering knowledge and techniques produced by more mystical, occult, or pseudo-scientific means. Whatever the source of such knowledge the prestige of science has become such as to require that almost every new movement entering this field claim scientific legitimacy and authority,5 Lf by no other means than that of incorporating 'science'in its title.3 Socteral reacton and soial mvo/vemenL While the response of the book-buying public rapidly placed ISMH in the best-seller lists,'it WRs not everywhere received with enthusiasm. Reviews by psychologists and psychiatnsts were almost uniformly unfavourable. Rollo May objected to Hubbard's oversimplified monocausal determinism and regarded his grandiose promises as potentially barmful to mentally and emotionally troubled people.e Others objected to his repeated claims 'of exactitude and of scientific experimentll approach, for which every trace of evidence is lacking', mong others, Pel nanism, Transcendental Meditation, and Encounter Groups. As Robert Merton has observed, 'Partly as a result of scienhfic achievements...the population at largc becomes suscephble to new mysficisms expressed in apparently scienhfic terms The borrowed authority of science bestows preshge on the unscienofic doctrine.' Robert K. lerton, Social rheory and Social Sfructure (Free Press, ILew York, '957), P. 560. 5 5cience of Mind, hnsdan Science, the Science of Creative Intelligence, Dianetics: the.'vrodern Science of Mntal irealtk According m its publisher and others: interviews. Rollo May, 'How to back-track and set ahead Vew ork rimes Book Reuiew, 2July 195O. ann ugtrru LllL lJLlllL "' the doctor, time that might in severe cases prove fatal.l More sympathetic reviewers suggested that Dianetics was harmless enough and might possibly even be of help to socially isolated individuals: The close relationship between the two people who 'audit'each other can become a bridge from the isolated person to the outside world. The person gets encouragement from another, no matter what kind, and thus achieves a feeling of eonnectedness with other people, and consequently succeeds where he has previously failed.'The benefits of a sympathehc listener while the pre-clear ventilated his problems were recognized by some reviewers who nevertheless remained concerned at the effects this might have, in untrained hands, in the case of severe mental disorder.a Although some of these reviews may have attracted people to Dianetics, it was the view of some Dianeticists that the reviews in the larger eirculation periodicals and newspapers were generally so unfavourable that they had led many to fall away. Apart from numerous marginal, limited and quasi-medical converts, Dianetics was received coldly by the medical, psychiatric and psychological professions Dr Gregory ilboorg publicly attacked Dianetics before a forum at the New York Academy of Medicine,s and the American Psychological Association was widely reported for its resolution calling on psychologists not to employ Dianetic techniques in therapy: While auspending judgement concerning the eventual validity of the claims made by the author of 'Dianetics', the assoeiation calls attention to the fact that these claims are not supported by the empirical evidence of the sort required for the establishment of scientific generalisations. In the public interest, the assoQation, in the absence of such evidence, recommends to its members that the use of the techniques peculiar to Dianetics be limited to scientific investigations to test the validity of its claims. Attempts were subsequently made to carry out such scientific investigations. In a laboratory test, a Dianetic pre-clear was rendered unconscious by the administration of sodium pentathol, and a passage read to the pre-clear from a physics text, during which pain was infiicted, at the suggestion of the representative of the Dianetic Research Foundation, Los Angeles. SLY months of auditing by a trained auditor failed to recover any part of the passage read.' I Martin Gumpert, 'The dianetics craze', New Republic, r32 (1, August 950), pp. 20-t. a Willard Beecber and Galder Willingbam, 'Boiled engrams'Amertcan ll/ferrury 73 (August 1951), p. 80 'Anonvmous, 'Dianetics', Censumer Reperts (August 195), pp. 378-80. Denotes, 1, 5 (December 19 il). 5 'Dr Zilboorg attacks dianetics', New rork imes, lot, 3o ivlarch 1951, p. 15. 'Psychologists act against Dianetics'N w 'rork rimes, g September 195O, p 7. 'Jack Eox, Alvin E. Davis and B. Lebovits, An experimental investigation of An earlier study by Harvey Jay Fischer had attempted to test the claims m. for Dianetic therapy in terms of improved mental functioning and mathemati ability, and lessened personality conf ict Securing a sample of applicants to a Dianetic centre in an American city, divided them into three groups, controlling for educational status and a Standardized psychological tests were administered before and after a sixty-( period, alternate forms of the tests being used. The first group received I sessions of auditing each week for one hour each session. The second grou received two sessions of auditing each week for two hours each session. The thin group received no auditing. The three groups therefore received respectivel eightcen, thirty-six and zero hours of auditing during the experimental perio at the Dianetic centre. From an analysis of the test results, Fischer concluded: For the population of disturbed persons who applied for dianetic therapy, and were between the ages of 22 and 47 years, and who had at least some high school education, regardless of the sex of these persons, it was concluded that:. dianetic therapy does not exert a systematic influence either favourably adversely upon intellectual functioning; 3. dianetie therapy does not exert a systematic influence either favourably or adversely upon the degree of personality confliets.5 g. dianetic therapy does not exert a systematic influence either favourably [ adversely upon the degree of personality conflicts. John Colbcrt conducted a study wllich attcmpted to detcrmine the effect, John Colbert conducted a study which attempted to determine the effect of Dianetic therapy on the basis of tests admintstered before and after a course of auditing, although he did not utilize a control group.5 In a pilot study, Colbert claims that 'the people who applied for dianetic therapy were found to be above average in intelligence, education and income'.4 To an 'unselected'sample of 24 applicants for Dianetic auditing at the l'iew York City and Elizabeth, New Jersey Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundations, Colbert administered Rorschach, IQ and other tests, and a questionnaire. Colbert found no significant changes in IQ before and after auditing.5 Clini- cally, on the basis of the Rorschach data, Colbert's findings were that 'fifteen individuals were believed to have undergone changes that tended in the I The denvation of Fischer's hypothesis that Dianetic therapy reduced personality conflict, is obscure. 'HarveyJay Fiseher, 'Dianetic Therapy: an Experimental Evaluation', Unpublished PhD dissertation, School of Education, New York University, I gg3, p. 4r. s John Colbert, 'An Evaluation of Dianetic Therapy', Thesis for the degree of Master of Science in Education, School of Education, The City College, New York, 4 Ibid., p. rs. Unfortunately no adequate details of this pilot study are supplied. 5 Ibid., p. 104. Hubbard's engram hypothesis (dianetics)', Psychological J\wsleUcr, m (9g9) pp. 1314 negative direction, but these changes were in all but one case not unequivocally negative'. Six individuals were believed to have undergone no change, while the overall pattern of change in the remainder was in doubt.L The Rorschach pattern displayed by the group lent itself in his view 'to a description of the group in terms of its prominent hysteroid and infantile-suggestible features'.s (Various tests produced under the auspices of Dianetic and Scientology organi- zations, however, show considerable improvements as a result of Dianetic auditing. See, for example, the test results included in Svuence of Survivol.) Winter, as medical director of the first Foundation, attempted to interest his colleagues in Dianetics, but with little success. A meeting was arranged in Washington DC, at which Hubbard lectured to a group of 'psychmatrists, educators and lay people'. Winter comments on this meeting: I did not feel that the Washington venture was a successful one at least, not from the mcdical point of view. It was noteworthy that most of the people whose interest in dianetics had been augmented by this presentation were members of the laity, rather than the profession, and I thought that I could detect in their attitudes the fervor of the convert, rather than the cool, objective interest of the seientist. The professional people evidenced an interest in the philosophy of dianetics; their interest was repelled, however, by the manner of presentation of the subjeet, cspecially the unv arranted implication that it was necessary to repudiate one's previous beliefs before accepting dianetics.a Dr Morris Fishbein, a spokesman for the American Medical Association, was widely reported for his castigation of Dianetics as yet another 'mind-healing cult' Some sectors of the medical profession clearly took the vie-v that there was a need for more active steps to be taken to deal with what was seen by some doctors as a form of quackery. InJanuary 195l, it was reported in a Bulletin of the Elizabeth Foundation that: Beeause no teaching lieense was ever procured for New Jersey despite reports that it had been in June, Elizabeth is under suit from the State for teaching without a license.5 The New Jersey Board of Medical Examinerss had initiated an injunction against the Elizabeth Foundation, later vacated, for conducting a school of medicine without a license. It was almost certainly as a result of the publicity given to this action that creditors of the Foundation began to demand settlement, leading to reorganization and centralization of the Foundation at Wichita. Ibid., p. 96. 'Ibid., p. 56. 'Winter, op. cit., pp. 29-30. 'See 'Poor Man's Psychoanalysis', Nswswee (16 October 195O) pp. 58-9. GBulktn 21 January 1951). See also rhe Dienrmic, HDRF, Elizabeth NJ, 13 (8 February 19SI), P 3 Interviews; George Malko, Scientolog): the ow iclition (Dell, N.Y. 1970), p. 58; Morris Fishbein, 'Editorial', efedicn/ lorlc ws (7January lg72), p. 68. Possibly as a result of this response from the established therapeutic pn fessions, Hubbard has since demonstrated a marked antagonism to medic practitioners, and to psychiatrists in particular. Hubbard brushed aside a criticism, attributing it to the ignorance of the critic and his vested interests i the income from and the prestige of practices threatened by Dianetics; his engramic condition;l and to professional incompetence: There is a direct ratio between the brilliance of a mind and its ability to understand and work dianetics we have proven that continually; a person highly successful, for instance, in the field of psychoanalysis can be counted upon to grasp dianetics quickly the second rater, whose practice is unsuccessful, whose security is already small, may have dimculty in understanding dianetics and even be savage about it. The social involvement of Dianetics was severely limited by its individualistic character and its monocausal theory. Dianetics was oriented to the alleviation of social and econon.ic ills by individual improvement rather than social or political change. The root of man's social, economic and political misfortunes was held to lie in the formation of engrams which led individuals politicians in particular to acts that were detrimental to the survival of the individual anc society. Erase the engrams, and social and political ills and injustices would disappear. However, until everyone was able to eYperience the benefits of Dianetic processing, it might be necessary for an elite of clears to guide the destiny of the world Hubbard foresaw the emergence of 'an aristocracy of the mind'from those who had the understanding required to accept Dianetics and undergo clearing: thns who harl th rst rnuirrrl to Irrent Dianctics and underc There will be many of these. But they will have to carry, on their own energy, so to speak, those they wish to benefit. Below this will be the persons whose insanity or criminality has made them a menace to society and who will be given a telease in dianetics at state cost and those persons who have money enough to buy a release....On a lower strata [sicl there will be those who, for various reasons, do not undertake clearing and for whom no clearing is done. A wide gulf is thereby established. On the adage that them as has gits sicl, one sees with some sadness that more than three quarter of the world's population will become subject to the remaining quarter as a natural consequence and about which we can do exactly notbing. The saving part of this is that the good will of the upper quarter will inhibit their eYploitation of the less fortunate.a One area of social concern was of immediate importance to Hubbard. Like many others in post-war America, Hubbard was eYercised by the threat of 'L. Ron Hubbard, 'Homo Superior, here we come!'.lrcrvel Science Storles, 3, (lay 1951), p. m2 2 L. Ron Hubbard, letter in srass Tacks, Asovnding Science Fiehon 45, 6 (Augus. 950), p. 55. J Ibid. communism and, as its concomitant, the threat of nuclear war. Vhile his Allied Scientists of the World scheme was in some measure a fund-raising device, like many later, similar schemes, it was consistent with, and probably partly motivated by, other principles which guided his behaviour. Allied Scientists of the World was based on a plan to establish an atom-bombproof archive for scientific information, collected from all over the world, in Arizona. Hubbard established an office in Denver which he staffed with personnel associated with the Wichita Foundation. Letters were sent to scientists and technicians whose names vere secured from mailing lists. The letters informed the recipients that they had been awarded fellowships in the organi- zation in recognition of their scientific achievements, and asked for 525 annual dues. Accompanying literature described the plan to establish a bomb-proof archive, and to band scientists together to protest against the use of atomic energy in future war. Hubbard had planned to approach scientists of little repute first, and then, when he had secured their support, to move on to the more prestigeous. Had any considerable support been generated, he planned to set up an anonymous committee to issue books sponsored by the organization, but in fact written by Hubbard.l (In a comment upon the manuscript provided by officials of the Church of Scientologv, an American Dianeticist, who is said to have been privy to these events, is reported to have indicated that there was no plan to issue books sponsored by the organization, but written by Hubbard.) In the event, however, the scheme led to investigation by postal authorities and other State and private agencies; the response from those who received the mailings was negligible; and Allied Scientists of the World was abandoned. I he cultic characlel istics of Dianetics In terms of the types outlined in Chapter I, Dianetics can be unambiguously located as a cult. It was defined as deviant by the mass media and by most established professional bodies and their spokesmen. The movement's following in general conceived it as providing one of many possible paths to the truth or salvation. Dianetics emerged from the 'cultic milieu'of self-improvement and healing cults, science-fiction, and popular psychology. Its beliefs and practices appear to be a synthesis of strands drawn from this milieu and from more orthodo; psychological research and psychotherapeutic practice, supplemcnted and adapted by the researches and insights of its founder. The movement was loosely organized. Dianetic groups were linked to each other and to the Foundations by largely informal means. Little loyalty was owed to the central organizations, which had few means of enforcing commands. Practitioners and followers were tolerant of other practices or beliefs. Dianetics was seen as one contribution to the sum of esotcric knowlcdge leadim l Intervievv; see al30 Denret Pst 60, 1 78 (z7January r9S2); Letter from Don Pureell, rfle Dinews, r, zz (3r May rgS2), p. ro. 76 Tr CULT AND ITs TRANSFORMATION to salvation, but by no means the only available path, nor a completed a closed revelation Followers eagerly sought to improve and extend the beli and practices of Diaretics, drawing eclectically on other traditions and bel systems within the cu'tic milieu The movement's 'epistemological individualism'is displaved in the followi statements by the ed tor of a Dianetic newsletter, and a prominent Dianetic practitioner There is no reason to take what I say as the 'truth', as the 'right way'Your way is the best for you there are many, many roads to a higher state of e:cistence no man can sa 'This is the rord for sll to follow' The movement was non-exclusive membership was loose and de cible as was the belief-system An enthusiasm for, or interest in, Dianetics was the onl important criterion of membership for mos of the following While the mor sectarian sections of the movement's leadership made efforts to elude som practitioners and practices, these attempts were resisted by the following, which was prepared to listen to any innovaDon from no matter what source Membership changed rapidly as followers lost interest, solved their problems, or found a new enthusiasm. new enthusiasm Finally, Dianetics lacked any clear and unambiguous locus of authority While Hubbard was recognized and acclaimed as the founder of this science of the mind, the following in general did not agTee that this gave him any exclusive right to determine what should or should not constitute acceptable doctrine and prachce, or who should or should not be accepted as a member of the Dianetic community Except for a small minority who were prepared to submit to Hubbard's authority, the Dianetics following recognized no authoritative source of attributions of heresy within the movement They alone, as individuals, had the right to determine who or what should be accepted I Dianotss, 1, g-m (March-April 1952) 'Jack Horner, 'Jack Horner Speaks', Transcription of a lecture at the New York Dianetic Association, November 195Z, The Eidetic Foundahon, Alabama, 1952 page 76 =============================================== 3. CRISIS AND TRANSITION Sources of the crisis The developments that took place in the ideology and organization of Hubbard's following emerged partly as the resolution of a variety of strains and conflicts in the Dianetics community, which existed between Hubbard and other leaders; between Hubbard's desire for a strong central organization and the amateur groups keen to retain their independence; and between Hubbard and other innovators of theory and practice. They were also, in some measure, a response to external vicissitudes: a hostile environment, and a declining market. The break between Hubbard and Purcell was the culmination of a series of strains in their relationship and even earlier difficulties with other coleaders of the movement. Ninter, for example, had broken with Hubbard over a number of issues, of which the financial precariousness of the Elizabeth Foundation was only one. Firstly, Winter found a difference between the ideals inherent within the dianetic hypothesis and the actions of the Foundation in its ostensible efforts to carry out these ideals. The ideals of dianetics, ar I saw them, included non-authoritarianism and a flexibility of approach; they did not exclude the realization that this hypothesis might not be absolutely perfect. The ideals of dianetics continued to be given lip-service, but I could see a definite disparity between ideals and actualities.' He had growing doubts about the possibility of achieving the state of 'clear', and was concerned at the extent to which the effects of Dianetic therapy were simply the results of suggestion. He felt that the effect of the techniques might not always be beneficial to the pre-clear, and that it might sometimes be positively dangerous in the hands of poorly trained auditors without adequate medical knowledge. The increasing disparagement of 'the medical profession and the efforts of previous workers in the field of mental health' disturbed him, as well as the absence of scientific research for the purpose of which the Foundation had supposedly been established.a The research which was being conducted was IJoseph A. Winter, A Dottor's eport on Dianctics: heory and hrrapy (Julian Press, Nevv York, Ig5t), p. 30. 2 Ibid, p. 40 78 'rHE CULT A-D ITS TRANSrORMAT10:" directed to 'investigating the possible therapeutic benefits of "recalling" the circumstances of deaths in previous incarnations'1 and Winter did not regard this as likely to result in acceptance by the medical profession. Finally, he objected to the uncontrolled administration of a vitamin and glutamic acid compound known as 'Guk', as an aid to therapy.2 His protests concerning these matters met with sharp rebuff 'and I was led to infer that I was acting as a deterrent to the progress of the Foundation'.3 Winter resigned from the Foundation and established a private psychotherapy practice in Manhattan uhere he combined Dianetics with psychoanalysis and Genera Semantics.4 In due course, Dianetics dropped from his practice.5 John W. Campbell in retrospect also criticized the increasing dogmatism and authoritarianism of Hubbard. The relationship between Hubbard and Purcell followed a similar pattern. After a short period of co-operation, Hubbard began to feel that Purcell was constraining his control over the development of ianetics Purcell attempted to establish the Foundation on a sound business footing, but Hubbard rapidly began generating new techniques faster than students could be trained in them. More money was being spent than was being earned as experimentation continued with vitamin compounds and later started with electropsychometers. When Purcell insisted that expenditure be reduced to meet income, Hubbard began initiating independent fund-raising schemes7 which were a source of embarrassment to other oundation directors, and a source of further expense.S Finally, Hubbard insisted on pursuing the matter of past-lives in spite of the protests of other leaders of the Dianetics movement, including Purcell.9 Ibid, p. 189. 3 On 'Guk', see L. Ron Hubbard, Science of SurzJival, 1 l, p. 260. 3 Winter, op. cit..p. Igo 4 'Departure in dianetics', 7i1ne, 58, lo (3 September 1951), p. 39. S See his later book: Joseph A. Winter, Are Your rroubles Psychosomatic? (Messner, New York, Igs2). S Letter in rfe Arc Light, 25 (May 1952), pp. 6-8. 7 Such as the Allied Scientists of the World, discussed in the previous chapter. 8 Letter of Don Purcell, 19 April 192 in e Diarews 1, 21 (April l952); Letter of Don Purcell, 21 May r952 in the Dianews 1, 22 (31 Iay 1952), pp. g-12; 'Foundation Story', Dianetics 7oday, 3, 1 (January 1954), pp. 1-3; interviews with leaders of the Dianetic movement. 8 A footnote in Science of Surviual indicates that past-lives had been an early source of strain: 'The subject of past deaths and past lives is so full of tension that as early as last July (1 gso-ed) the board of trustees of the Foundation sought to pass a resolution banning the entire subject. And I have been many times requested to omit any reference to these in the present work or in public for fear that a general impreS- sion would get out that Dianetics had something to do with spiritualism.' (Science of SurDiual I, footnote, p. 61). rulrl..r anc dlllpUtll ululr ll uullu r. secure sole authority: Ron's motive has al-vays been to limit Dianetics to the Authority of his teachings. Anyone who has the ahfrontry Lrsic] to suggest that others besides Ron could contri bute creatively to the work must be inhibited ' In the later bankruptcy action, it was alleged that: ...Hubbard completely dominated the a fairs of the corporation and dominated the meetings of the Board of Directors to such an extent that only those matters which hc approved were discussed at the Directors' meetings and other matters were not considered. During such periods of time, said Hubbard exercised complete control over the employees of the bankrupt, to the extent that from time to time he countermanded the orders of the other offieers and directors and ran the business of the bankrupt according to his own whim and choosing.S By the time this action took place, it was clear to Hubbard that any future organization would have to be based on his sole leadership. WhiLc Hubbard was facing chaLlenges to his authority at the centre of the movement in the Foundations, challengcs v ere aLso appearing from the grass roots These took a number of forms. The dispersed amateur groups which formcd the main active body of support for Dianetics exhibited a considerable independence. They tended to view with suspicion attempts to create more than a loose central organization and the possibility of the infringement of their autonomy. The attitude most prominent in the pubLications was one of independent, democratic individ ualism. One description of the movement by a Dianeticist represented it as: processing of ordinary cases by ordinary people. It means ordinary people getting together for study and practice. It means little groups of dianeticists up and down the country.: While others saw Dianetics as moving towards a professional rather than an amateur basis they retained a preference for a democratic form of organization. When Dianeticists proposed to set up a national organization in Britain, three possible models were envisaged. . There might be one central organisation, tending to paternal authoritarianism, with individual auditon relatively unqualified... 2. A state of afairs might be reached in which individual members would be sufficiently highly quahfied to be able to look after themselves legally, professionally, etc..rnd so need from thc central organisation the minimum of I Dianehcs ·roday, 3, 1 (January 195.). r Hubrard Dianetic roundation Inc. rn Bankrutcy Jo. 37g-B-z, District Court of the United States for the District of Kansas. r 'the Dianeticist, I (April 1952), p 3. authority compatible with the maintenanee of those standards which the individual members would eventually be adopting. Thus Dianetic would be safeguarded frcm exploitation by any biassed section by ensuring the competence of each individual auditor, so emuring maximum individual freedom. g. Or there might be a central organisation whose functions were so limited that it could not claim the authority to take much responsibility, with individual members and local groups left largely autonomous to feel their own way towards the sort of standards which will eventually become necessary if they are to have safety as well as freedom as dianeticists. Model one was totallv rejected, and while model two was seen as the form of organization towards which Dianetics would eventually move, three was seen as the only viable interim form of organization. The Dianetic Federation of Great Britain followed such a model, with no control over affiliated groups, and little rcsponsibility beyond the circulation of informahon. Hostility was frequently expressed in the independent Dianetics literature for 'authorities' of any kind: In working with advanced cases we have discovered much that is not in accordance wih Hubbard's teachings. For example, leality. There is only one reality for each of us and we destroy it by accepting the realities of others...Dianetics is Hubbard's reality. Christianity is Jesus' reality, Theosophy is Blavatsky's reality, etc. All of these must be given up before a person can go optimum.S In a healthy and growing science, there are many men who are recognised as being reality. Christianity is Jesus' reality, Theosophy is Blavatsky's reality, etc. All of these must be given up before a person can go optimum.' In a healthy and growing science, there are many men who are recognised as being competent in the field, and no one man dominates the work [....] To the extent dianeties is dependent on one man, it is a cult. To the extent it i5 built by many minds and many workers, it is a science.S Asearlyasmid Igsl,atthetimeofthemuchpublicizeddivorcecasebetween Hubbard and his second wife, Sara, it was argued that the movement could well proceed without Ron Hubbard: ...Dianetics no longer revolves wholly around Hubbard. He developed it, and gave it to the world and the world has taken it and gone on from there. Other groups besides the Foundation are carrying on research and processing. As for the Hubbard affair, we dianeticists do not have to either explain or deny it. Dianetics does not depend on their actions and if they choose to disqualify themselves as leaders, we now have others.' On the occasion of the split between Hubbard and the Wichita Foundation, a section of the movement took the view that there was no reason to identify Dianetics with Hubbard, and that as.... ' Letter from Secretary, Dianetics Study Group, to Dianeticists n.d. (probably early 1 952) . sLetterfromJimWelgos, ·thePreclear, 1, 7 (5JUne 1952),p 12S Letter fromJohn W. Campbell, hr Arc Lght, 25 (I ay 1952), pp 6-8' Dianetos, I, 3 (15 April 1951). Hubbard . ..Hubbard is not the onlv onginal thinker in Dianetics many otherr are thinking and producing ideas, some, elucidations of Hubbard's ideas, some ideas that Hubbard has never mentioned. Dianetics would progress, they argued, 'with or without Hubbard'.2 This attitude of independence and indiidualism led many practitioners to generate new Dianetic techniques and theoretical rationales. Some felt their innovations to be so far reaching as to have become a completely new praCtise deserving a separate name and reCognition, and set up institutes, schools and foundations of their own to propogate the practice. This diversification was deplored by some Dianeticists: The dianebc population, though oEunknown size, certainly is small compared to the total world population. Even so, there have already appeared many vectors of effort (factions) among this relatively small group. Recriminations, name-calling, denials of other's reality...are a part of the scene. Some of the vectors involved are Kitselman's Institute of Integration, and Automatic Scan Clearing; Altman's Examiner Theory and Techniques; Fisher's Integrator Therapy; iaylor's PCMA techniques, Winter's modificrtion of 'classical' (1950) dianetics, Home Work techniques, Hubbard's rg50 theory and techniques, recent developments in theory and technique now coming from Wichita, and many others; the Hubbard Dianetic Fovndation, as a commercial institution...HDF as a school; Power's Function Processing; the HDAA-I, a society of professional auditors wimh their own individually varying attitudes; and all the individuals and groups throughout the country who act to any degree along any of these vectors, or along one of their own S It was, however, applauded by others: Each of these cell-divisioni accomplished something positive. Hubbard bwlt more wisely than he knew when he insisted on a prineiple of non-authoritarianism for now we have dianetics, we have therapy, we haveER,wehaveNaylor'spCM,wehave . ..analytical procedure and nexology, and humanics, and, as an adjunct, gestalt therapy [Etc]. We have all these things and 1, for one, believe the whole is worth while. These cell divisions have made possible our survival. hvlore important, they have made our potentialities limitless as compared to those of our cousins, the psycho-analysts because of our essentially non-authoritarianistic structure.' Such innovators often believed their own developments to have greatly surpassed those of Hubbard: Dianetas, 1, 22 (31 May IgSr p. 2. Ibid..p. 3. ' Editorial, Dianotts, 1, 5 (December rgSI) pp. 2-3. Art Coulter, 'Cell Division and Growth', Dianotes, 3, 34 (July 1954), p 9; for an amusing account of the factionalism in Dianetics, see Vox Populi, 'Origin and development of Psychoreligion', Dianotes, 3, 3 1 (April 1954), pp. o-lo. ·..we have rrogressed beyond Dianetics...Now we are promulgating teaching of greater deprh, 'lgidetic Psychology....We find agreement with all techniques i part, but it seems that the higher goals produce greater results while admitting their basis in Dianetics: only one third or less of the total process is based on Dianetic Procedure . r One former Dianeiclst who established his own foundation even had the tcmerity to offcr for sale a book entitled Dianetics Perfected.3 Others, while not extensively developing independent theories and procedures, eclectically combined Hubbardian theory and practice with those of other psychnlogical and philosophical schools: Garbon Dioxide Therapy,4 New Thought affirmations,9 nutritional rrgimes, Orgone Therapy, etc.S A ·videly prevailing view was that any theory or technique which could help gain thc ends sought through Dianerics should be employed. Thus one Dianetics nev,sletter cditor rcviewing a book on Huna (Hawaiian magic), Max Freedom Long's he Secret Scince Behind Miracles, suggests: Opcn-minded Dianedciss might do well to consider much of this data sic in the light of biending some of the suggesed echniques into our present procedures. If they will simplify and spced up processing, they are well worth a trial.9 Some practitiOnerS became extremely eclectic, one describing a technique derived from Krishnamurti, Henshaw Ward, Gestalt Therapy, Analytical Procedure, anc Some prachtioners became extremely eclectic, one describing a technique derlved from Krishnamurti, Henshaw Ward, Gestalt Therapy, Aralytical Procedure, and Karen HorneyP' A few moved towards more occult realms, one group even began delving into alchemv in order to create gold.ll For many others, hov.ever, the direction in which they wished Dianetics to IJohn B. Lewis, 'A report on the investigation of dianetic phenomena', the ArG Light 15 April 1952), pp. 5-7 3James Welgos, Dianetics Perfrcted (Human Engineering Ine, Fairhope, Alabama, 955) ' Dianotes, 3, 26 (November 1953). t Dianotes, 4, 45 (June 1955), p. 6. For example, 'I will not gain (or lose) weight anymore... Food can be fattening or not, as I wish it to be...' ; Gllforn)aAssociationofDianeticAuditors Sournal, t, 5 (May 19$). ' theArclight (26January 1952). 5f 21 professional Dianetic auditors in Southern California in a 195s Dianetie publication, 14 were listed as practising and o8fering other techniques as well as Dlanehcs and Scientology - including General Semantics, Nutritional Therapy, Gestalt Therapy, Psvcho-analysis, Rogerian i herapy, Concept Therapy, etc. t ADA Bulietin, 1, m (1955), pp. 8-s. 9 Dianotes, z, 15 (December 1952). Dianotes, 3, 28 (January l9541, p 5. 'l Letter in the Ghost of Scientolog, m (April May lgs3), p. 8. proceed, ·vas tov ards a rapprochement with the medical and psychologic. professions. They viewed Dianetics explicitly as a form of psychotherapy, tendc to reject thc occult and spiritual aspects of the theory that developed out of ti notion of thta, such as past lives, and restricted themselves to the form I practice presented in Hubbard s early Dianetic works. The shift towards mo] mechanistic procedures of rote processing, on the basis of ists of auditing commands, alienated them further. Some of those who possessed a model of Dianetics as a therapeutic art advocated thc assimilaion of elements of orthodox healing theory and practise ...we should not hesitate to carefully examine and integrate into Dianetics, where applicable, any and all of the techniques which are in common use in psychologica and psvchiatric practise. Certainly these practices work to a cer ain exrent; in so far as they are useful and safe, they will have to be integrated into Dianctics eventually. If they are not, then Dianetics wiLI not develop into the complete, well-rounded and comprehensive science of the mind that it now potent2ally is Finally, a number expressed a commitment to the notion of Dianetics as a science, indepcndent of the medical or psychological professions, but rejecting Hubbard s occult developments. All such views were reported in the independent Dianetics media. New techniques werc presented and ncw theories discussed with considerablr tolerance: Mr Powers has his ideas about this...others have other ideas . ..and Dianetics ha tolerance: Mr Powers has his ideas about this...others hav other ideas.. . and Dianetics has room for all.e The newsletters and bulletins reflect the tolerance and electicism of many of their readers and correspondents: I feel in dianetics we have a segment of the truth...but in order to get this segment of truth in perspective, we need to compare it to other truths. If so indicated, we can then individually decide whether or not we wish to add to the original segment.n What constituted the truth was held to be an individual aflair, up to each member of the Dianetics community to determine. As one E-therapist stressed: In discussing the psychic aspects of E, I wish to state, first of all, that whatever I may say is only my truth. By this I mean that what may be true for me, may not be true for anyone else in the vorld.: Hubbard himself did not view such attitudes and developments favourably. From the tume of the Elizabeth Foundation he had called developments of Dianetic techniques that he did not sponsor Black Dianetics 5, and declared Introductovy Butletin of the Central Pennsyluania Dwnehc Gvvup (August 1951), pp 2-3. ·theDinnews, r, Z2 (ivfay 1952), p. 10. CelDzl Bulietin, I, 19 (l9ss), p. 18. ' Dianotes, 3, 33 (June 1954), p 4 L. Ron Hubbard, Suggested Changes in the Organisation of the Eoundation mimeo (Elizabeth, lev Jersey, 195O). the mixing of Dianetics with some other therapy to be the source of many problems with students I A severe challenge to Hubbards standing in the movement came when independent auditors began to proclaim that they had produced clears'. Such auditors were eagerly sought for guidance, training and auditing, and rapidly moved into positions of leadership in the Dianetics community. However, it was one of those declared 'clear, Ronald B. Howes, rather than his auditor, who presented the gravest potenhal challenge to Hubbard's leadership within the Dianetic community. Howes was a Dianeticist in inneapolis. Like many others, he had got into the movement as a result of the article in Astounding. He had previously been briedy a convert to Catholicism, and was declared clear in January 1952. A close associate at this time described him before he had attained the state of clear, as tending to be a 'promoter with his feet off the ground' and having big ideas which didn't work due to other people's lacks'. Howes had been audited by a man who had been associated with the Wichita oundation. As a result of processing and conversation with this auditor, Howes went through what appears to have been an intense mystical expenence which convinced him and many others that he was clear. Many Dianeticists hurried to VIinneapoLis to meet him, and Later to Colorado Springs where he established the Institute of Humanics. Tape-recordings and transcripts of his conversations with other members of the Minneapolis group, and visitors were widely circulated. They convey an attitude of considerable awe on the part of his associates, who regarded him as capable of displaying miraculous powers: U nr nnirclllmls nowfrs We have in Ron me validation for me vision of 'Perfect aan' which has haunted mankind through the centuries. Ron will demonstrate the absence of galvanic reflexes to the most extensive and erbaustive questior ing, the absence of body tremors or other waste motion such as occulomotor jerks. He will be eompletely relaxed save for the particular activations required for particular requirements. He can induce cellular proliferation at any point in the body, grow cancerous or omer tissue and make it disappear at will. His sleep requirements are reduced to an optimum for him of four hours to five hours per night, with fLLI alertness on awakening. His 'psychic' aetivities are phenomenal; he can read other's thought-feelings as though they were an open-book.. . His mental ealculations are with extreme speed and preeuion. He was believed to be engaged on projects such as: further development of his conquest of gravity and space... explorations into the mechanics and maaipulability of life and behaviour towards more optimum human beings and societies.a I L. Ron Hubbard, 'Instruction Protocol, Omcial', mimeo (20 November l950, -r^lizabeth, NewJersey). ' Grace Krausy, ';\leet Mr Ron B. Hov es', Dlanors, I, m (May 1952), p. 11. S Dwight H. Bulklzy, 'Introduction' to Gordon Beckstead, ed.. Prologw to Suruiual, Part III (Psychological Research Foundation, Phoenix, Arizona, 1952) . plonouncements durmg this pcriod without exttnsive quotation,l btt as a sample: Q. What is your reading speed compared to what it was? A. It s mighty fast and improving steadily every day. I noticed and my · if e remarked upon it, that I seemed to be turning the pages about mree times as fast. My comprehension of printed materia has gone up enormously eompared to the past. The most difficult paragraphs in technical reading are very easy now. No confusion, no identity, no failure. My ability to pick out errors in judgement of other people on paper is much higher. Q. How do you find the field of physical chemistry now? A. I have never discovered a cave with aboriginal drawings in it but when I opened my physical cbemistry text book I did. The child bas more intuitive knowledge about the world than the adult scientist, if the child is reasonably bigh toned. At one time I was in that state for a period of approximately two years. There were peaks, of course, and there were valleys. There were moments when I as an individual was hieher than I am right now, and certainty was absolute. There were no goals impossible to achieve. I v-as right. My ability to solve a problem was complete. I cou]d do it. I was me. I was a strong force. My beart sang and the stars were alive and then I went to school it may sound like a jest, but it is not. Our educational system is one of the finest methods of eontrolling society of which I know, and the most insidious. Q. Can you be affeeted by baeteria? A. I still believe there are bacteria wbich I can t resist, but there must be many bacteria which I can resist now that I could never resist before. ous . Q. What do you contemplate as your duration of life ? A. In chronological years, if my anti-gravity plan works, I would assume approximately another four hundred years. Under present circumstances, one hundred and a quarter. Q. How much eoncern have you at this time over income? A. None.ofear,worry,anxiety.Allmypostulatesonlosingmyjobdisappeared; about being successful, disappeared. I can do more for any partieular persor who employs me than any other person possibly could. And I find it very easy to talk them into giving me money if I so desire no difficulty. Vhat experiments have you performed on yourself? I ve also tried to see if I can regenerate teeth. For the moment I ve got some very sore gums but no teeth. Perry suggested to me, in a roundabout way that I sbould regenerate teeth. Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, I got extremely sore gums. Teeth were pulled out. I ve regenerated tissue to the maximum extent I can. The soreness is now disappearing. The gums are much more healthy. Next point is what constitutes a seed tooth? I think it s possible to construct them again See Appendix 1. IncidentaDy, I haven't decided what I am going to look like yet. It' variable and to a large eLtent subject to one's pleasure.l Although other auditors also announced that they had produced clears3 non of these was to cause the ercitement in the ficld of Dianetics aroused by Howes. He rapidly gained a reputation second only to Hubbard himself His theories and practices vere widelv taken up, and the question was raised whether with Hubbard apparently leaving the field, Howes might be 'A new leader in the making?'3 Whcn Hubbard began publicizing Scientologv, some Dianeticists felt the community had split into two 'apparently conflicting camps of "thought": the Howes ideas and the Hubbardian ideas'. 'vlany Dianeticists pilgrimaged to the Institute of Humanics in Colorado Springs to receive processing from him, but he made no attempt to organizc his clientele, and his prestigc received a shaltering blow when police investigation of the Institute was widely reported, and Howes was found to have been claiming a doctorate ·which he did not possess. Howes closed the Institute, and although a small personal following remaincd associated with him, his influence on Dianetics was thereafter negligible.5 While the Dianedcs community was splitting into competing factions, it was also suffering a considerable attrition of membership..SA/I had, according to its publisher, sold lo,ooo copies during its first year of issue. Iany thousand people had tried out the practice, and a proportion had actively pursued their interest in Dianetics by taking courses at the Foundation, or by joining amateur groups A tailing-offof interest had appeared, however, as early as the beginning of 1 95 t . ^lAhe income of the Eliabeth Foundation had dropped from $28,160 in January to 520,620 in February of 95 r .t After the initial boom, a slump had begun to set in. By mid-lgs2 it was clear to one newsletter editor that: r TA Fl:,.l. FiAn h Irnnlrd lmll 528.160 in The publie, it would seem, does not want to participate in Dianetics, but rather they want to benefi by n....They want, in Dianetics, to be able to purchase the resultant end productvithout actively doing the eonstructive work that it requires, liLe buyhlg an automobile without helping the assemblage.' I Gordon Beckstead, ed..Prologue to SUTCWtI Part Il (Psychological Research Foundation, Phoenir, Arizona, 1952), pp. 5 6. r See 'Jack Horner' in Ibid..pp. 14 15. 3 Dianotes, 2, 14 (November 1952), p 2. he CommunicttoT, 1, 9 (Sovember 1952), p n 5 Howes appears to have had iess interest in founding a movement, than in establishing a self-supporting communitv. He continued in this attempt after his 'eYposure', founding among others the St Eloi Corporation where a small group of followers worked with him on various rrscarch and development projects, including a 'rare- earth' separation plaut. The community appeas eventually to have foundered, and Howes and some of.ais followers v-ere leceised fback] into the Catholic Churcb. nterviews . Documems n.adc available to me by a lormer Foundation director. 7 Dlanrtes, 1, 12 (June-July 19 i2), p. 2. As another Dianeicist observed in retrospect, 'Whilst dianetics reaclled thc proportions of a national craze in 195n, by late 195 1 it had largely collapsed'.l A number of groups had disappeared, and many had c:perienced a decline in active membership. Dianeticists had a number of hypotheses concerning this decline. The most important reason for the loss of inttrest many believed, was that the promise had been very great but that it had not been fulfilled: The promise made in Dianetias: the Aodern Sciente of Msnal ealh was a very definite and simple one. It was stated that the application of the approach described m the book would within a fev hundred hours of auditing time produce a clearcd :ndividual, free or all aberrafion. It vas alYo stated that as auditing continued, rogress toward 'clear became consistently more easy. The resson that dianetics did not retain is oririnal impetus and, in ract, rapidly lost almost all the ground it had gained dt first, was due simply to the iact that, when dianetics was put into practice, it as obselved that none of these statements was correct. Inny Dianeticists had become 'disappointed because we wcren't clears after one hundred hours of processing.S This disappointment was heightened by the apparent failure of those declared clear' to perform in a manner regarded as appropriate Sonya Bianca, Sara Betty Hubbard, Ron Howes; and the failure of the two hundred or so individuals, Hubbard maintained that he had cleared before the publication of his book, to manifest themselves in any way. Hubbard's own behaviour between Igo and 1952 had given some cause to doubt the efficacy of his 'science'. Others had abandoned Dianetics in the face of attacks upon it by psychiatrists and psychologists.4 Yet another reason for attrition was the presentation of Dianetics as a psychotherapy. Whatever their feelings about the state of clear, many people had gone into Dianetics to solve relatively specific problems of illness or psychological handicap. Whether through spontaneous remission, the hope given them by Dianetics, the attention they reccived as pre-clears, or the therapeutic validity of the practice, a number had felt improved in consequence. Having secured what they had wanted from Dianetics, some discontinued involvement S l James H. Schmitz, 'What happened to the rens of thousands ?', Internalional Dianetic Socie(y Leller, r (1957). ' Ibid. ilt Carland, 'Remember that bridge?', Dianotes, 1, 5 (December 1 95l) p r. That people had drawn away from Dianetics because of bad reviews of L. Ron Hubbard's Dianelcs: Ihe .Uocern Science of Menlal Heallh by psychologists and psychiatrists, was certrinlv belicvcd by Dianeticists themselvcs Dianoles, 1, 5 (December ll;t riews with former glCUp leaders and Dianetic 4uditors. .4daptatiett t lrom the earliest days of the movement, Hubbard had attempted to assert control over its direction and development. He first sought to control the theorv and practice of the movement, attempting to prevent the submergence of his own ideas under the weight of synthesis, or ideologicai or technical innovation. While technical innovations by others were permitted, such developments only received publici in official media if they were approved by Hubbard: Our subject is standard procedure, a routine of auditing devised byJames E. Hurt in July of 1950. It had become obvious by that time that many people, who had studied the book only, were running into problems which their knowledge of dianetic procedure would not resolve. When this became apparent to Jim, he sat down one evening and outlined a procedure for dianetic processing which would eliminate these apparently irresolvable situations. His plan was studied by Mr Hubbard ard then adopted by the Foundation for general use.l Other theoTehcal or technical innovations of which Hubbard did not approve, or which had not been submitted for his approval, were attacked in official publications: E-therapy is an outgrowth of an amalgamation between dianetics and a system of opinion held by an individual. The advice of the Foundation is: Don t use it. At best, it is another wi]d variable in an area which already has too many variables. At worst, it can be actually dangerous. Dianebcs should not be diluted. As early as hlSMH, Hubbard had attempted to protect the practice against compounding: Don t mix gasoline and alcohol, or dianetics and other therapy except purely medical... Crossing Dianetics with an older therapy was considered one source of troubles with studen s in training and a dangerous practice. The term Black Dianetics had come into use at the Elizabeth Foundation with the meaning of any form of, or vanation on, Dianetics, or any use of it, of which Hubbard disapproved. The dangers of Black Dianetics became a part of the course I Anonymous, An Outline of Dianehe Standard Procedure, mimeo transcription of tape, n.d..probably 195l. For a general statement of this policy, see L. Ron Hubbard, A definition of standard proeedure, Appendix Two, Science of surDira st edn (Hubbard Dianetic Foundation, Wicbita, Kansas, 1951). 2Dianetir Auditor's duttetin, 1, 8 (February 1951). See also L. Ron Hubbard, A definition of standard procedure, op. cit..p. go8, where an attack is made on a doctor who can be no other than Joseph Winter, for his attempts to develop, without facilities or expenence, eertain techniques of application . MS.llrl, p. ag8. L. Ron Hubbard, Instruction Protocol, Official, op. cit. 2 Slil,p. 165curriculum at the Wichita Foundation, although it was not a widely publicized idea until Scientology was launched.l Having established the existence of heresy, Hubbard had also to establish machinery for locating and managing it. This remained rudimentary during the Dianetics period. A locrd of Ethics was established at the Elizabeth Foundation in November 1950 with the brief of 'checking on alignment with Standard Procedure',s but the activities of this Board do not appear to have had any great influence on the Dianetic community at that hme. An attempt was also made to constrain the free use of the term 'Dianetics' and to exercise some control over independent and competing professional schools: Dianetics has encountered its greatest difficulty with those who have tried to jump on the bandwagon for personal gain. It has had to resort to legal measures against unqualified persons who stvle themselves professional d!aneticists, those who rnisreprescnt the name of dianetics by opening unauthorised schools and clinics and others who attempt to publish plagiarised or fraudulent dianetic literature.' Hubbard and his associates also sought to distinguish Dianetics from what its detractors in the press had seen as its principal sources, hypnosis and psychoanalysis. Dianetics was distinguished from hypnosis by a number of factors. In Dianetic auditing, the pre-clear retained full consciousness of his environment, and of what occurred. No form of positive suggestion was used, it was argued. Indeed post-hypnotic suggestion was regarded as aberrative in Dianehcs, and a form of engram.4 Hypnosis was held to be dangerous since while in the trance state, anything said by the therapist would be engramic.6 Psychoanalysis was held to differ from Dianetics in that the former was concerned primarily with sex, while this vas only one among four dynamics in Dianetics Psychoanalysis sought to recover unconscious memories only from childhood (or in the Rankian variant, from the birth trauma) while Dianetics returned to the pre-natal period. While psychoanalysis stressed itight as an IL.RonHubbard,'Danger:BlackDianetics',ournalofScientoloy, 3G,n.d. (1952), p. 7. the term had been emploved publicly before in reference to A. L. Kitselman s E-Therapy. Alan A. Engelbardt 'An analysis of E-Therapy' in Waldo Boyd, ed..Sulement o. 2 o 'Science of SUrDiual' (Wicbita, 1951), p. 4n There are, of course, close parallels between 'Black Dianetics' and 'Malicious Animal Magnetism' which Mrs Eddy accused her apostate and heretic students of employing to evil ends. 2John Maloney, 'Organisational Memorandum', mimeo (6 November 1950, Elizabeth Foundation). S the Dianamic, 1, 16 (30 March 1951), p. 2. It is unhkely these 'legal measures' ever went beyond attorney's threats, though a progress report issued by the Foundation in August 1951 indicated that suit bad been filed against one individual wbo, althougb not a qualified auditor, was advertising courses in Dianetics, and giving the degree of Dianetic Auditor upon graduation. Reported in the Dianews, 1, Ig (December 195-), Pp. 6-7 4 hrSMH, p. 66. S Ibid..p. 124. 90 THIS CULT AND ITS TRANSFOrtlATlON esscntial therapeutic agent, Dirnetics stressed the recounting of incidents to the point where they were erased. he Dianetic auditor, unlike the psychoanalyst, never interpreted or eva]uated material, but only acknowledged it.l Hubbard's most important reaction to the crisis within Dianetics, however, was its abandonment, and the promulgation of Scientology as a separate system of beliefs and practices. It was around this ideological innovation that all other adaptations were based.2 As early as the Elizabeth Foundation, Hubbard bad found that pre-clears produced material which seemed to have no relation to their experienee in this life It appears that he briedy resisted the notion that this material emanated from past lives,3 but sbortly became reconciled to this view and began experimentation on the running of past-life engrams.4 It is not hard to see how a Convichon of past lives would develop out of Dianetic technique. Since the loeation of the basic-basic and its erasure would quickly result in clearing the case, it followed that if individuals were not cleared there mus necessarily be an earlier ineident to resolve.6 When pre-elears had returned to conception without elearing as a consequence, they began to produce material prior to conception of the 'sperm-dream' variety 6 When even this did not solvc the problem, some began recalling past deaths. Hubbard had also early noted the phenomenon of 'exteriorization',' buin Dianetics this was seen as a matter to be htmdled by releasing 'moments of painful emotion' before turning to the process of engram running.S In Scientology, extenonzation was a state to be sought. Both pastlnes and extenorization were predicated on the assumption of the 'thetan', the entity which could exteriorize from the body, the essential persistent individuality that formed the continuity between various past lives. I Donald H. Rogers 'Dianeties and psychoanalysis', Danetic Auditor's Bulletin, I, 8 (February rgSI). Hubbard later wrote a 'critique' of psychoanalysis along largely these lines, L. Ron Hubbard, 'A critique of psycho-analysis', Part One, ceTtainty 9 7 (rg62); Part Two Cerainty, 9, 8 (1962). : Dianetics again became part of the corpus of Scientological theory and practice after the return of the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation to Hubbard's control in late 1954. See p. 95 below. a Students of the Elizabeth Foundahon have claimed that the first person to 'run a past-life' was expelled from the course. I have been unable to verify this, although reference is also made to this story by George v1alko, Scientology, Ihe ,fow Religion (Dell Publishing Co, ew York, 970), p. j7, and certainly up to and including August 195: and the publication of Science of Surviual, Hubbard's public pronouncements on past-lives were extremely cautious. ' Winter, op. cit..p. 189 L. Ron Hubbard, Dianetics: (he Origina/ thesis, Scientology Publications Organization (Copenhagen, 91), p. 16. First published HDRF, Wichita, Kansas, 195 . ' Winter, op. cit..p 189. ' A dissociated state in which the individual believes himself to be outside his body It is a familiar synptom in psychiatry, and llas had an important role in oceult and religious eYperience as 'astral travel'. MSM, p. 256. Scientology ·vas a new revelation entirely transcending the limitations of Dianetics. While Dianetics had been a form of psychotherapy concerned with eradicating the limitations on the achievement of full human potential, Scientology was heralded as the 'Science of Certainty' concerned with rehabilitating the thetan to its full spiritual capacity. Wbile Hubbard's theory and techniques had been moving increasingly in this direction, it was not until his break with Purcell and the Wichita Foundation that Hubbard established Scientology in Phoenix, Arizona. Phoenix had a flourishing Dianetics community, organized under the auspices of the Psychological Research Foundation, and an independent auditing practice, which provided an immediate clientele on which Hubbard could draw. (As the Scientologv organization correctly point out, however, Hubbard's parents lived in Phoenix at this time. This may have influenced his decision to settle there briefly.) In Phoenix, Hubbard established the Hubbard Association of Scientologists (HAS), and a ,orlraal, which announced that he had discovered 'The source of life energy'l and the reason for the existence of matter, energy, space, time and thought 2 On the basis of his new revelation Hubbard sought to establish control over the Dianetics community. His publications roundlv attacked the Wichita Foundation which had continued to operate under Purcell's ownership. He hinted broadly that receipts from the sale of his books had found their way into private pockets (other than his own) rather than into furthering the purposes of the Foundation. It was asserted that the directors of the earlier Foundations had been motivated solely by a desire for profit.3 The Wichita Foundation was classed as an 'unauthorized' group and it was argued that rm A fnr nr f a Thc Wrchita Folmdation was the enormous change in Scientology in the last year and the great advance in its effectiveness...have rendered unimportant organisations which falsely o6fer certification in Dianetics or Scientology.' Purcell found it necessary to defend himself against the charge that he aimed to destroy Dianetics or Ron Hubbard, and that he had received half a million dollars from the American qedical Association to put the Foundation into bankruptcv S Hubbard appealed to the amateur following, seeking to secure its support ,ournul of Sclentology, 3G ( I gsz), p. n Z Ibid..p. 2 ournal of Scientoloy, 4G ( rgs2), p. I . Later Hubbard would refer to 'money mad millionnaires, crooked, dishonest and incompetent management . ..' Professionzl .luditor's Bulletin r (May rg53), p 1. ournal of Scientolog, gG (rg j2). c Letter from Don Purcell, he Donrus, r, z2 (3r May rgs2), p. r2. On the splil between Hubbard and the Wichita Foundation, sce also Helen O'Brien, Dianetics in Lirnbo (Whitmore Publisbing Co, Phiiadelphia, r 966), pp. 49 5 r . against the Wichita Foundation, placing many Dianeticists in a considerable dilemma: While the Foundation has not asked us to renounce Hubbard in order to work with the Foundation, Hubbard has irsisted that we follow only him and reject all others. If we do not do this, he replies by rejecting usP This appeal was supported by changes in organizational practice. Those who adopted ScientologicaL theory or techniques were at first urged to join the HAS, but by late rg,;4 more forceful methods were employed to secure support. Amateur groups were notified by the Hubbard Association of Scientologists International (to which the HAS had been changed) that: ...only a member...of the HASI or itr amliated organisations shall have the right to yossess and use the information of Scientology. As a result, a new policy for amateur groups was to be enforced. To qualify as amliated groups all group members were to hold HASI memberships nnd monthly reports of activihes were to be submitted to the HASI. Those groups which did not comply would be regarded as inactive and have their certificates revoked, and would become ineligible for Scientology materials. A simiLar policy was also applied to independent practitioners. A Committee of Examination, Certification and Services had been established by the HASI to secure conformity from practitioncrs. Practitioners who had manifesed a consistently independent line of thought were informed that their right to practice Dianetics and Scientology, and their cerhficates as professional auditors, were revoked.5 A former member of the Committee of Examination, Cerhfication and Services expressed the direction of policy at this time. A lot of other things came out, ideas and -ologies, and some people halted at the split and some...took off in their own direction. ..Ron was trying to get a codified procedure and a set of ethics...and a standard group activity...But this is pretty hard when there are people calling it psychology, or a guy is still being a psychologist, or a Rosicrucian, or a 'Mixologist'. We were trying to be a Scientologist, be a group...It was trying to define, to differentiate Scientology from other -ologies. This was the basic effort of that time and it did come out in revocation of certificates. These policies aroused protest from those sectors of the Dianetic community which had not followed Hubbard unquestioningly, and saw this as an attempt on Hubbard's part to secure a monopoly of Dianetics and Scientology,s and as authoritarian s 7heDanews, 1, r2 (31 May 1952), p. t. : Letter from HASI Group Secretary to Group Members, g October 1954. J Dianoes, 4, g7 (October 1954). nterview with former member of CECS. 'Poor Man's Psychitry', Dianotes, 4, 39 (December 1 g$4). r Bristol Dianehr Revirw, 3, 3 t (October 1954), pp. 1 70l Since his removal to Phoeni:c, Hubbard had sought to secure the support of some of the Dianetic newsletters and magazines, and through them, of the Dianetic commlmity. In a letter published in one of these newsletters he expressed his dissatisfaction with the factional state of Dianetics and Scientology: 'these splinter groups and copyists are holding back the entire movement of Dianetics and Scientology .'1 Only one of the many newsletters responded by adopting a totally Hubbardian line. The editor of 7h Glost of Scientolog)! attacked deviation from Hubbard's policy, and supported him in his attempt to gain control of the field: If you are not a Hubbardian Scientologist, then you are not a 'seientologist' at all, as Hubbard coined that word to fit HIS Science.t This publication attacked other newsletters which did not follow the same practice and individual practitioners who continued to adopt, sponsor, or promulgate non-Hubbardian theory and technique.3 Hubbard's own publications followed a similar practice, advocating the harassment of groups which appeared to be engaged in any activity remotely connected with Dianetics and Scientology, but not approved by the HASI: if you discovered that some group calling itself 'precept processing had set up and established a series of meetings in your area...you would do all you could to make things interesting for them. In view of the fact that the HASI holds copyrights for all sueh material...the least that eould be done...is the placement of a suit against them for using materials of scientology without authority...The purpose of the suit is to haras and discourage rather than to win. 1'hc law can bc osed very easily to harass, and enough harassment on somebody The law can be used very easily to harass, and enough haraisment on somebody wbo is simply on t'oe thin edge anyway, well knowing that he i9 not authorised, will generally be sufficient to cause his professional decease. if potSible, of course, ruin him utterly.g Independent newsletters were also threatened with legal action if they persisted in 'defaming' Scientology.5 It was suggested that one editor had practised fraud6 when he had earlier worked for the EIASI, and a detective agency was commissioned to investigate another editor 'to disclose any criminal past or connections.. .'7 An attempt was made to force organizations of independent practitioners to disband. The California Association of Dianetic Auditors, for example, was informed that its charters, certificates and permissions to employ Dianetics LetterfromL. RonHubbard, theGhostofScientoioy, IO (April-May Ig53),p 2. J theGhostofScientoloby, 11 (IsJune Ig53),p.4. Ibid. 1l (15 June 1953), pp lo, 15, 16; 14 (20 November 1953), pp. 5, 7; 17 (25June 1954) passim. : 'Di semination of matenal, Abilily lajor, 1, n.d. (late Igs4/early 1955), p. 7. 'Aberee [sic] you said it', Abiiity Minor, g, p. 3. 7 'Detective Hired', Ibid..p. 1l; Blistoi Dinetic JieDiew, 4, g7 (April 1955), p. 6; he abertee, 1, 6 (Oetober 1954), p. Ig; the Abaee, 1, 7 (November 1954), p. 1. were withdrawn.l Since it was an independent corporation, however, its members declined to disband and refused to observe the requirement of the HASI that all CADA members also become members of the HASI.r Hubbard sought to move Scientology away from the amateur practitioner basis of Dianetics. Group processing had been extensively promoted during 1954, but an increasing distinction was emerging between the certified auditor and the ordinary rnember The latter was permitted only limmted access to information. Trainh g became a prerequisite for access to advanced matenais.5 Advanced training and certification were centralized in the HASI and its associate schools, and an attempt was made to require practising auditors to contract to pay a percentage of their fees to the HASI, and to sign promissory notes for 55000 as a bond of good behaviour.4 This attempt to control practitioners met with little success and the policy was abandoned.5 While Hubbard sought to exert control over practitioners and other followers in the field, he also t!ghtened controi over his central organization, dismissing officers who failed to perform precisely in accordance with his requirements.5 Executive officers in Hubbard's organizations typically enjoyed only brief tenure-in office. In 19J4 dnring an absence in ngland, for example, Hubbard directed the leaders o;his Philadelphia Associate School to move the HASI from Phoenix to Philadelphia; fire various officers; and hghten up control on the flow of information to members of suspect loyalty. On his return from America, in the face of a barrage of protest from followers against the actions of his Philadelpbia lieutenants, Hubbard disclaimed all responsibility for the actions they had talten and expelled them £om office.7 Hubbard progressively gained complete control over Scientology, its membership, ideology, practices and organizations. The development of those sectors of the Dianetics movement which did not follow Hubbard was very different. The Wichita Foundation continued to operate after Hubbard's departure, but its membership and clientele declined rapidly in the absence of Hubbard. By 1 954 the active membership of the Foundation was down to l r 2 . While originally aiming to remain within the field of Dianetics, new theories and techniques were developed at the Foundation, leading to an increasing diffuseness of its ideological base and a decline in the immediacy of its appeal.i Don Purcell had become disillusioned with Dianetics, and increasingly interested in a new development produced by one of the HDRF members, 'Synergetics': I Ability Major, u, n.d. (early 1955). t Dunbrr'sARC (1 l April 1955), p..Disseminatmn of material', Ability Mejor, I, p. m . : the aberree, 3, 1 (April 1955), p. 9. 5 interview wlth former members of CECS. ' Letter from Reg Gould, e-director, HAS London . ..the Ghost oJ Scientolog, (January 1954), p 1l. 7 Imerviews Also see Helen O'Brien, op. cit..pp. 68 77. · Dienrtics roey 3, 7 (July 1954). In synergetics Art Couher has created a new scientific approach to the solution to the problem we are dealine with. Synergetics includes much that is included in dianetics and a great deal that is not.l Late in 1954, Purcell announced that he would support Dianetics no longer, but would devote his resources in future to Coulter's Synergetics. After tahng a 'straw voe' among the membership concerning disposal of the Wichita Foundation, Purcell advised Hubbard that he would hand over to him the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation whose principal assets were the copyrights to sl/S..and a mailing list. Hubbard accepted gladly, and announced that 'the entire and complete control without contest of Dianetics, as well as Scientology...' was vested in the HASI 2 It was undoubtedly the return of Dianetics to Hubbard's control which led to the more rigorous attempts to end fringe practices, exclude practitioners who compounded Dianetics or Scientology with other practices, and force critical newsletters to cease publication. Some of the remaining amateur groups and newsletters allied themselves with one of the leaders who had emerged from the Dianetic community to found their own InstitutesCoulter's Synergetics, Howes' Humanics, Welgos' Institute of Integration.3 Others moved toward an increasingly eclectic position, or shifted their ideological loyalties to other systems of thought. Minneapolis Dianetics Inc and the Minnesota Scientology Council, for example, had united in 1954 as a result of the reuniting of Dianetics and Scientology in Hubbard s hands. By 1955, however, they had split again because of conflict between the two groups. The Dianetic group which controlled the newsletter, / he Dianotes, moved under the auspices of the Institute of Humanics. It later pnnted an increasing number of articles promoting the practice of Yoga. Another prominent newsletter, ·the qtierree, moved progressively further from Dianetics and Scientology, becoming after 1956 an open forum in which followers of any cultic belief could present their ideas. During the following years articles appeared on astrology, atlantis, Totology, Yoga, ew Thought, mystic Christiamty, hypnosis, numerology, Subud, etc. By 1961 it bad become a general occult-metaphysical magazine with only one small article on Dianetics in its July-August issue. The founder of E-Therapy, A. L. Kitselman, attempted to found an eclectic colony devoted to self-improvement: ...the Pyramid Lake Project is a resort-community specialising in the human mind and its functions. I Don G. Purcell, 'Special Announcement', Dinnetios oday, 3, m (October 1954) "Dianetics and Scientology organisations united again', Grop JewsleUer (September 1954) S Only Synergetics and E-Therapy appear to have survived through the 19505, and Synergehcs disappeared early in the 19605. ' See Dlanotes, volume 4, nos 47 (August 195s), 48 (September 1955); and volumc 5, nos 5t (December 1955), 52 (January 956), etc. The Projeet was started on October Ist of 1956 by A. L. Kitselman, developer of a form of lay psychotherapy known as 'E-Therapy'. It was Kitselman's wish, however, to establish a project not dominated by any one man or doetrine, and, accordingly, the Pyramid Lake Project is being used by many persons who have little interest in E-Therapy. Now that the Project has completed its first year there is nothing spectacular to report. The enterprise is slowly growing in size, and persons who are strongly interested in self-improvement are becoming permanent residents at Pyramid Lake. Others visit the Projeet regularly whenever free to do soP The project shortly failed, however, although Kitselman continues to write on, and practice, E-Therapy and appears to have a small, unorganized Eollowing.2 Only scattered individuals remain in the United States who maintain a loyalty to early Dianetics. As far as I can ascertain there are now no full-time Dianetic practitioners in America practising only the Dianetics of the early years. Only one independent organization remains to foster the practice of traditional Dianetics, the California Association of Dianetic Auditors, with a persistently declining membership. In England, after the establishment of the Dianetic Association Ltd, and thc Dianetic Federation of Great Britain, as loose national organizations to facilitate communication betv een Dianetic groups, and between them and the American organizations, Hubbard announced that hc would visit England, and proposed the establishment of a Hubbard Dianetic Foundation in Great Britain as a subsidiary of the HAS. Some leading British Dianeticists favoured the establishment of a Foundation but felt that his 'proposal re control would not necessarily be acceptable to all British Dianeticists'.3 Hubbard was not prepared to accept the attempts by some British Dianetics leaders to limit his authority He approached a Dianeticist outside the leadership echelons of the movement and asked her to establish a Hubbard Association of Scientologists in Britain, as a profit rather than non-profit corporation, and under his complete control. As he made clear in his letters to her, he blamed the failure of the Dianetic Foundations on the fact that he lacked complete control over them, and had no desire for members or co-directors with voting rights in Scientology organizationS He saw no virtues in the factional independent groups around which Dianetics was organized in Britain and sought to establish a strong central organizatiOn which would eliminate them.4 The HAS vas established in London When Hubbard made his first visit to England in late 952 groups rapidly flocked to affiliate with the HAS, and independent Dianetics AnonymousmimeosbeetNewsfrompyramidLakec :957. 'Amonghiswntingsare,forexample:A.L.Kitselman, HelloStuid! (Translator's Press, La Jolla, California, 1962); E-ther:y (Institute of Integration, New 'ork, 1953); What ntegraton is About (Inshtute of Integration, La Jolla, California, 1960) . ' British dianetics the present position', icentre: Bullehn of the Dianetie Federation of Gre:t Britain, z (September 1952), p 1. L Ron Hubbard, Letters to -D-, August-September 1952. groups almost cntirely disappeared. The last remaining independent group finally disbanded and ceased pubhcation of its newsletter in 1955l in the face of increasing hostility from the HAS.s The personal paths of those involved in Dianetics during the early rgSOs provided the pattern for the development of the groups, organizations, and publications. It is not possible to calculate how many of the initial following remained with Hubbard during the transihon to Scientology. A number experienced no difficulty in making this transition. Some do not seem to have noticed any major change: I wasn't too aware of that [the transition from Dianetics to Seientology]...I went to Phoenix with the idea that I was going to study Dianetics, but when I came there they gave us some Dianetics and then it was already Scientology and I just couldn't see too terrible big a difference behveen Dianetics and Scientology. It all dealt with communicatioDs and getting a person to trace back his experiences. I wasn't unhappy about that [thc notion of past ]ives as a matter of fact I am very fascinated with it....I found it very absorbing.t Some lost interest as their own problems seemed to be resolved; as a result of domestic or occupational pressures on their time; as a result of alienation from Hubbard's progressively more overtly metaphysical pronouncements; or through some combination of these factors. Others left from hoshlity to Hubbard's organizational changes. Among the early Dianeticists from whom interviews were obtained, many ol those who objected to what they thought was a developing authoritarianism ir Hubbard's organization, passed on from Dianehcs to other forms of culti belief: We did a period of research wim something connected with something they do in California, and also other typei of Dianetic teehniques. Benefit came when we went on to study Ouspensky e GurdjieE We became interested in Indian stutf, Hindu and meditations. We've been interested in meditative techniques. I find meditation of tremendous benefit. I've gone on to Krishnamurti...I personally consider I've reached the end with Krishnamurti because the things he teaches are so true to life...so concrete...I'd come across Krishnamurti before Dianetics and found him very difficult to underztand, but after Dianetirs I really began appreciating him.: Some continued the practice of early Dianetics, paying little or no attention to Hubbard's later developments, although introducing modifications of their own. A number of others made a point of indicating to me that they had later joined MNSA.s Bristol Dicneht Reuiew, 4, 40 (August-September 1955). ristol Divnelit Review, 3, 27 (June rg54); 3, 32 (November 1954). S Interview: Amencan Dianeticist. l Interview: English Dianeticist. 5 While MrNsA is not a self-improvement organization it seems to have a clear status-conferring and ego-enhancing function for individuals who are convinced they In titutionalfregility and the strategy of settarianization The origins and early development of Dianetics bear a close resemblance to those of a number of other cultic movements. Mary Baker Eddy claimed a new revelation which led her o move away from the ideas of Phineas P. Quimby which she had earlier taught under the name Moral Science. Aspects of the healing practice most closely associated with Quimby, such as manual manipulation of the patient's bead, were dropped, and new doctrines such as that of malicious animal magnetism and a radically idealist metaphvsics were introduced. Mrs Eddy's developing system drew heavily on Quimby's work as well as owing a lesser debt to other currents of thought then prevalent in lew England: Transcendentalism, Swedenborgianism and spiritualism.l Wben faced by challenges to her authority both from members of her Church, and from former student who had established their own Institute and Colleges and had begun developing new ideas of theory and practice, or combining Christian Science with Theosophy or even orthodo.Y medical practice, Mrs Eddy dissolved or suspended the operation of the movement's organization. In their place she erected thc highly centralized Mother Church, administered through a personally appointed bureaucracy. She drastically reduced the authority of local leaders by limiting their duration of office; of teachers by permitting them to teach only the preliminary levels of doctrine and by rcstricting the frequency of their classes; and of practitioners by mahng their continued practice depend on their good standing with the central organization. Mcmbers were forbidden to join more than a limited range of voluntary Members were forbidden to join more than a limited range of voluntary associations; constrained from seeking medical assistance or advice; and forbidden to read other occult or metaphysical literature. Mrs Eddy's preoccupation with the induence of maliciouS animal magnetism sensihzed her followers to the dangers of the world outside the safety of the Church S Bryan R. Wilson, 'The Origins of Chrutian Scienee: a survey', the Hibbtrt 70urnat, 57 (1959), pp. 161-70. s Roy Wallis, 'Ideology, authoritY and the development of culic movements', Sociat cscarch, 4r, 2 (1974), pp. 299-327. Roy Wallis, 'A comparative analysis of problems and processes of change in two manipulationist movements: Christian Science and Scientology', in the Contempoavy Metamorphosis of letigion? Ch of the r2th International Conference on the Sociology of Religion (The Hague, Netherlands, 1973), pp. 407-22; Ernest S. Bates and John V. Dittemore, .Uary Baker Eddy: thc rruth and rhc rradition (George Routledge & Sons, London, 1933); Edwin Franden Dakin, Mrs Eddy: the Biography of a Virginal .:.find (Charles Scnbner's & Sons, London 1929); Charles S. Braden, Chistain Sience roday (Southern Methodist University Press, Dallas, TeYas, 1958); Bryan R. Wilson, Sects and Soeiety (Heinemann, London, 1961). have greater capabilities than their other status attributes would suggest. It provides a conviction of hidden powers, talents and abilihes for individuals who lack clear sourcrs of such conviction in their other achievements It perhaps provides a functional alter- native for those ·who sought psychological and social improvement through Dianetics. Science teaching Its founders, Gharles and Myrtle Fillmore appear to havc been active in the cultic milieu of Kansas City. Charles Fillmore had been a follower of spiritualism for many years and had a clear acquaintance with various metaphvsical schools, as well as having contact with a number of Christian Science schismatics and teachers in the emerging New Thought movement. The sources of Unity teaching have been traced in Nev Fngland Transcendentalism, Theosophy, Christian Science, spintualism, and New Thought.l The movement was organized pnmarily through the medium of a number of magazines produced by the Fillmores. ihile early editions of their magazines exhibited an eclectic orientation, containing articles on Christian Science, Theosophy, spiritualism and Rosicrucianism, they progressively movcd toward a more rigid and intolerant editorial policy, and a less open doctrinal system. Flements dcrived trom Christian Science and the New Thought Movement bccame more prominent, although Unity was disting ushed from these movements by the extent to which it incorporated fcatures of traditional Christian doctrine. Unity broke with the loose International New Thought Alliance because of the 'open-platform' policv ot' that bodv, which permitted lecturers rom all affiliaed groups to lecture at centres of other members. The Fillmorcs began to resent this freedom to present ideas at vanance with their own at Unity centres, particularly when they discovered that in some centres teachers were holding spiritualist seances and practising numerology.t A 'Statcment of I'aith' W1.3 drawn np, to which followcrs werc required to subscribc, mld grcatcr controls ovcr millisers and centrc Icadcrs implcmcntcd. A 'Statement of Faith' was draun up, to which followers were required to subscribe, and greater controls over ministers and centre leaders implemented. Formerly autonomous centres were required to use texthooks and other literature published by the central organization, and to eliminate all literature and teachings not approved by the leadership.3 Dianetics, Christian Science and Unity illustrate in their early years the problem of institutional fragility faced by the leaders of cultic movements. Their belief-systems were precarious in that thev were liable to selective acceptance and synthesis by seekers recruited often from other cultic groups. Authority within the movement was open to challenge by practitioners, teachers and leaders of local followings. The commitment of members was limited because the doctrine and practice offered was not seen as having anv unique salvational efficacy, and hence the loyalty of members was often shared with other groups and practices. James Teener, 'Unity School of Ghristianity', Unpublished Phr) dissertation, J. Shllson udag, 7 k Hislory ard Philosohy oJhe .fetallys)cal lforemer5 ir .merica (Westminster Press, Philadelphia, 1967), p. z44. Roy Wallis, 'Ideoloy, authority and the development of cultic mosements', op. 100 THE CULT AND ITS TRANSFORMATION These features of cultic movements provide a set of environmental and structural contingencies with hich the movement leadership i5 faced. They pose a threat to the persistence of the collectivity. In the face of such a threat, a strategy of sectarianizatiOn, the arrogation and centralization of authority and control, appears to have had a considerable appeal to cult leaders. If successfully implemented as in the cases of Dianehcs, Christian Science, and Unity such a strategy may result in the emergence of a distinct ideology which only the leadership may interpret or ctend; a reduction in the autonomy of members and prachtioners; and the emergence of a stable and cohesive collectivity organized around the leader. 4. THEORY AND ITS TRANSMISSION Several million words have been written on the heory and practice of Scientology, for the most part by Hubbard himself. While the basis of the theory has changed relatively little since 1952, the techniques employed to secure the ends specified by the theory have changed frequently as one thing after another was tried in an effort to find the set of techniques which would routinely achieve these ends. A full account of the theory and practise of Scientology and their vicissitudes over the past twentv-two years or so would be tiresome and unenlightening, perhaps even to the committed adherent. Moreover, much of the matenal to provide such an account consists of confidential documents and tape-recordings available only to the thoroughly initiated. However, published materials do permmt the presentation of an outline of the theory of Scientolog and a description of some of the techniques that have been prominently employed It is hoped that the following account will convey the 'flavour' of both practic and doctrine, although it must necessarily fall short of being a complete set o recipes for the attainment of the state of 'Operating Thetan'. Cos7nologic Cos?lologictt The theory and practice of Scientology is underpinned by a eosmology. Hubbard's notion of 'theta' began life as 'thought' or as an impersonal life-force, but became in the course of several re-workings an animate entity, the 'thetan'. The thetan according to Hubbard is A Static with the ability to eonsider, postulate, and have opinions, that has, through postulates and considerations, developed a differentiation from the static theta. The thetan is me 'I' the individual that force, not a part of the physical universe, which is direeting the organismB The thetan is immortal. 'omniscient and omnipotent'.t the true self of each individual, which has ecisted since before the beginning of matter, energy, space, L. Ron Hubbard, 'the Creation of Humon Abiiity (Scientology Publications, London, ), p. 286. 2 Robert H. Thomas, Guardian of the Church of Scientology in the l;SA, quoted in Omar V. Garrison, 'the Hdden Story of ScientoloFy (Arlington Books, London, 1974), P-53 104 TtlE SECT: SCIE:'ITOLOGY and time. These latter are merely the creations of thetans bored with their existence. 'Life' Hubbard assures us, 'is a game'.1 To enliven the game, thetans permitted limitations upon their abilities They began to create matter, energy, space, and time (MEST), to form universes and worlds with which, and in which, they could play. These worlds might take any varietv of forms, but gradually the thetans became increasingly attracted by the universes they had creatcd. ProgTessively they became absorbed into the games they were playing, permitting further limitation of their abilities, imposing limitations upon other thetans, forgetting their spiritual nature, and becoming more dependent upon the matenal universes that they had created. While the MEST universe began as the postulation of thetans it gradually acquired an overwhelming sense of reality. The thetans became so enmeshed in thcir creation they forgot their origins and true status, lost the ability to mobilize their spiritual capacities, and came to believe that they v ere no more than the bodies they inhabited.S Hubbard therefore claims that each thetan has taken on many millions ot MEST bodies dunng the tnllions of years of its e tistence. During this time it has been subjected to many traumas, such as the loss (through death) of the MEST body with which it has come to identify itself entirely; attacks by other thetans or other life forms (in which 'implants' are received); and the psychic damage to itself which accrues when the thetan, or the body which it w-as inhabiting, harmed or sought to control another. 'lhe techniques of Scicntology aim to harmed or sought to control another. The techniques of Scientology aim to restore to the thetan his original capabilities: Almost the entiretv of Scientology consists of the discovery and refinement of methodr whereby the Thetan can be persuaded to reinquish his self-imposed limitations.a Having relinquished them, the individual achieves the state of 'Operating Thetan', a state, the exalted nature of which, is indicated by the following: Operating Thetan has not before been known as a state of being on Earth. Neither Lord Buddha nor Jesus Christ were OTs according to the evidence. They were just a shade above Cleal.' The methods emploed in the process of achienng the states of clear and OT, have taken a number of forms, Incidents on the whole track' or the recordings of events possessed in the forrn of 'facsimmles' or mental image pictures by each thetan, may be 'run' (that is, audited or processed) as engrams. Have 'rOu Lived Before his Life? is a collection L Ron Hubbard, Seientoloy 8-8aoe3 (Hubbard College of Scientology, East Grinstead, Sussex, 1967), p. m7. Christopher Evans, Cults of Unrezson (Harrap, London, 1973), pp. 43-5; Cyril Vosper, The hrind Benders (Neville Spearman, London, 1971), pp. Z8-31; Garrison, op. cit..pp. 49-s3 3 Vosper, op. cit.. p. 31. Ability, 81 [c 1959], p. 6. of reports by auditors and pre-clears of the processhsg of whole-track (or past-life) engrams. For e:cample: Scientolrir's e,bort Located the incident with the command 'Have you ever died?' The F-meter needle dropped. 'Was it more than mo years ago?' ,eedle dropped..Carried on like this and finally located it at ss,ooo,ooo,ooo,ooo,ooo,ooo years ago.. . 'Be in that incident'. 'Whrt part of that incident can you confront?' and we were away. First picture that came was of the sea, great deal of unreality but by discussion and conbnuing the question 'What part of tha incident can you confront?' various other pictures and sensations uncovered which eventually added up to a section of the incident concerning a giant Manta Ray type of acquauc creature which the preclear had seen while underwater... the engram started on [a] spaeeship. The ship had needed an outside repair. On going outside, the preclear had been hit bv a meteorite particle which had not punctured the suit. At this point an acute pain undt r the arr . where the meteor had struck, occurred. The Pc clambers back into the space-ship. Later the atomic engines of the ship break down and the Pc has to repair these and apparently receives radio-acti-e burns. He finds that he has to leave the ship and so falls from a ladder into the sea where he encounters the Manta Ray.l ...Pc, after a period of 440 years without a body, arrives in error on a planet which ir being taken over by 'Black Magic' operators who are very low on the ethical scale and using electronics for evil purposes. HaviDg come originally from a 'good' plane he battles for a long, long time againSt the forces of 'blaek magic', which, like a mfth column, are subverting the originally 'white magic' populace. It is a losing battle, implant after implant gradually weakening his ability and control by causing hallucinated perception..Eventually after a period of spiritual torment and grief he abandons his former high goals and goes over to the 'Black Magic' faction, not having entirely given up the idea of outwitting it from within. This occurs some 74,ooo years after his first arrival on this planet. He now goes to another planet by space ship. A deeeption is accomplished by hypnosis and pleasure implants (rather like opium in their effects) whereby he is dece-ved into a love affair with a robot decked out as a beautiful red-haired girl who receives all his confidences for a period of 30 vears [EtC.t The other incidents reported in this work range across lives as a supporter of the Pretender after the '45, a Tibetan nobleman in the sitteenth century, the captain of a space-ship, a space pilot with a robot body over a million years ago, etc. I L. Ron Hubbard, leue rOu Liurd Before r/is Life?, A Scirntiic Suruey (The Department of Publications World Wide [Church of Scientology, East Grinstead], 1968), PP 53-4 2 Ibidpp. 156-7 TIE SECT: SClEtTOLOCY Running past-life incidents as engrams is not, however, typical of contemporary Scientology technique. Un ike Dianehcs, Scientology does not seek to crase the causeS of limitadons on the individual's full capacity, since with the development of the belief in the whole-track, this would be far too lengthy and arduous a process. The aim of Scientology is therefore to free the thetan from the limitations of vlEST and the control of the facsimiles be has rccorded, and to increase his awarencS5 of his spiritual capacities to such an extent that he becomes the cause and not merely the effect of his environment and his life (and of course, his past lives) I Centrol therles in Scientoogice theory While Scienological theory is underpinned by a cosmology and extensive metaphysics little of this is initially transmitted to the following in an overtly dogmatic fashion. There is a recognition that the theorv of the origins of the universe and the space-operatic scenarios of some of the more distant past-lives may have very little reality' for some adherents. These aspects of the ideology are referred to as 'para-Scientology', a category variously defined for example: that large bin which includcs all greater or lesser uncertainties. Here are the questionable things, the things of which the common normal observer cannot be sure wlth a little study...Some of the classified bodies of data which fall in ParaScientology are: Dianetics, incidents on the whole-track', the immortality of \Ian, Scientology are: Dianetics, incidents on the 'whole-track', the immortality of Man, the existence of God, engrams containing pain and unconsciousness and yet all perceptlon, pre-natals, clears, character, and many other things which, even when closely and munutely observed, still are not certain things to those who observe them. Such things have relative trum. [..] Also under the heading of Para-Scientology one would place such things as past- lives, mysterious induenees, astrology, mysticism, religion, psychiatry, nuclear physics and any other science based on theoryd The para-Scientological is held not to be required belief, and indeed Hubbard has frequently expressed the view that new followers or potential converts should not be exposed to it at too early a stage. 'Talking whole track to raw meat is frowned upon, Nov, in talking to a group, steer off from para-Scientology. Lay off the whole traek stuff, huh?Layofflhefantastic.lfyouhavesomechaparoundwhoinsistsontellin people about these thmgs, just note him down; he isn't working for us, fellahs. Th quickest way to lose a beset peson or group is to load him down with phenomena Talk, instead, abot I the fact that there is a spiritual side to Man. Talk about th fact that Scientology solves social problems, When they are very initiate and it's a I L. Ron Hubbard, Dianehrs 55! (Department of Publications World Wide, Eat Grinstead, 968) p. 18. S L Ron Hubbard, the Creation of urlan Abiliy (Scientology Publications, Londor ), pp. 188 9. in good fun rnd they've also got theh HPA or HCA, do what you like with the whole track. Or use it in private sessions. Don't hand it out to the public ra-v. Ids too strong ' This policy is also redected in the relative dearth of published information on this aspect of Scientological belief. Past-lives are discussed in only three of the movement's books in any detail, and there is no systematic account of the cosmological doctrine in any publicly available documents. Most published work deals with those aspects of the doctrine which have practical relevance, and it is to these that Scientologists themselves seem to havt strongest commitment. i\Iany of these derive directly from earlier Dianetic practice. The notion of ARC and the tone-scale, for example, were carried over into Scientology with only minor modification. With the transition to Scientology, hov-ever, a number of new elements were added or differently stressed. While exteriorization' had been seen as a state in need of remedy in Dianetics, it was now seen as a state to be aimed for: The usual residence of the thetan is in the skull or near the body. A thetan can be in one of four conditions. The first would be entirely separate from a body or bodies, or even from this universe. The second would be near a body and knowingly controll- ing the body. The third would be in the body (the skull) and the fourth would be an inverted cPndition whereby he is compussively away from the body and cannot approach it....one of the many goals of procersing in Scientology is to 'exteriorise' the individual ald place him in the second condition above, since it has beeP discovered that he is happier and more capable when io situated 8 Recovering the thetan's ability 'to confront' his environment is also an important goal. That which a person can confront he can handle. The first step of handling anything is gaining an ability to face it.3 Problems start with an inability to confront anything. Not eonfronting things one has done leaves one 'in mystery' about them and subject to their impact Being able 'to confront', to face up to, and take responsibility for, things one has done would erase their power. One might illustrate this as follows: a man who causes an accident which injures others might repress his part in the incident and in his future interactions with these others behave in an aberrated fashion for example, attacking them for their clumsiness and causing further trauma out of fear of being found out. Were he able to confront IL RonHubbardPofessionalAuditorsBulretin,Sl (t6Septemberrgss),p 2. : L. Ron Hubbard, 'The Funlamentals of 7 hought (The Publications Organisation World Wide, Edinburgh, tg68), pp. 57-8. t L. Ron Hubbard, Srienolog A .Stew Slant on Life (The American St Hill Organisation, Los Angeles, California, 196s), p. 85 9 Ibid. his part in the incident and take responsibility for it, the situation might improve rather than continue to deteriorate. The theory of 'confionting' has a number of ramifications. In this life and in past lives we have all performed a number of 'overt acts'.5 Generally we justify such acts by means of a 'motivator'S and they become 'withholds'.3 Having withholds against some person or group leads to guilt and fear about being found out which in tt rn leads one to perform further overt acts against them. It is by means of this theory that Scientologists explain attacks upon them by press, politicians, doctors, and psychiatrists, and other ' enemies' of Scientology. I The notion of the w.thhold became parhcularly prominent in the practice of 'Sec thecking'.5 A further fundamental concept in Scientology theory is that of communication. The individual spends most of his time out of communication with his environment (out of present time). He is held at some point on the 'time-track' as a result of trauma or '. isemotion' and lives out his present involvements from a point of view in the past. Scientology aims therefore to bring the individual 'up to present time'. When we say that scmebody should be in present time we mean that he should be in communication with his environment. We mean further that he should be in communication with his snvironment as it exists not as it existed.' Many psychosomatic ailments are held to be the result of the individual, the thetan, beihg out of communication with a particular part of his body, and living, in relation to that body part, at some point in the past when it suffered pain. Tecbniques have been developed which seek to bring him into communication in present time with that body part.7 mumcanon Wlth hlS envuonment as it exu ts, not as it existed.5 I 'OVERT ACT (Overt): Harmful or contra-survival act. Preeisely, it is an act of commisslon or omission that harms the greater number of dynamics', Anonymous, Scientology Abridged Dictionary (Scientology Publications Organization, Copenhagen, 970- Z'The consideration and dramatisation that one has been wronged by the action of another or a group, and which is charactensed by constant complaint with no real action undertaken to resolve the situation'. Ibid. 'WITHHOLD: Undisclosed contra-survival act; a no action after the fact of action, in which the individual has done or been an accessory to doing something which is a transgression against some moral or ethical code consisting of agreements to which the individual has subscribed in order to guarantee, with others, the survival oi a group with which he is coachng or has coacted towards survival'. Ibid. See Chapter 8, below. 5 For the practice of 'Sec Chechng', see Chapter 5, below; Paulette Cooper, h9 Scandal of Scisntology (Tower, New York, 1971), pp. 85-92. 9 L. Ron Hubbard, Dianstics 55! (The Department of Publicahons World Wide East Grmstead, 1968), p. 62. These techniques of an informal kind are known as 'assists, on which see L. Ror Hubbard, Jr.. George Richnrd Haipern and Jan Halpern (compilers), CC Preara Improving the individual's ability to communicate therefore improves his ability to handle his body and his environment, bringing him to present time, and releasing him from points on the time track at which he has become stuck. Improving communication therefore means improving the individual's abilities in general. The notion of control is important in Scientology theory. The thetan has permitted itself to become 'an effect' of the universe. It has allowed itself to believe that it has no spiritua powers and that it is merely the body it inhabits. Having denied its spiritual powers it has become prey to its creation, suffering the traumas and injuries of its bodies, the guilt and fear of its overt acts, reacting tc. its environment on a stimulus response basis, obsessively holding on to MEST and facsimilcs out of confusion and insecurity. One aim of Scientology processing is therefore to increase the thetan's ability to control the body it inhabits and its environment, to be willing to have and 'not-have' MEST, postulates, facsimiles, etc. That is, to overcome the stimulus-response reaction and increase the self-determinism of the thetan; to restore its ability to be 'at cause' over its environment. CLEAR: (noun) A thetan who can be at cause knowingly and at will over mental mattcr, energy, space and time as regards the First Dynamic (survival for self).l O.T. (Operating Thetan': A Clear who has been familiarised with his environment to a point of total cause over matter, energy, space, time and thought, and whr ls not in a body.' The final aspect of the theory of Scientology whmch I wish to discuss is that of its metatheoretic assumptions. Hubbard has defined Scientology in a variety of ways. In his early formulations, he stressed the scientific status of the enterprise. Scientology is defined as the science of kmowing how to know.a Hubbard developed the principle that in contrast to the fields generally termed 'sciences' which were full of 'maybes' Scientology was 'the science of certainty'. You aren't a scientist, and you don't have to be wishy washy and indefinite about what you say.5 Scientology was the study of knowledge, dealing in 'stable data'. 'Knowledge is certainty'5 and moreover 'Certainty is saniZy'.7 This conception of what issued Anonymous, Scientology Aoridged Dictionay, o p. cit. ' Ibid. ' L. Ron Hubbard, Scientolog 800ed, znd edn (HASI, London, :gj3), p. 5. ' ournal of Scientology 166, n.d. 5 Professional Auditor's Buaetin, r6 (September rgS5) p. 3. ' L. Ron Hubbard, 'The three universes, Certainty, unnumbered issue, n.d. (transcription of a lecture delivered by Hubbard at Birmingham Town Hall in 1953), p. 5. 7 Ibld..p 4. tory .Iqanualfor dDanced Students in Scientolog (The Academy of Scientology, [Washington DC], 1957), pp. 30 45110 TIE SECT: SCIENTOLOCY from the mouth of Hubbard as certain knowledge seems to stand in contradiction to the distinction drawn elsewhere between Scientology and para-Scientology, and the principle often quoted to show the non-dogmatic nature of the movement, that 'If it's trle for you, then it's true.' Since Hubbard's science is a matter of knowledge and certainty, certainty is sanity, and reality is agreement, it would seem to follo-v that those who decline to agree with Hubbard's conception of ·what COnStilutes knowledge are out of touch with reality; and that those who reserve their judtement, or who retain some uncertainty as to the truth of his claims, are insane. This impression is strengthened elsewhere. In his volume Sciertooey t-o, for example, Hubbard argues: Ncither you nor a prtclear need accept 'whole track' or the identity of the thetan as described fully in Wt o tdit. Not to begin. You'll very rapidly make up your own mind about it when vou start to process 'Black and Wbite' I As for 'whole track' and thetans, I wouldn't dare say n word if 'Black and White' didn't show them up with alarming velocity.S In the same volume Hubbard provides a technique 'to separate the preclear from bodies and discover rohy he thinks he is only the current body...13 and in one of his recorded lectures he states: Those who do not believe in past lives do not have to believe in past lives...bm don't get audited !4 There can, therefore, be no doubt about how Hubbard intended bis followers to make up their own minds. Inutnces on Scientoloiv theory A number of sourcethave been suggested for aspects of Hubbard's theory and presentation. George alko suggests that Hubbard may have found some inspirahon in an early work by R. Buckminster Fuller, called Jint Chains to the Moon. Apart from one passage in which Fuller argues that 'the sum-total of human desire to survve is dominant over the sum-total of the impulse to destroy' . and his propensity to utilie upper-case type for emphasis, I can discover nG convincing links behreen the work of Fuller and that of Hubbard.; Dr A. L. Ron Hubbard Scientology 8-ho (The Distribution Center, Silver Springs aryland, 195Z), p. 2t. 2 Ibid. ' Ibid..p 31. 4 L. Ron Hubbard, 'The skills of clearing', Leeture 2 of the Lectures on Clearing London Congress, 1958 (Hubbard Communications Office, London, 1958. R. Buckminster Buller, Vine Chains to the oon (Southern Illinois l.niversitv Press, rg38); George alko Scienology: the Vow Religiol (Dell Publishing Co..New York, 1970), pp. I l9-21. IIEOEY ND ITS TUNSMISSIUN ...Nordenholz, whom Malko rlso suggests as an important influence on Hubbard, secms an initially more plausible candidate. Nordenholz, in a thoroughly opaque work of philosophical speculation published in 1 934,1 presents the notion of 'scientology' as a science of knowledge to be developed on the basis of a set of axioms. Apart from the name of the 'science', its concern with knowledge and how to grasp it, and the idea of erect ing a set of axioms as the basic formulation of the science, it is not evident that ordenholz provided much that became incorporated into Hubbard's Scientology.a It has also been suggested that Hubbard secured some of the material incorporated into Scientolo y fromJack Parsons, a follovver of Aleister Crowley and briefly the head of a Lodge of Crowley's Ordo Templi Orientis in Pasadena.3 That Hubbard was associated with Parsons early in 1946 is not in doubt, although a press release issued by the Church of Scientology after the appear- ance of Alexander Mitchell's article offers a different interpretation of the facts, ' claiming that he was sent to live with Parsons by 'certain agencies [wbicb] objected to nuclear physicists being housed under the same roof'.5 There is no evidence that Hubbard's system of Scientology owes any gTeat debt to that of Crowley, Parsons or the O.T.O. Indeed none of the four members of Crowley's order whom I have contacted in 13ngland and America has been able to confirm ' A. Nordenholz, Saentologle, Wissenschaft uon der seschaJenheit und Der rauglich,teit des IVissens (Ernest ReinhardE Munich, 1934). It i also a mvtterv how ubbard could have come into contact with Nordenbclz's I A. Nordenholz, Saentologie Wissenschaft von der Beschaf enheit und Der rauglicheit des Wissens (Ernest Reinhardt, Munich, 1934). ' It is also a mystery how Hubbard could have come into contact with Nordenholz's work. Hubbard did not, as far as I have been able to discover, read German, nor have I been able to locate a translation of this hook by Nordenholz prior to the version produced by a former Scientologist in 1968 (A. Nordenholz, Scientologie rg3.f, trans. Woodward R. McPheeter, Causation Press, Lucerne Valley, California, 1968). It is on the basis of this translation that Malko suggests Hubbard was indebted to Norden- holz (Malko, op. cit..pp. m6 19) but McPheeters was a Scientologist of many years standing who left the movement for a schismatic offshoot, and in an atmosphere of mutual hostility. It is at least a porsibility that this may have induenced the trsnsla- tion. An independent translation which I commissioned, of some pages from the original, seems to bear this out. The possible parallels with Hubbardian formulations are very much less evident. 9 Although he does not refer to Hubbard by name, I think there can be no doubt that this is the implication to be drawn from Kenneth Grant's remark that an unnamed associate of Parsons after the death of the latter 'is still at large, having grown wealthy and famous by a misuse of the secret knowledge which he had wormed out of Parsons'. Kenneth Grant, the hagica Reriral (Muller, London, 1972), p. 107. The context makes it quite clear that Hubbard is the man referred to. The same implication is to be found in a newspaper feature by Alexander Mitehell, 'The odd heginning of Ron Hubbard's career', Sunday rimes, 5 Oetober 1969, p. m . ' Which are mmsreported or misunderstood in some particulars by Mitchell. 5 Thms press statement was for the most part reproduced in the Sunday rimes 28 December 1969. The newspaper also paid the Church of Scientology a small sum in settlement of an action initiated by the Church in respect o Mitchell's article. (Parsons was a research chemist working at the California Institute of Technology.) any significant points of similarity.3 The only apparent simmlarities are those which are common to a number of systems of magical and occult practice for example, the belief that the individual has supernatural abilities such as telepathy, teleportation, and telekinesis, which can be achieved or regained through mental and spiritual exercises. In the case of many magical and occult systems these practices and their goals have been absorbed from Yoga. In Yoga a number of parallels with Scientology are evident. Yoga offers a system of metaphysical knowledge leading to 'rebirth to a non-conditioned mode of being'.3 The aim of the earliest philosophy of Yoga, sumkhya, was to dissociate the spirit from matter.3 In Yoga the world is real not illusory, but its endurance is the result of the ignorance of spint. When 'the last self shall have found its freedom, the creation in its totality will bc reabsorbed into the primordial substance.' The source of the soul's suffering is held to be man's solidarity with the cosmos, his participation in nature (the enturbulation of theta and MEST?).s The conception of Snirit in Yoga is remarkably close to that of the thetan: Vedanta...regards Spirit as a unique, universal and e-ternal realitv, dramatically enmeshed in the temporal illusion of creation (maya). Samkhya and Yoga deny Spirit (purusa) any attribute and any relation; aceording to these two 'philosophies', all that can be affirmed of pututa is that it is and that it rous..Y Elements of the cosmolog, appear similar (although Yoga seems to have only a very rudimentary cosmology). From all eternity Spirit has found itself drawn into...illusory relation with psychoall that ean be affimmed of putusa is that it u and that it knou s..Y mental life (that is, with 'matter') This is owing to ignoranee.. .7 While Yoga accepts the existence of God, the work of Patanjali, like that of Hubbard, did not accord him very much importance.S Yoga also contains the notion of the transmission of the 'subconscious' through Karmic transmigration . t fter penetrating normally inaccessible areas of consciousness and reality, the yogin was believed to acquire siddhts, or miraculous powers knowing one's previous existences, invisibility, great physical power, the power of nsing in the air, of controlling and dominating any being, etc..l although wanton use of I The author, John Symonds, also paid a sum in settlement after his book on Crowley, hc Great Beast, suggested a connexion between Crowley's 'tenet's of black magic and 'the prirciples of Scientology' (the Guardian, 22 Novemher 1974). S lircea Eliade, rOga · Immortaldy and recdom (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 8), p. 4. 3 Ibid..p. 8. Ibid..p g r Ibid..p. Io. Ibid..p. t6. 7 Ibid..p. 27. S Ibid..p. 29 God or the Supreme Being is mentioned in Sciertological works, (see, for exampie, ha Background and Ceremanl s of Church of Scenology of Ca(ifornia, World Wide Church of Scientology, East Grinstead, 1970), p. 2, but does not figure 7 ibid..p. 42. 10 Ibid..pp. 85, 129. TElEOrtY AND ITS TStANSMlSSlON 113 them was believed to preclude further advance to the ultimate goal of yogic practice, immortality. Eliade even gives some ground for believing that the nature of the praChCe, while updated and elaborated in Scientology, may have had common features with Yoga: The scholastie Buddhist texts give us some details of the technique employed. It is the faculty that consisb in retracing in memory the days, months and years until one arrives at one's time in the womb and finally at one's past lives...' This is, however, clearly more reminiscent of carly Dianetics than of current Scientology practices. Hubbard has credited the Vedic Hymns as one source of his inspiration3 and the claim that Scientology has been most strongly influenced by such ancient eastern sources is one that might perhaps be taken more seriously. Certainly on the basis of Eliade's account of the theory and prachce of Yoga, impressive similarities are to be found with the theory and practice of Scientology and Dianetics. Auiting Thousands of techniques to be used in auditing have appeared, although many are no longer in use and only a practising Scientologist would be able to say what currently constituted 'standard technology'. Many techniques are Hubbard has also counse led agains the misuse of occult abilities regained on the Hubbard has also counselled against the misuse of oeeult abilities regained on the th to operating Thetan TheSfe harier progreSS to 'tzkb2* (NiTT2ns) '1. Knowledge of previous hfe (that is, total recall of all of his existences and of 2. Power of great sight (not only to see great distances hut also to see through, over, and under objects. To see anything in the world at any time) . 3. Complete absence of sexual desire indieating fulfillment and eomplete 4. Ability to change his size (to any largeness or smallness). 5. Power of great hearing to hear any sound anywhere at any time). 6. Power to cause events (if he wants a thing to happen, to will it) . 7. Power to be where he wants (hy an act of will to transport himself to where he wishes to be). 8 Power to be invuible 9 Power to walk on air m. Power to know all that is known Manning Nash, 7:he Golden ltozd to ModeTnity (Wiley, New York, 196S), p. 149 Seientologists have claimed all but items 3, S. and m I have not kmown Scientologists anxious to achieve item 3, and since Scientology is the science of knowing how to know, the achievement of Item lo must ultimately be a goa], although I have not known any Scientologist to claim that he possessed this ability. 2 Eliade, op. eit..p. 184. t L. Ron Hubbard, Scientology 8-eoo, op. cit..'Foreword'. Eliade, (op. cit..p. 102) suggests, bowever, that 'only the rudiments of classic Yoga are to be found in the Vedas...' directed to the goal of giving the pre-clear a 'subjective reality' on his abilities as a thetan. One of the most basic is that of asking the pre-clear (the thetan) to give up the (self-imposed) need to be in a body, by 'extenori:cing' from that body: Ask preclear to be rhree feet behind his head. If stable there, have him be in various pleasant places until any feeling of searcity of viewpoints is resolved. Then have him be in several undesirable plaees, then several pleasant places; then have him be in a slightly dangerous place, then in more dangerous places until he can sit in the center of the SunP A development along these lines was known as the 'Grand Tour', The commands of the Grand Tour are as follows'Be near Earth', 'Be near the Moon', 'Be near the Sun', 'Earth', ' vloon', 'Sun', giving the last three commands many times. Each time the auditor must wait until the prec ear signifies that he has completed the command. The preclear is supposed to move near the bodies or simply be near them, it does nor matter which. The Grand Tour continues with 'Now f nd a rock', Be inside of it', 'Be outside of it', 'Inside', 'Outside', 'Insidc', 'Outside', 'Be in the centre of the Earth', 'Be outside of Earth', 'Inside', 'Outside', and back and forth until the preclear is able to do this very rapidly. Then the Grand Tour contir.ues, 'Be near Mars' EtC] r Another purely mental technique much employed in Scientology's early days was a technique known as 'holding anchor points'. The purpose of this technique was held to be that of enabling the thetan 'to tolerate or make space'.t' The preclear while seated would be told ...'Close your eyes', 'Locate an upper corner of the room behind you'. When he has done so, 'Now locate the other upper corner behind you', 'All right, hold on to these two corners, and don't think'...At the end of 15 minutes the auditor says, 'Now, find the third corner behind you',...When the auditor is assured the preclear has done this, he says, 'Now hold on to the same two you had before and the new one'. When the preclear has all three corners at onee, the Auditor says, 'Noq hold on to those three eorners and don't think'....The auditor then has the preclear locate all eight corners of the room and says, 'Now hold on to all eight corners of the room, sit hack and don't think'...the Auditor has the prec]ear do this for at least fifteen minutes.' Some thetans have allowed themselves to become so overwhelmed that they are no longer even able to control their bodies. A series of processes was designed to put the thetan back into communication with and CODtrol of his body. The first of these processes, known as CCH 1, involves the auditor and preclear sitting I L. Ron Hubbard, 'This is Scientology: the science of certainty', 70urnal of Scientologv, issue 16G, n.d. (some time in 1953), p. 12. L. Ron Hubbard, i he Creation of luman Ability (Scientology Publications, London, ), p. 37, emphasis omitted ' Ibid..p. 93. Ibid..pp. 93-6. facing each other. The auditor commands, 'Give me that hand'. If the preclear gives him the hand the auditor givcs it a slight pressure then returns it to the preclear's lap. If the preclear does not proffer the hand, the auditor takes it and does the same. This process may be run for several hours. CCH 6 took the following form: (auditor takes a book and bottle, placing them some distance apart on tables so that the preclear doesn't have to bend) . 'With that body's eyes look at that book'. 'Thank you'. 'Walk that body over to that book'. 'Thank you'....'With thac hand pick up that book'. 'Thank you'. 'Put that book down in e:cactly the same place'. 'Thank you'. 'Turn that body round'. 'Thank you'. 'With that bodv's eyes look at that bottle'; etc.: A further technique of some prominence in the 19505 was known as 'Waterloo Station' (or 'Union Station' in America). In a populated area (park; RR Station, etc) have pc tell auditor something he wouldn't mind not-knowing about persons or the persons not-knowing about him which auditor spots for him. Commands: Auditor: 'Do you see that (man, woman, described slightly) ?' Pc: 'Yes'. [...] Auditor: 'Tell me something you wouldn't mind not-knowing about that person'. [...] the pc selects things he already can know to not-know. He does not give things he ioes not know anyway. This stress is the willingness to Not-Know things one already knows [sic]. Otherwise pc will become confused. [...] When...run Rat or to a dope-oRf, reverse to :1 Auditor: 'Tell me something you wouldnt mind that person not knowing about [...] When...run flat or to a dope-off, reverse to :' Auditor: 'Tell me something you wouldn't mind that person not knovring about you' . [...] Run one side for hours then the other side in ordinary use. [...] The goal of Waterloo Stahon is not to make the pc make one thing vanish. That phenomenon is just the start. Auditor's have been quitting when the pc made somebody s hat disappear When the pc can make the whole universe wink on and offat hls comideration to know or not know it, you're getting somewhere so don't stop at a hat.' One basic aim of Scientoloey auditing is therefore to make the preclear aware that rea ity is a matter of his considerations, and changing ms considerahons will change the nature of reality. The theory and practice of Scientology is radically idealist in orientation.S L. Ron Hubbard, 'Procedure CCH', Professional Auditor s Bullehn r33 (r Apnl 8) S L. Ron Hubbard, 'Procedure CCH continued', Ptofessional Auditor's Bulletin, 135 (l May 1958) a That is, a process is flat when it no longer produces change; dope-off is a sensation of drowsiness. ' L Ron Hubbard, 'Six levels of processing', Professional Auditor's Bulletin 69 (6 January I ga6) . 5 L. Ron Hubbard, Dianetes 55! (The Department of Publications World Wide, East Grinstead, 1968), p. 67. he E-Afeter Most current auditing (or processing, the terms are synonymous) is conducted with the aid of the E-meter.l The E-meter is a tcchnological aid which has been developed to assist tte process of auditing. It is a form of skin galvanometer operating on the principle of the Wheatstone Bridge which measures resistance to a current passing between two terminals. The terminals usually employed in Scientology auditing and training are ordinary tin cans. In the auditing situation, a slight current is transmitted through the pre-clear from one terminal to another, the resistance being measured on a dial. The needle on the dial moves in response to a variety of factors such as an increase in skin salinity resulting from sweat, skin surface area in contact with the terminals, pressure, etc. It is the view of rlle Scientologists that they are able to detect what are known to them as 'body-reads', and therefore are able to isolate readings which reflect changes in the state of the thetan. The E-meter is held to be infallible. It 'sees all, knows all. It is never wrong.'S A complex terminology is associated with 'needle action' on the E-meter 'theta bop', 'rock slam', 'floahng needle', etc..each of which indicates particular characteristics of the pre-clear, his mental and spiritual state.s Although the E-meter was first introduced into Dianetics by Volney G. lathison in IgSr, it has little employed until the emergence of Scientology in 1952. vlathison continued to mix Dianetics and Scientology with other practices. For a ime he formed an alliance with the leaders of a therapeutic movement known as Concept Therapy, and marketed his meters to Concept Therapists and Chiropractors. Later Electropsychometry seems to have become an independent, if rather insignificant, movement in North America.4 Mathison's incorriaible eclecticism led to a break between him and Hubbard, after which, for some time, the E-meter fell out of use in Scientology. By 1957, however, Hubbard and his associates had developed their own transistorized version of the machine and it returned to favour.5 "The E-meter is essential for all modern auditing vrith but a few exceptions'. Cyril Vosper, the 8fmd BendErs (Nenlle Spearman, London, rg71), p. 83. ' L. Ron Hubbard, Electroprychometric Auditing Operator'r Manual (HASI, London, n.d. [c. rg53-41), P 57 ' On the E-meter, sce: L. Ron Hubbard, E-Meter Essntials rg6r (Hubbard Communications Office, East Grinstead, rg61); L. Ron Hubbard, the Book Introducing the E-'vleter (The Publications Organisahon World Wide, Edinburgh, 1968); Mary Sue Hubbard (Compiler), the Book of E-,fetet Drills (Hul:.bard College of Scientology, East Grinstead, 1967). Also see Kevin V. Anderson, Report of the Board of Inquiry irta Scientology (Govemment Printer, Melbourne, 1965), Chapter 4; Cooper, op. eit..Chapter 18; Evans, op. cit..pp. 6g-6. ' See John A. Lee, Sectarian Healers and ypnotherapy (Queen's Printer, Toronto, 1970), Chapters 5 and 6. 3 Anonymous, the Story af Dianetics and Scientology rraining, ( the Auditor, Supplement 6), SPO A/S, Copenhgen, 1969. Processing or auditing is organized on the basis of a strict progression of pro- cedures. Each level or 'grade has set processes associated with it which aim to produce different abilities. Passing through this progression of levels is known as 'getting your grades'. The first of these, Grade O, seeks to release the pre-clear from inhibitions about communication. When successfully completed, one becomes a 'communications release'.3 the auditing commands (questions) are: 'What are you willing to tell me about?'; 'What are you willing to tell me about it?' The pre-clear, holding the cans of the E-Ieter, answers each of these questions in turn until the auditor spots a 'floating needle'. This indicates that the pre-clear has achieved a 'cognition or insight concerning communication (or whatever he is being audited on) and should be accompanied by 'good indicators', a bright, aware, happy expression. In the course of such a process the pre-clear may offer many hundreds of answers to the auditing question. As may readily be seen, the nature of these answers may become very inhmate, personal, even obscene. This feature of auditing bas sometimes disturbed investigators of Scientology practices,3 but in this respect, opposition to the techniques would seem to be no more rationally based than earlier opposition to Freudian revelations, particularly with respect to the seuality of ehildren and infants.3 Grade I is Problems Release. The auditing eommands are, 'Tell me a problem' and 'How would you solve it?'4 Grade II is Relief Release, which deals with 'Overts' and 'Withholds', with the commands: 'What have you done?'; 'What haven't you said?'. Several further levels have to be negotiated before the pre-clear can undertake clearing and then the processes for the OT levels. Since some of these more advanced levels are self-audited (the pre-clear, employing a specially designed E-meter attachment, hmmself reads the E-meter and gives himself the auditing commands, or undertakes the other technical requirements for the process), the pre-clear who wishes simply to achieve the goals of auditing for himself has to undertake only the minimum amount of training required for mm to be able to conduct self-auditing. This is known as the 'Processing Route'. The pre-clear is, however, strongly encouraged to take the 'Training Route', that is to become an expert auditor, able to carry out auditing upon others as well as himsel£ By this means, the pre-clear is encouraged to seek clearing, etc..not only for himself but also for others. The client of Scientology ' L. Ron Hubbard, 'flassificahon gradation and awareness chart of levels and certificates' (Athena Publications, Denmark, 1970). or example, Anderson, op. cit..passim. ' lor a reconstruction from his own experience of auditing session. see Robert Kaufman, Insid3 Scuntororg (Olympia Press, London, 1972), passim. Grade O may sometimes be preceded by 3traight Wire Release in which Ihe audihng commands are: 'Recall a communieahon'; 'Recall something real'; 'Recall an emotion; repeated (or ·run ) unhl a 'floating needle' appears. See Malko, op. cit, p. 133. ' Kaufman, op. cit p. 14 et seq. u thereby transformed into an agent of the movement whose personal goals i Scientology become closely bound to his successful dissemination of the beliei system to others.l The lower levels of both audlting and training can be secure at a 'Franchise' or 'Mission' of the movement. These are semi-autonomou organizations which may be run by a single professional auditor, or in partnership. After completion of Grades I to IV, more advanced auditing (and all but the lowest levels of traiming) must be secured from a central organization. A fixed price-list exists for auditing and training. A franchise is not permitted to charge lessthanthecentralorganizationInlg72theGradescostatotalofaround£2oo for the levels from 0 to IV.5 Addihonal auditing may be purchased as a block of hours typically twenty-five hours at a time. According to a price list issued in 1972, twenty five hours of auditing could be bought for £so with reductions for larger blocks purchased at one time and with discounts for various kinds of member (for example, someone both an International and local member could secure a discount of 20 per cent).a mining Training in Scientology usually begins with the HAS (Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist) Course With this, as with most other levels of training, successful completion of the course is signified by an impressive certificate, and members often affect the initials of the successfully completed courses as hononfic appelations to their names John Smith HPA, for example. It is not unknown for individuals who have been awarded a Book Auditor's certificate, after reading and successfully applying the principles and practices indicated in one of Hubbard's texs, to employ the style B.A. after their names.' At one time 'degrees' were issued permitting the individual to employ the styles B.Scn, D.Scn, D.D.. and even 'Freudian Analyst' after their names, The HAS or Communications Course mculcates the basic training routines (TRs) wmch a successful auditor should employ. A well-trained auditor will always 'have his TRs in'. The purpose of the TRs is to train the student to confront the pre-clear without extraneous behaviour or habis getting in the way; to direct commands at the pre-clear in a clear and authoritative manner; and to ensure that the pre-clear replies or follows the command without allowing him to distract the auditor from carrying out the process; to acknowledge the pre-clear's communications, etc. The first rouhne, TR 0 requires the student and the coach (typically a fellow student, each taking turns at the two roles) simply to sit facing each other, neither ' This is taken up in detail in Chapter VI S rhAuilor, 77 (1972) S Leaflet sent to book purchasers. See the letter si5ned Frank E Wa ker B.A. (sork Auditor) in Crninly, 1, 9 (n.d.), P-l3making any conversation or effort to be interesting Have them sit and look at each other and say and do nothing for some hours. Students must not speak, fidget, giggle or be embarrassed or anaten. It will be found the student tends to confront with a body part, rather than just confront, or to use a system of confronting rather than just be there. The drill is misnamed if Confront means to do something to the pc. The whole action is to accustom an auditor to being there three feet in front of a pre-clear wimout apologising or moving or being startled or embarrassed or defending selL After a student has become able to just sit there for two hours 'bull baiting' can begin I 'Bull baiting' involves the coach seeking to provoke a reaction from the student by actions, other than touching the student, or by 'treading' on the students 'buttons', that is referring to subjects about which the student is likely to be sensitive and to which he might react. Kaufman details amusingly a bull baiting session. Most coaches found it most convenient to try to make the auditor-in-training laugh. Morton described to me one such session. He and his coach sat in chairs facing each other, the coach almost on top of him, with his knees tightly pinning Morton's. The coach then set out to find Morton Morvis's 6uttors subjects which broke him up and diverted his attention from his auditing. He began by investigating the possibility that Morton had a 'Jewish button' which neededfattsning (the majority of Jewish people happened to have such a button). 'Mishter Morvish' crooned the coach, 'mosht pipple leff et me ven I tzing but you von't leff et me ven I tzing will you, Mishter Morvish?' With that he cleared his throat and went into repeated ehoruses of rzum golly golly golly. Other Seientologists took up the refrain until ttte tune reverberated in various voice registers throughout the room. An ingenious girl added as counterpoint rhomt ftom l:rodus: 'Dai dam..dai dai.. . dai dai dai dai dai DAIEE...'. The org resounded with the music and Morvii's gasps of laughter. Juit as he had calmed down a stranger stepped into the room and announced 'I've just come from the planet Sholom in the galaxy of Sheket. Did you ever see a thetan wearing a yarmulka?' and they were off again. All told it took six hours to 'flatten' Morvis'sJewish button.5 The more advanced training courses require the reading of 'packs' of bulletins and policy letters by Hubbard, duplicated and stapled in folders. Each course has a particular pack. There are also voluminous tape-recordings of Hubbard's lectures to which the student must listen. The student may also be required to demonstrate his understanding of the material by producing a model in clay at the Clay Table, which illustrates the point of what he has learned. Students on courses are normally paired oft to test each other in their knowledge of the course materials and to carry out training in auditing techniques. Each Course pack has a 'check-sheet' indicating what has to be done to complete the course successfully. Each item on the check sheet has to be initialled by the coach or course instructor when the student has acquired the knowledge or skill required. L. Ron Hubbard, 'Modernized training drills', HCO Bullstin, 29 April 963, cited in Anderson, op. cit..p. 8m ' Kaufman, op. cit..pp. 4-j. At each level in training, the student acquires the ability to audit pre-clears on the corresponding processes. An auditor may only process pre-clears up to the level for which he has received training. Part of the course requirement is therefore to find one or more pre-clears to audit through the necessary levels to demonstrate one's proficiency.l In this way, training further mobilizes the student as an agent Sor the dissemination of Scientology. While one may find one's pre-clears among friends, since the pre-clear goes to a central organization for training he may otten not know anyone whom he can ask,S and he therefore ilas to secure 'raw meat' through dissemination on the street, or at his lodgings. On commencing t. course the student is introduced to the others en masse, wllo warmly applaud him. Similarly, on the completion of any level of auditing or training the indiidual is congratulated by his auditor or his classmates. At the central organizations a student or pre-clear will be brought to the room where study is in progress. The instructor tells the students to stop work and announces the individual's achievement. The student/pre-clear then gives a short speech indicating his 'gains' from auditing or from the course, and is applauded by those present. On completion of auditing the pre-clear is taken to the Qualifications Division of the 'Org' where he is briefly checked on the meter to make certain that he has been released on the grade. At more advanced levels, 'attestation that one has achieved the grade is generally all that is required. Similarly, having completed training, the student will 'attest' to his successful completion, He is then taken to the Success Department, where he is asked to write a 'success story', a few Gnes indicating his gains from the auditing or the course. These success stories are frequently pnnted in Scientology pubGcations and provide an indication of what various levels of training and auditing meant to those who had umdertaken them. I am no longer afraid of causing an unwanted effect on Inother being. This Grade has cleared out such a lot of garbage that I knew was there but eDuld never put my finger on, and so was therefore the eflfeet of it. I &el great now that it's gone ! Expanded Grade z Clive Niehol.' It's really great not to be constantly worrying and bogging myselS down with a burden of PROsLEMS Another great win I have had from this level is that my eyesight has improved a lot, and it was good before ! Expanded Grade I Clive Nichol.' I am now beainning to get freedom from my compulsions which I have had for twenty years or more. These eompulsions have always blunted my intentions. I now see mysehf beeoming free and er panded It means the restoration of life to me. Quintin McDougall.s Before Scientology I didnt now what I wanted in life or what to do with my life. I See ibid..p. 186. r Moreover, most students and pre-clears will have passed the level he is on and are not permitted to go through the lower level audihng again. S 'Audifing Successes', Cange Sg (1973), no paginafion. ibid. S Dianeoc Successes', leadet (1971). know just w hat I want to do and I am getting it done. Jenny Good.l What a perfect gradient these Expanded Grades are. I no longer feel afraid of anything. I feel calm and very stable. I can grant more beingness eo others. I like myself a lot better too. Ron has given man a terrific thing with the Expanded Grades. It's great to see the things that have been bothering me for years disappearing for good. Robin Youngman. For the first time for a long time I feel free to communicate. It is really great and I know I can do it Shirley Pyle.a Right after Clear I hit a keyed out OT state and could change my body size about I to I t inche5 in height by actual measurement. Some people s-vore it was z to 3 inehes, which it might have been, but it was I inch difference the time I measured. The ability was under control and I could do it at will. Fred Fairchild OTv I Clear No 49 Duplication of data often brings interesting abilities into view. I'm OT 1. While studying with intention in the privacy of my bedroom, I heard a noise in the adjoining den. I looked around to 'see' what it was, and behold, I looked right through the wall into the next room as though no wall was there. When your intention is very strong you can do what ya intend to do. Wow ! Do you intend to go CLEAR' And O.T.' Herb Stutphin, OTI Clear No 2313.5 Yesterday I was walking down the main street. A woman ahead of me coming in the opposite direction was coughing badly. I put across to her telepathically 'Are you OK?'. When she got beside me she beamed and said 'Yes, that is a lot better now, thank When she got beside me she beamed and said 'Yez, that is a lot better now, thank you' . Well ' The secret is on tho OT Courses - come and get it too. Vih Dickey OTs Today was fantastic. I walked downstairs to get some coffee and the coffee machine was buzzing. So I put my hands out and mm ed them around me machine putting out beams to bounce back and thereby I could tell by watching the particle dow exactly where the error in the machine was. I found it and corrected the molecular structure of that area in the rnachine and the buzzing stopped. Then I heard my air conditioner rattling so I looked at why it was rattling and it stopped. I'm becoming much more at cauze. I love it like Superman ! Michael Pincus OT7 Thank you, Ron, for immortality S 'Wins every day with Scientology!', leadet (1971). ' Ibid. 3 Ibid. 'Success beyond man's wildest dreams !', Clee7 .Serl)s, 6 ( 12 December 1 969) . S Ibid. 'OT Phenomena Successes', Advanve! Issue 17 (1973), p. 14. 7 Ibid.. pp. 16-17. 8 A-S-, after Class Ten auditing. Original sourcc unknown, but cited in an amdavit to the South African Commission of Enquiry into Scientology sbown to me by its author. eligious praetiees Despite its stridencv in the proclamation of Scientology as a church in recent years,l the religio;s practices of the movement other than processing, and training, are quite rdimentary. The central organizations of the movement usually have a chapel at which a Sunday service is given. This service generally takes the form of a lecure by the minister on some basic principle of Scientology. Part of a recorded lecmre bv Hubbard is sometimes played. There may be a question and ansv-er period 2 At one time a session of group auditing might b conducted.3 Wedding are solemnized with full legal recognition in America and, following recent legislation, in Austra]ia; or after a civil ceremony in Britain. l:unerals and naming ceremonies are also performed and the movement, from time to time, holds Prayer Davs which are well supported bv its followers. It ic difficult to see these as more than peripheral aspects of the practice of Scien tology. The theory ard practice is highly individualistic in orientation and has little communal significance which might be recognized and celebrated through public ceremonial The chaplain has a rather marginal role v.ithin the organi zational structure of the movement; he acts as a marriage guidance counsellor, and as an arbitrator ror interpersonal disputes between members on matters of a non-organizational and non-ideological kind. Scientology auditors mus[ undergo iministerial [raining' before practising professionally. Press photo graphs in recent years have usually shown Scientology Iinisters attired in graphs in recent year; have usually shown Scientology Ministers attired in clerical collars. Conclusions Scientology theory and practice seems to be oriented to goals that have been traditional in the realms of the occult and to derive this orientation and some of its philosophical ratior.ale from Yoga. The abilities to which Scientologists lay claim parallel the siddis of the yogi. In their techniques, Dianetics and Scien- tologydepartradicallyfromthemeditativetechniquesofearlieroccultpract ices. The largely passive meditation and the eercises for physical, n.ental, and spiritual control have been replaced by bighly directive, activist techniques. The use of the E-meter clothes these eercises in a scientific garb and provides an aura of technological precision and contemporaneity. In the years since 1952 and the transihon to Scientology, a clear direction is visible in the development of the practice and training. Dianetics, for all its pretentions to be 'an engineering science of the mind' was essentially an art, On the historical a2d organizational aspects of which, see Chapter 5 5 Anonymous, Cerrmonies of lhe l'ounding Church of ScienologY (Department of Publications World Wide, East Gnnstead, t 967,, pp. 7 8. 3 Testimony of Joseph Charles 8elotte in Eoundin Church of Scientology v. U.S..inU.S.CourtofClaims,No.226 61,Washington,D.C.Ig67,stenographictranscript, Pp. 244-5 dependent upon the ingenuity inventiveness, and ch.lrisma of the practitioner It therefore contained a number of fundamental dangers. The practitioner in the therapeutic situaeion, ·vith only general guidelines to the correct practise of auditing at his disposal, was thrown upon his own resources. In such circumstances many practitioners independently developed methods of their own which finally diverged so far from Dianetics as to challenge Hubbard's practice. The ciientele became attached to a particular practitioner rather than to the movement as a whole, or to Hubbard as its leader. Moreover, given the reiatively limited aims of Dianetics practice and the nature of its techniques, many of the clientele, regarding it purely as a psychotherapy, departed when they achieved /or sometimes when they failed to achieve) some concrete psychological or psychosomahc benefit. Hubbard sought to control the movement by ideological and technological as well as organizational means. First, he generated very rapidly numerous new techniques. The practitioner, wishing to satisfy a clientele which desired the best and therefore the newest techniques, was forced to resort to the central organization much more frequently to keep abreast of developments. He was thus rendered more dependent upon the organization. Second, Hubbard sought to standardize practice. Only certain techniques might be used, and used only in the precise manner estabiished by the organization. From the diffuse sills required in Dianetics auditing, processing with the E-meter particularly took the form of stereotyped deiivery of standardized commands and acknowledge- ments. The potential charisma of the practitioner was thus considerably restricted as his role was changed from that of an intuihve therapist to that of a machine-operative who had simply to determine the appropriate process, deiiver the commands from lists prepared by Hubbard, and observe needle action on the E-meter. Auditing became a semi-skilled occupation. Skill depended not on tacit professional knowledge of the auditor but on his ability precisely to duplicate the auditing technique established by Hubbard. Training was directed to this end of securing ecact duplication of technique. Since anyone could be trained to carry out the highly standardized forms of practice, the indnidual practitioner was thereby rendered far less important than formerly. Practitioners became highly substitutable, limiting their autonomy. The likelihood of schism and fission, while not eliminated, was greatly undermined by limiting the practitioner's independent authority The practice of Scientology was considerably de-personalized by these measures. (The Scientologists advise me that: 'The requirements for certification of auditors have risen as time has gone by...graduates of the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course are required to study the entire evolution of auditing in all its facets and to demonstrate their abiiity to apply this data.')l Through the management of theory and practice, Hubbard sought not only to control practitioners, but also to mobilize pre-clears A highly differentiated l Personal communication, Guardian's Omce, Novennber 1974. programme of auditing and training was made available, leading to esotenc occult goals rather than to mere psychological improvement. Only the lowest levels were available from practitioners and teachers not empioyed by the organization. Thus, rather than fully competent professionals, the franchise operator and field auditor became largely recruiting agents. Courses were organized on a continuous production-lice basis. Since the material for the courses were available in standardized form thlough the duplicated course 'packs' v-ritten by Hubbard and the tape-recordings of his lectures, the student could begin at almost any time rather than wait as in normal academic practice for the beginning of the academic year or term, or, as in other forms of training, until there were enough students to make it w3rthwhile. The authority of the teacher or instructor was also undermined by forbidding him to 'evaluate the data' for the student. Rather than a teacher the course instructor became little more than an index ,whose role was only to refer the student with doubts or confusions to the appropnate location in the material provided by Hubbard for their resoluhon. The theory itself became differentiated into what w e may refer to as an esoteric and an exoreric ideology. The exoteric ideology is presented in most of the movement's pubiications, the works for pubiication of Scientologists other than Hubbard, and rympathizers of the movement. Such · orks present Scientology as concerned with the spiritual nature of man (the thetan); with increasing communication, understanding of others, ability to control oneself; one's interactions with othels, and the surrounding environmentP Most of these works deal wieh the value of Scientology in handling ever-, day problems and situations; how to brina up chiLdren;Z how to manarc orrraniza- Most of these wortc deal with the value of Scientology in handling everyday problems and situations; how to bring up children;t how to manage organizations ;a or the app'ication of Scientology theory and technique to education.4 The esoteric ideolog,v develops a cosmological doctrine of the ongin and development (or degeneration of the thetan,; and manifests far greater concern with past lives,S and the supernatural abilities that the individual can acquire through the practice of Scientology. ISee,forerample,thefollowingworLsbyL.RonHubbard:Dieneticsss!, op.cit.; 7he iunrlantenhls of rh ught, op. cit.; Scientolagy q hrew Slant orl Life. See also J. F. Horner, A 3rete Undersnding of Life (Hubbard Communicahons Office, Auckland, New Zeaiand, 1961); Ruth Minshull, Mirades for Breakfast (Scientology Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor, Miceigan 1968), and idem, .irow to Choose our People (Scientology Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor, Michigan, tg72); Walter Lraddeson, Scientology for the hrillion (Sherbourne Press, Las Angeles, 1969); Omar V Garrison, ·the hridden Story of Scientoloty, op. cit. a Ruth Minshull, Mirecles for Breakfast, op. eit. 3 L Ron Hubbard, llow to l.ive ·rhough An Execuhve (Department of Publications World Wide, Last Grinstead, 1953). Victor Silcox and Len Maynard, Creative Learning: e Scientological Experimeat in Schools (Scientology Publicahons, London, l9ss); Muriel Payne, Creatiru Education illiam Maclellan, Gltsgow, 1958). 6 L Ron Hubbard, el fistory of Man (HASI, I ondon, n.d.). r L. Ron Hubbard, lue rOu Liued Before 7 his Life, op. cit. areas of Scientologv's operation. The movement currently maintains an extensive public relations apparatus, part of the function of which is to ensure that exoteric interpretations are available and publicized for organizational activity. Scientology developed a transcendental doctrine, or theodicy, to explain the individual's current condition. This doctrine incorporated an elaborate metaphysics based around a theory of reincarnation. It was thereby greatly broadened from a 'do-it-yourself' psychotherapy to a cosmology, endowing the universe and individual human life with meaning. The belief-system of the movement became increasingly esoteric, and a 'hierarchy of sanctification' emerged. embers could locate themselves on levels of initiation into the movement's mysteries through 'the grades', 'clear,' and the 'OT levels'. The chansmatic nature of the revelation, the gnosis, is evident in the power which it is conceived to have. Viewing the materials of a higher level than one has yet achieved, even by accident, is held to be dangerous. Hence, the 'advanced materials' are kept secret from the uninitiated. The doctrine and practices of the movement therefore became available as a means of control, since access to higher levels could be denied to those who deviate from its norms.l With the promulgation-of Scientology, Hubbard was able to claim the new gnosis as a revelation into which he had privileged insight, heightening his authority over the movement, and inhibiting competing claims to revelation. Aspects of the theory and practice most closely linking the belief-system to the cultic milieu were abandoned. Dianetic 'reverie' with its ciear links to hypnosis, and the concern with the trauma of early childhood and birth, with clear links to psychoanalysis and its developments, were abandoned. New elements of doctrine and practice the thetan and the E-meter, for example were introduced. Training and auditing were thoroughly routinized, inbibiting the development of any claim to charismatic leptimacy on the part of instructors and practitioners, minimizing their autonomy and power and heightening their substitutability. The strategies employed in coping with the doctrinal precariousness of the movement bear strong similarities to those employed by Mary Baker Eddy. Mrs Eddy claimed that her writings, in particular Science antl eakh, were inspired revelations. Some aspects of the teaching became a hidden doctrine available only to those undergoing special instruction. Students of the Normal Course were carefully vetted for their loyalty to the Church and forbidden to take notes while undergoing instruction (as is still the case today). Mrs Eddy became the sole source of doctrinal innovation, adaptation and interpretation. Until the establishment of the Board of Education, she alone could claim to ' Seven OT levels are currently available (1974), although Hubbard has indicated that 'there are perhaps 15 levels above OT VH ully developed but existing only in unissued note orm...which he threatens to release in due course. See Advance, issue ro (AugustlSeptember 975), p. 6. terch the rdvanced levels of Christian Science. Students were required not to indulge in writing on Ctmstian Science or in reading other metaphysical literature, and heretical teachers who persisted in teaching despite being excommunicated ·vere pursued by MIrs Eddy in the press and lawcourts for infringements of her capyrights. There had to be a clear ideological boundary between Christian Science and any other metaphysical system, and this boundary was heightened by the fear instilled in her students of malicious animal magnetism held to be the real nature of the practice of heretics, apostates, and imitators. The authority of local teachers was undermined by constraints on teaching beyond the preliminary levels of doctrine. Teacbing and practice became increasingly standardized and depersonalized. After 189, the only 'pastors' permitted in Christian Science churches were Science cnd Heclth and the Bible. Preachers were reduced to Readers, whose performance was controlled to the extent of standardizin even the emphasis with which passages were read. Their expository task was taken over by a Board of Lecturers, appointed by the Directors and obliged to submit the text of their lectures in advance to the Mother Church. The technique of healing became standardized on the basis of Mrs Eddy's texthook. The armual re-election of Lecturers by the Directors and the requirement that Readers could hold office for three years only, precluded the development of these offices as a source of independent authority that could be directed against the Church leadership. Teachers were brought under increased control by permithng them to hold a class only once a year, for no more than thirty students, and forbidding gathenngs of teachers and their students on other occasions.l Christian Science thus provides an earlier example of a process later followed in Scientology, in which an attempt was made to manage the problem of institutional fragility faced by the cult leadership. The beliefs and practices of the movement, and their mode of transmission and application, were mobilized in the process of arrogating and centralizing authority, and maximizing control. One aim of these ada?tations was to eliminate challenges to the authority of the leader, and to secure a disciplined and cohesive following. t Roy Wallis, 'A comparahve anlysis of problems and processes of change in two manipulationist movements: Christian Science and Scientology' in 711e Contempora .lfetcmorhosis of Reigion 5, Acts of the Icth International Conference on the Sociology of Religion, The Hague, Netherlands, August 973. 5. SOCIAL ORGANIZATION AND SOCIAL CONTROL Hirtorical oackground After Hubbard moved his headquarters to Phoenir in l9S2, Scientology went through a period of considerable organizational flux. The Hubbard Associahon of Scienco]ogists (HAS, later the Hubbard Association of Scientologists International, HSI) was incorporated as a 'religious fellowship' under Hubbard's direct control. Hubbard travelled a great deal during the following years, particularly to England to consolidate and promote the growth of Scientology in Britain. In his absence, he became dissatisfied with the way things were being conducted at Phoenic. The financial situation there had apparently deteriorated,l and the editor of the ournal of Sciertology, .91phia Hart, employed a rather liberal policy in the conduct of the periodical. While lauding Hubhard and his practice, he printed letters critical of the movement and its behefs and probably maintained too great an independence of his leader.8 Accordingly, Hubbard irstructed the loyal organizer of an independent Scientology school, Helen O'Brien, to fly to PhoeniY, sack Alphia Hart and remove the HAS to Philadelphia. There a new corporahon was established, much of the running costs of which were covered by the Philadelphia practitioners,3 and the ournal began appearing under Helen O'Brien's editorship. Hubbard, however, appears not to have been gready reassured that his organization was now in safe hands. He was a strange partner in business, because he seemed determined to undemsine us. He airmailed our U.S. subscriber lists offers of books for sale from England, but Helen O'Brien, Dian,ics in l.inbo (Whitmore Publishing Go.. Philadelphia, rg66), p.68. ' Helen O'Brien, who despite her own later fall from grace remained loyal to Hubbard's interpretation of many events at this time, complains that he had 'hired an editor who never rea ly understood the subject and who for several monthi injected his penonal viewpoint in Hubbard's American communication hne'. Helen O'Brien, op.cit..p.61, ' At least according to their own account, Helen Osrien, op. cit.. p. 69 reneged repeatedly on promises to shlp us a suppiy, after we'd backlogged rrders to the ceiling by advertising them on his instruction. He said that all letters should be for varded to him for his reply, and then, when they went unanswered, dubbed us the 'Philadelphia Incommunicators. Wben I hired a secretary, he wrote directly to her, with pages of instruction about how I should be conducting the operation !l On his return to Philadelphia late in 1953 for a Congress, Hubbard was able to appear as If respondirg to complaints from 'the field' present at the Congress that O'Brien and her partner had refused to communicate ne-v information.t He dismantled the Pennsylvania corporation and excommunicated O'Brien and her partner.3 The head iuarters of the movement were moved a short distance to Camden, liewJersey. There, late in 1953, ;hree churches uere incGrporated. Only two of these, the Church of American Science (represented as a Christian Church) and the Church of Scientology (represented as non-denominational) were activated. The third corporatior. (which appears to have been called the Church of Spiritual Engineering [!]) was never utilized. Early in 1954 Hubbard removed the funchoning corporate superstructure back to Phoenix, Arizona, and began 'franchizing' independent churches of Scientology in other states.4 In 1955, Hubbard again moved his organization, this time to Washington DC, where Wiliiam Young had built up a thnving practice. (The Scientology organization argues that Hubbard moved to Wa5hington DC because of local attacks on Scientology, and Hubbard deemed it sEer to be under the jurisdichon of Federal rather than State courts, in order to guarantee hhe Church's constitutional rights.) In 1959, Hubbard purchased Saint Hill Manor in East Grinstead, Sussex, which became the movement's headquarters umtil the establishment of the 'Sea Org' in 1966. It is no easy matter to provide a clear picture of the corporate involvementS of Hubbard and his movement. Hubbard vas well aware of the value of corporate structures as weapon5 in the control of both his movement and its environment.5 A complex corporate structure maximizes the dimculty of surveitlance, or inveshgahon of the movement's affairs, and also maximizes hhe number of public images through which the movement can be promoted. These exoteric 'faces' to the rr.ovement can then be differentially shessed (at different times) depending on public receptivity at any given time to any given image. The letter-paper of hhe Founding Church of Scientology of Washington DC in 1957 listed seventeen organizations which the movement leadership owned or controlled. These included the Congress of Ea5tem Scientologists, the American Helen O'Brien, op. cit..pp. 74-5 J 70ursal of Soi ntoloD, r2G, n.d. J 7Ournalofsrlantoloeyz4G(3lJanuarylgs4)p 2 ' A Church of Sciento!ogy was 'franehized' to J. Burton Farber in California and another to William Yourg in Washinston :DC. ' Philip Selznick, rh Oreanizational Waan (Free Press, Glencoe ! 960). Society for Disaster Relief, Scientology Consultants to Industrial Efficiency, and the Distribution Center Inc. From 1954 Hubbard also promoted a Freudian Foundation of America. After Hubbard's re-acquisition from Purcell of the legal rights in the Wichita Dianehc Foundation in 1954, there were also among the list of corporations of the movcment various Dianetic organizations, such as the Hubbard Dianetic Research Foundation. Sundry other legally incorporated organizations had been established in England.l aost of the organizations were ad hoc and temporary. The movement was largely organized, during the 19505, through the HASI. The HASI provided public services through the Hubbard Guidance Centre (HGC) which offered individual auditing; the Academy of Scientology which offered training; and later the Personal Efficiency Foundahon which offered the free or inexpensive introductory courses designed to draw in new recruits. The HASI also published various magazines and other promohonal materials. A separate organization was the Hubbard Communications Office Ltd (HCO) which was Hubbard's direct administrative machine. Throughout the 19605, eonsiderable re- organization of the corporate strueture took plaee as more of the corporate operahon of Scientology was brought under the legal auspices of the Church of Scientology of California. 'Field' orgarization During the 1 9 ,os, despite a progressive tightening of control over the movement Dunng the 19505, despite a progressive tightening of control over the movement as a whole in comparison with the days of Dianetics, organization of the following of Scientology in the field remained somewhat loose. By requuring affiliation of amateur group5 with the HASI, Hubbard sought to control the grass-roots following. New information on theory and technique was now less readily available through public documents. Instead, practitioners were encouraged to take professional courses at considerable cost. The HPA course cost soo and Advanced Clinical courses which led to the conferring of the 'Doctorate of Scientology' cost :i800. Only those who had taken advanced indoctnnation were permmtted to teach and certify competence beyond the most basic levels.3 These developments led to a rapid 'professionalization of field practice. Amateur groups could not secure the training or access to the material that had formerly made their existence worth while. The professional auditors and their organizatiOns began to dominate the field. Amateur groups gradually disappeared. Those who remained committed to the movement affiliated with and became absorbed into the clientele of a local or central organization. The possibility of opposition to the leadership from the grass roots was thereby rendered virtually impossible. Members had no formal and few informal t Sir John G. Foster, Enquiry into th Prache6 and 13f6ct5 of Scintoio6 (HMSO, London, 197), pp29-33 rC6rtaintyJ 19, 1 (1963), pp 9, ' 30urnal of ScientologJ!, v2G, n.d. 'horizontal' relationships with each other. The movement was transformed from an almost federal association of independent, autonomous groups into a 'mass' movement, with few ties other than those of an almost entirely 'vertical' kind between the central (and to a lesser extent, local) organization and individual members Professional practihoners might operate as independent 'r^ield Auditors' with a minimum of organization, or establish 'franchises' which reccived direct assistance, preferential discounts, and other concessions from the central organization, and in return were expected to send l o per cent of their receipts to the Hubbard Communications office. Some of the more ambitious practitioners organized Churches of Scientologv in their local area. During 1 954 various strategies w ere employed to tie practitioners more closely to the central organization. 'onding of auditors'l proved unsuccessful, but auditors were required to remain 'in good standing' with the central organization and to purchase annual professional membership of the HASI at a fee of 525.00 a year in order to ensure that their certificates remained valid.S The names of auditors who were not in good standing were published in movement periodicals,3 and the tnembership were enjoined to have no dealings with nonapproved practihoners. Various publications carned advertisements for local practices approved b, the central organizations, and lists of approved franchises were occasionally published. Prachtioners were encouraged to recruit nevw members and to maximize their bls olvemel-t in he r ovement. Group pmccssing gradually fcll from favour as involvement in the mvement. Group processing gradually fell from favour as Hubbard found it did not lead to increasing the involvement of members. One source reports a lecture by Hubbard in 1954 in which Ron told the assembled auditors that group processing was proving valueless both from the fandpoint of help to the audience and in revenue. Those helped werenh bad offto begin with he said, and when these get past whatever may be bothering them at the moment -hey go on their way and that's mat.' (The Scientology orgenization express the view that this statement appeared in an apostate's publication, and that it is not true. However, Hubbard's own words cited on p. rSg below have much the same substance.) After the mid l950S, practitioners were encouraged to attract recruits bT means of a Personal (or sometimes Personnel) Efficiency Course, an Anatomy of the Mind Course, or some other introductorv series of lectures and basic practices, from which recruits could be secured for more advanced training and auditing I Diseussed in Cbapter g. 2 3ournf l of Scientolo g7G, n.d..p 1 . a For example, Ablih mimeoed edition, no number, no date, warns o 3 its rear page, 'Marcus Tooley of Au.tralia: all eertificates and memberships HASI, HDRF su pended pending retrainingh rk6 Abrrfc, 1, 7 (N3vember 1954), p. 8. Whlte practitioners in the field were permitted to train and audlt the less advanced levels of Scientology, Hubbard restricted certification to the central organizations. Currently even the iouer grades have to be verified and certified at the 'Org'.l On completion of the lower levels, practitioners are encouraged to send pre-clears and students on to the Org by commission payments on the amount spent at the Org by the pre-clear. Independent practitioners are not permitted to charge less for their services than the charge made for equivalent services by the Org. During the 19505 Hubbard encouraged the estabiishment of franchise operations,t but after the secession of a number of independent practiuoners late in 959 and early 1960, Hubbard became increasingly disenchanted with the idea of 'private practice'. The idea of 'One Organisation and That's Scientology' is receiving much commendation everwhere. The idea of 'the private practiuoner' has never set well on us as it's borrowed from oranisations with few ansv ers. You don't have to become 'private practice if you've got the answers. There's enough action and money in sight to include everyone in. A united Scientology alone can stand up to the buffets of world clearing.S Franchise holders were encouruged to set up as City offices owned and controlled by Hubbard rather than remaining independent.4 During the secessions of the late Igs^searly 19605, Hubbard had continually to reassure himself of the loyalty of practihoners. A Field Auditor Ethical Committee appears in Scientology publications in 1959, to investigate irregularities in the practise of these professionals,S and the certmcates of a suspected practitioner wouid be suspended until he came into an Org for a check that he had 'Clean Hands'. _An U S t;f Af eted nractitinner would be sus- Hubbard controlled training and practice through ownership of copyrights to material, ability to certify practitioners and their ciientele, and through control over the communications of the movement.S He was therefore able to determine whether or not an individual v.as recognized as an auditor in good standing and to pubiicize this fact to the field. By ehese means, Hubbard was able progressively to reduce the autonomy of practitioners, transmuting them from I See, for example, Robert Kaufman, Inside Scietttoloy (Olympia Press, London, 1972), p.27etseq. '0rg'isaScientologyabbreviationfortheScientologyorganization. See, for example, Ability Major, lo (c. Iate 1959). S L. Ron Hubbard, 'Ron'sJournal', HC0 Information Letters, 27 October 1962. ' Various C0 Inform2hon Letters, 1962. 5 Certainty, 6, 6 (1959), p. 5. There is no clear evidenee that independent publications were frowned on, but only one periodical publication independent of the Org appeared, as far as I can trace, after the disappearance of the various Dianetics newsletters and other similar circulars, whirh was sponsored by a practitioner in good standing with the Org. This wa the Auditar and Philosoher, which ran for only 2 or g issues during 1956. Independent communications media wcre clearly not encouraged. independent professionals to functionaries and recruiting agents for the central organizations.l 'rh Org The founders of mtny social and religious movements, while bearing the charisma necessary to mobilize a large following and convey an innovatory message, not infrequenly lack the administrative ability to establish an enduring organizational structte which ·vill continue to promote that message after their demise. Hubbard, hoever, is an extraordinary administrator. Developed in its present form largely during the years after establishing his headquarters in East Grinstead, the Org is an elaborate and imposing bureaucratic machine. Max Weber detaded the following characteristics of bureaucracy: fixed official jurisdictional aeas ordered by rules; the distnbution of regular activities as official duties; thestable and strictly delimited distribution of the authority of officials; and the rtstriction of office to those appropriately qualified. Bureau- cracy rests on an ordeed hierarchy of office and authority with the lower offices supervized by the hiSher; the extensive use of vlitten documents preserved as 'the files'; specializedomffice management with expert training; and an elaborate body of general ruhs, knowledge of which constitutes part of the technical expertise possessed b 3fficials.2 As we shall establish below, in many respects the Scientology organiza!on approximates very closely to this ideal type. The structure of the Org is established by an organizahonal chart generally known as 'The Org Board'. The Org Board divides the organization into seven Divisions: Executive; HCO; HCO Dissemination; Treasury; Techmical; Qualu'ications; and Distribution each, as will be evident from their titles, I Most books on Scientology by individuals within the movement other than Hubbard are copyrigbted in Hubbards name. When a writer falls from favour they are withdrawn from crculation. Thus when Reg Sharpe, a prominent aide of HubScientology organizatl;on approxlmates very closely to this deal type. The structure of the Org is established by an organizational chart generally Ex cuhve Ditectrve ED 716 WW November 7th 1967 HCO SEGS FRANCHISE FSMS CanceDation of Issue Authority LRH Issue Authority is hereby cancelled on the book 'This is Life' by Reg Sharpe. This book can no longer be nsued, sold or displayed by Seientology orgs, ESMs, Franchise or Scientologists. Issue Authority WW For the LRH Communicator WW for soard of Directors of the Church [Seal] of Scientology of California, i K. Max Weber, 'Burtaucracy', Chapter 8 in Hans H. Gerth and C Wright Mills, eds, From Mt btr: EssaJs in Sooiolog (Routiedge & Kegan Paul, London, 1970), pp. 196-8. ..11 IIU UOIleS TepC Oy n pdl LUll allu 1 Every post v ithin the organization has associated with it a 'hat' file.3 The h. file contains the relevant policy for the operation of that post, plus memoranda from its former incumbents which will aid a newcomer in 'wearing the hat' that is, operating the post effectively. Hat files are written up with such specificity that theoreticallv any individual could take over and operate the post after simply learning the file. The 'Org Exec Course' provides executive training for higher echelon personnel. that is operatino the post effectively. Hat files are written up with such specificity having distinct functions. Below these with yet more specialized functions are twenty-seven Departments. The chain of command cu]minates in L. Ron Hubbard, currently shown as 'Founder', below yhom is ranged his (third) wife ary Sue Hubbard as 'The Gontroller', and the Executive Directors of each organization Beneath 'The Controller' lies the office of 'The Guardian' and the HCO side of the organization, which deals among other things with external relations;communicabontoandfromHubbard;generalcommunicationv.ithin the organization; personnel; and internal social cPntrol of the movement. The Org Executive Directors have responsibility for the operahng divisions of the organization processing, training, accounting, etc. Each department has a particular function and jurisdiction as established in Hubbard's Policy reers These documents specify the grounds for the operation of each unit within the organization, the responsibilities of its officers, and the organization's goals and procedures. lany of them are collected in a series of eight volumes as an 'Encyclopedia of Scientology Policy', which collectively form 'the oTgani ah6n Exectztire Cotrse.l Org executives are required to have an operating knowledge of these volumes, and an executive is expected to be able to legitimate his actions by reference to relevant policy. The Org mauntains extensive files. Poicy now demands that all orders be The Org Board provides the model for all Scientology organizations. In small organizations which lack sufficient personnel to staff every post separately, one staff member may 'wear several hats'. However, the Org Board is presented not merely as an appropriate structure for Scientology organization; rather it is taken to be the perfect organizational form, applicable from the level of the individual (who could operate, it is argued, on the same functional model) o that of the world. As Scientologyexpands, its followers believe the whole world will gradually get 'pulled in under the Org Board'. I L. Ron Hubbard, the Organisahon Erecuive Course (Seientology Publieations Organisation, Copenhagen, 1970). This volume will bereafte be cited simply as OliC. I was inioia ly permitted to purchase only the first two of these volumes, which alone comprise some moo pages of policy letters. The Scientology publishing company did not agree to sell me the other six volumes until too late to utilize them for the purposes of this research. OIC, Vol. O, p. 296. 5 Posts in Scientology orgs are known as 'hats', from the phase 'wearing hishat', meaning acting in his sueh-and-such role. The virtues of the Org Board derive particularly from thc fact that it is held to be a pracucal representation of the basic scheme of Scientology theory: Thetan HCO Divisions Org Public Divisions Divisions uoarL antl his direct subordinates are the guiding spirit, the thetan, of the Org operating through its 'mind', the HCO Divisions including the Guardian's Office and the Ethics Officers 1 Pugh and Hickson in their analysis of the structure of fifty-two organizations found none which showed the kind of profile to be expected from Weber's model of bureaucracy, that is one which would appear ai highly specialised with many narrowly defined specialist 'offices', as highly standardised in iti procedures, and as highly formalised with documents prescribing and recording all activities and available in the files as preeedents. IE everything had to be referred upwards for decision, then it would also score highly centralised In configuration it would have a high proportion of 'supportive' or administrative or 'non.work-dow' personnel.' They suggest that such 'extreme total bureaucracy' may only exist among the bureaux of central government. Yet the Scientology organization appears to fit this model singularly closely. While not every decision could conceivably be referred upwards, few need to be in the Org, since most decisions can be made on the basis of the centrally prepared policy documents, which specify in great detail how operations are to be carried out.3 Only in the event of ambiguity or unprecedented circumstances need matters be referred upward for decision. While the organization has become highly bureaucratized, it departs from the classic Weberian model over the position of 'the official'. Staff posts are presented I Ibid..p. 252. 3 D. S. Pugh and D. J. Hickson, 'The comparative study of organisadons' in Graeme Salaman and Kenneth Thompson, eds, Peoplt aDd organisatioDs (Longman, London, L973), p59 i When he lived at Saint Hill, for e:ample, Hubbard wrote a lengthy memorandum detailing the proper way to wasb the Hubbard family cars. This is still printed in OEC, Vol. I, pp. 295-6. as fulfilling a duty in assisting Ron to 'clear the planet',l and enjoy a measure of social esteem, particularly in the more specialized and executive positions.3 Posts are filled by appointment3 and the hierarchy of offices might be said to provide a career, and will no doubt increasingly provide an established ladder of advancement as the movement becomes more thoroughly institutionalized. Hovever, the concept of career is only loosely applicable, since many staff members join the organization only temporarily, working out contracts of specified length (typically two and a half years) in return for free auditing and training.4 vlany therefore see their staff membership as of limited duration. It is doubtless in part because of the rapid turnover in staff engendered by the contract system that the highly formalized machinery of staff hats, etc..has been instituted, to equip an individual to cope with a post after minimal trainin8. lloreover, even the executive officials of Scientology Orgs do not enjoy security of tenure. Security of tenure, as Weber has indicated, enhances, even if it does not ensure, the independence of the office holder. Such independence is entirely contrary to the spirit of Scientology's organizational practice. The Org bureaucracy departs from the Weberian model in two further particulars While Weber spccified that 'official activity demands the full working capacity of the official, irrespective of the fact that his obligatory time in the bureau may be firmly delimited',5 Scientologv personnel are utilized as disposable agents by the leadership to an extent far beyond that usual in bureaucratic organizations. In periods of organizational or departmental crisis, personnel mav be required to remain at the Org working, except for brief periods of rest snatched on the floor or wherever is available, for forty-eight or more hours at a timeS or sent offwith case-loads of books to be sold in distant towns after a normal day's work at the Org.7 The extent to which the organization may encroach on the 'private' time and activities of its personnel is a function of the ideological commitment of its staff, a personal involvement that departs from the impersonal aura of Weber's bureaucrat. Secondly, Weber's official 'receives the regular pecuniary compensation ol a normally fixed salary and the old age security provided by a pension'.S As far as I can learn no pension proision is made by the Scientology organization, and staff are not, for the most part, paid a fixed salary. Remuneration in the I 'A post in a Scientology Org isn't a job. It's a trust and a erusade', OEC, Vol. O, P 34 2 Incumbents of lower posts are often regarded with pity, even by ·tauneh adberents, rnther than respect, but that is probably true of bureaucracy everwhere. S The more important posts are appointed only by Hubbard himself See OEC, Vol. 1, pp. 2, 100, 12j. ' See, for example, OEC, Vol. O, p. 48. S Weber, op cit. c Cyril Vosper, Is Mird end THZ SICT: SClZts'TOLOOY organization is based on g-oss receipts. Fifty-five per cent of the gTOSS income for a particular Org is transferred to a Salary Account. Each post within that Org has a certain number of 'units' allotted to it, each unit entitling the staff member to a certain proportion of the salary fund. Hence, as Org income ductuates so, accordingly, will individual salaries.l The Anderson Report indicates that the resulting salary levels achieved by staff of the Victoria Organization were relatively low, often less than the state's basic wage level. For example, for the week ended 17th May 1962 where the unit appears to have been sS 6d, a person on 1 6 units received as little as 4 8s for 4o hours work. Other instances for that week were:J'fo. of units Hours worktd Gross sclary 40 42t 42t 40 325 7 33 47 9 1 6 Fhe highest paid employee in the HASI in this week was thc clcaner, who was paid The highest paid employee in the HASI in this week was the cleaner, who was paid at the rate of ms per hour. HCO staff fared a little better than the HASI, two of them getting £16 I /s 6d and £16 respectively. Interviews with former employees of the Org in England and America confirm the low average level of pay and its ductuations, although there may have been some improvement in recent years. Two of the factors wbich normallv play an important part in recruitment to bureaucracy, j ob and income security, are thus dispensed with in the Scientology organization. Personnel are attracted to Org posts as a result of ideological commitment, and the fact that contracting to work for the Org permits access to training and auditing they could otherwise ill afford. Dispensing with thesl two aspects of bureaucracy also facilitates greater control by the leadership of the incumbents of staff posts. The Org is a highly bureaucratized structure although it retains distinctive patnmonial characteristics. It is decisive for the specffic nature of modern lovalty to an office that, in the pure type, it does not establish a relationship to a person, like the . ..disciple's faith...in patrimonial relations of authority.3 I Kevin Victor Ancerson, Report of fhe r70ad of EnquiTy into ScienoloD (Government Printer, Melbourne, Avstralia, 1965), pp. 26 et seq. S Anderson, op. cit..p. 27. Weber, op. cit..p. 149. The employees of Hubbard's Org are not merely officials, but also isciples. Hence commitment of staffto the Org is secured by ideological means, replacing the need for the attractions of tenure, secure salary and orderly promotion through a work hierarchy. Moreover, the movement leadership seeks to proscribe the development of an independent basis of authority witmn the movement, even in its own bureaucratic structure. The absence of tenure and the considerable substitutability of employees even at the highest levels, enhances the dependence of the bureaucracy on the authonty and direction of the leader, and the maintenance of ultimate control in his hands. Statistics An important element of the organization's bureaucratic practice is its 'statistics', or 'stats'. Statistics provide both a measure of organizational emciency and a means of control. The development of statistics was one major aspect of the bureaucrahzation of the mo ement and the shift in administration from a purely patrimonial, personally directed staff of disciples to impersonal control through formal rules and procedures. An org today is not run on personalities. It's run on statistics. All orders are based on statistics .l The statistic is a measure of operating emciency based on some readily available indicator. Each Org, division, department, and hat is assigned a statistic which indieates 'normal operation'. The statistics are indicated by the gross income of the facihtyi number of letters mailed out with promotional material; gross book salesj number of students enrolled; number of 'success stories' written; or some similar objective indicator.2 Weekly statistics reports are transmitted up the orgamzational ehain of command and provide a ready means of checking the productivity of lower echelon departments and personnel'Up statistics', that is a level above the arbitrary norm set for normal operation indicate that the individual occupyung the post, or the department concerned is in a 'higher condition'3 and therefore eligible for various awardsAn individual in a condition of 'Power' on his post receives Pay and full bonuses. Awarded S25.00 credit for Org Services at own org or is payable by Org as credit agaist services in a higher Org. Has top priority on Org service lines. Gold star on Gomm bas:et and on Org Board.' ' L. Ron Hubbard, HCO Pobcy Letla, I February 1966, p. 2. S L. Ron Hubbard, 'statistics for divisions, HCO Policy Ldta, 3o September 1 96, in OEC, Vol. I, pp. 3z8-g. See 33thics section below. 'Conditions, awards and penances, HCO Policy Lctta, 16 November 1971. On the other hand, 'down statistics', that is, belov normal operation, indicate that the individual or org is in a 'lower condition' and becomes liable to various penalties. In 'Liabilit' an individual receives Pay, but no bonuses. Must submit and execute a m hour Amends Project in own time. Is offall trainirgandauditingexceptforGramming,WordClearingorhatting actions necessary to handle own post. Minimal meal breaks. Austere working unitorm or clothing. May not have time offor receive vacation while in this condition. A gray ribbon is placed on their Comm basket and a gray flag by their name on the Org Board. Must wear a gray armband on left armP the leodet At least until recent years, Hubbard indisputably controlled the Scientology organization. Until I c66, he and members of his immediate family occupied the more important direc-orship positions of the various Scientology organizations. I:)uring 1966 he w as srid to have resigned from all directorships of such organi- zations. While Hubbard appears to have relinquished direct legal control, he retained certain righ: as 'Trustee' and signatory to various international bank accounts of the movement until at least rg6g.Z According to the Guardian's Offce of the Church, Hubbard is not currently a signatory on any Church of Scientology bank account, nor does he have any 'Trustee' status.a While policy documents are now often issued over other names than Hubbard's, many are still issued over Hubbard's name. The Guardian's Office advise me that Hubbard has 'sold his name' to the Church, which they indicate means that the right to append Hubbard's name to policy is vested in the Board of Directors of the Church of Scientology World Wide.4 This may indicate that Hubbard has relinquished direct administrative control over Scientology. It may, however, indicate that like Mary Baker Eddy, Hubbard found it convenient not to appear to be directing the Scientology organizations. Until her death, Mrs Eddy actively supervised the administration of the Christian Science Church, although she had nominally relinquished control to the Board of Directors. The policy of the movement states that Hubbard is the source of all Scientological theory and practice in the sense that even where he did not invent a particular practice, only his approval legitimates its use and is often referred to in Scientology publications as the 'Source'. The Guardian's Omce claim, I Ibid. 5 Testimony of Herbie Parkhouse, Church of Scientology of California Inc. v. Bernard Green and Barbara Ferraro, etc..60 civ 5745 before Hon. Richard H. Levet, District Judge, U.S. Drstrict Court, Southern District of New York, Stenographer's Minutes, October 4, 5 6, 1972, pp. 577-609. Lcncr from David Gaiman, Guardian's Office, Chureh of Scientology, Zl v[arch 974 4 Ibid. however, that owncrship ol all llubbard's phllosopllicnl and techmCal m......... now vested in the Church. Evidence tendered by officers of the Washington Founding Church of Scientology in legal actions in 1967 also indicated that, whatever the legal position, Hubbard remained in ultimate control of the movement, and could reassume day-to-day operational control without difficulty. He still issues our policy letters as the founder which are applicable to Scientologists everywhere I ...I think it is fair to say that from the viewpoint of all Scientologists, we aeeept Ron Hubbard as the final authority and the source of Scientology.3 Q. Let me ask you this. Is it within Mr Hubbard's power at any time to assume the control of the Founding Church and all other Scientology organisations ? A. Only by the agreement of Scientologists. Q. If Mr Hubbard tomorrow were to issue a memorandum where he w as to state that he ·vas taking back what he had said last year and he was again to be put on the board of directors of all organisations, would the Scientologists allow him to be put back? A. May I answer that in two parts? Q. Please answer yes or no aDd then eYplain. A. The answer is yes, and I will elaborate on that by saying that theoretically, or better said, as n point of practieability, the boards of all churcbes could actually refuse that, but in actual fact, I know that would never happen.3 Moreover, ns Hubbard has apparently ·vithdrawn from operational dircction of refuse that, but in actual fact, I know that would never happen.3 Moreover, as Hubbard has apparently withdrawn from operational direction of the movement, other members of his family have come to play a larger role. His wife, Mary Sue, is 'The Controller' to whom the Guardian is responsible. The Guardian directs the operations of the Assistant Guardians based in each organization. The Assistant Guardian is the senior and most powerful executive in every local organiZation.4 ' Testimony of John Bevis Fudge, Founding Church of Scientology v. USA in US Court of Claims, No. 226-61, Washington D.C. :967, transcript, pp. 217-18. r Ibid..p. 2t8. 3 Ibid..p. 29 n In his deposition, Bevis Fudge, Legal Omcer and Assistant Guardian of the Founding Church of Scientology also makei this point clear: 'Q. Does Ron Hubbard have, let s say, the power within the organisation to influence its activities and operations since he resigned his directorships in 1 966 ? A. Definitely. Q. So there has been no real change then in his control over the organisation? A. No, not to my knowledge.' ('Deposition of Bevis Fudge' in Founding Church of Seientology v. U.S.A..3 January 1967, stenographic transcript, p. 12.) Documents made available to me by a reeently defected Sea Org member make it quite clear that there remains a direct chain of command from Hubbard through the Sea Org to all Scientology organizations. 4 Deposition of Anne L. Ursprung, in Founding Church of Scientology v. The Washington Post Co, Civil Action No. 214 1-68, U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia, tg68. Miss Ursprung testified that as Assistant Guardian she was superior Hubbard's daughter, Diana, and son, Quentin, are assuming a progressively more important place in the affairs of the movement, figuring prominently in recent publications, and acting as Hubbard's proxies at major gatherings of the movement. As Hubbard has withdrawn from the direct public control of the movement, other members of his family have moved into leadership roles. 'the Sea Otg A relatively recent aGdition to the organization of Scientology is the Sea Org. Shortly before the Bitish Home Office advised Hubbard that he would no longer be permitted entry to the United Kingdom, he acquired, with considerable foresight, a sea-going vessel, the avowed purpose of which was to enable Hubbard to explore ancient civilizations. By l971 the Sea Org fleet contained some six shipS.t Its purpose has been variously presented. The Sea Org was formed to compose a superiorly disciplined, elite group working directly under Ron to aid the creation of a new civilisation on mis planet.3 The Sea Organisation operates on a high standard of mobility and comfront. Its end product is Ethics and Order. Its purpose is to get ETHICS IN. The Sea Organrsation is the most powerful organisation in the world. It works wi the primary rod of Emhics.' The Sea Organisation is composed of the aristoeracy' of Scientology. The Sea Organisahon (the research and management branch of the Church The Sea Organisation is composed of the 'aristocracy' of Scientology.' The Sea Organisation (mhe research and management branch of the Church of Scientology)...5 The Sea Org has no separate corporate status, but comprises an elite order of Scientologists, with a broad authority to intervene in the affairs of Scientology organizations.7 I See, for example, the letter from David Gaiman to SirJohn Foster cited in Foster, op. cit..p. 34. This is one clear example of the exoteric versus the esotenc presentation of Scientology. While it may be true that Hubbard desired to explore ancient civiliza- tions, this can bave been only a very minor part of the Sea Org's purpose. Z Foster, op. cit..p. 35m 7 Aduance, 7, n.d..n.p. ' LBana Hubbard, 'What is the Sea Org?', mmmeo (15 March 1968). 5 Leafiet, no publisher (1972). S 'the JVew Ciuilization, 12 ( 1972), p. 3. ' The ownership of the vessels of the Sea Org is something of a mystery. Herbert Parkhouse, a senior Church executive, teshfied in Church of Scientology of California Inc. v. Bernard Green, etc.. op. cit..that the vessels of the Sea Org were owned by a corporation known as Operations and Transport Services Ltd, which also receives fees paid by students for Sea Org and other advaneed courses. Parkhouse testified that in the Washington Church to the HCO Exec Sec, the Org Exec Sec and the Public Exec See, the Board of Trustees, whose decisions she could veto, the President of the Executive Council, and that she had ultdmate authority in administrative matters. The Sea Org sends its officers to individual orgs with unlimitd pov9rs to handle a. Ethics b. Tech c. AdminP The vessels of the Sea Org are surrounded with an aura of mystery and secrecy The whereabouts of the Flag Ship on which Hubbard resides is kept a closely guarded secret even from rank and file Scientologists.t 'Missions' are despatched from the Sea Org to take command of organizations with 'do vn-statishcs', to remedy the situation. Among their 'unlimited powers' is that of superior authority to the land organization execubves. For erample:...as per HCO POL zoJune 1968, the senior Ethics Officer on the planet is the International Chief Ethirs Officer WW. OVER THE CHIEF E/O ARE THE MASTERS AT ARMS OF THE SEA ORG.s The sen-ices of the Sea Org Missions are paid for at far from meagre rates by the organizations concerned.4 Advanced organizations, that is those that provide upper-level training and OT courses, are located aboard Sea Org vessels or othenvise staffed by Sea Org personnel. The members of the Sea Org are completely committed followers of Hubbard. Recruits are required to sign a 'bilhon year contract' on entry,9 are paid little more than pocket money,9 and are subject to more severe discipline i L Ron ubbard, CO Polioy L9tr, Issue 11, 8 Februan 1968 (rny emphasis. I L. Ron Hubbard, UCO Policy Ldter, Issue 11, 8 February 1968 (my emphasis). 9 Interview. 9 Tom Moore, Master of Arms, AOLA, 'Subject: Corditiors Ord6rs' (mimeo), Departmene of the Master at Arms, The Advanced Organisation, Los Angeles, A Mission ofthe Sea Organisation-Flag, 12 August tg68. S This is evident, for etample, from the following (despite the confusion as to who is to pay whom): 'There has been a rumor started to the effect that AO [Advanced Organisation] owes 55000 to the L.A. [Los Angeles] Org for a Sea Org Mission which declared 2 Liabilities, 2 Doubts and I Enemy [EthiQ Conditions, See pp. 142-8 below]. These were said bv the S.P. [Suppressive Person] to be wrong conditions. These were in fact 100, correct as out Tech and out Ethies were found in L.A. The L.A. Org does in fact owe the Advanced Organisation 54,500 for an Ethics Mission and 520,ooo as an order from Flag.' Fran Deitsch, Supercargo, Flag Mission, Sea Org, 'Malicious rumor mongenng-S.P.', CO thicsOrd6rMsterctAn7rsD69t, 14August tg68. 9 'Sea Org requirements changed', lea6et, n.d.; and Foster, op. cit.. p. 35. ; 'A Sea Org member draws only about four pounds a week and his room and board'. the Auditor, 51 (9970). He also receives a maritime uniform which while 'optional when they are on land' (David Gaiman cited in Foster, op. cit..p. 34) is vsually worn as a mark of status in Scientology circles. various Orgs charter vessels from Operation and Transport Senviees for training and other purposes. Ibid..pp. s67-7t. 142 THE 3ECT: SCIETOLOUY than ordinary followers or staff membels I They also receive all training and auditing free.Z Sea Org personnel are generally trained on the most advanced procedures and constitute a powerful elite, commanding widespread respect within the movement.5 Officially, individual Sea Org members are employees of the vanous Churches of Scientology, and are subject, like all other employees, to the Board of Directors. My impression is, however, that the Sea Org, whether formally or informally, has a considerable commitment to Hubbard personally, and provides an executive force mobilizable by Hubbard to maintain his authority and carry out his po icy anrwhere in the world. It is also mobilized in public relations exercises to provide a good image for Scientology, or for OTC Ltd 'one designation for the company owning the Sea Org vessels), uhich is represented as a management training organization in various Mediterranean and l.atin .-merican countries. In somc of these, no link between OTC Ltd and Scientology is publicized. '1 he public relations exercises include an 'open-house programme', in which members of the public are given a tour of Sea Org vessels and 'V.I.P.s' are entertained. The purpose of this programme is detailed in a Sea Organization Blag Order Production target No 1: Ir.creased number of allies. Production target No 2: Existing allies more firmly allies. Produchon target o 3: Many wel andled visitors who leaYe the ship with an excellent reality on it and its operation, ofilcers and crew, who will spread this amniProduetion target No 2: Existing allis more firmly allies. Production target No 3: Many well-handled visitors who leave the ship with an excellent reality on it and its operation, officers and cre-v, who will spread this affinity and reality widely n thics The Scientology leadership has developed, over the history of the movement, an extensive system of social control. In essence, of course, all organization is a form of social control in that it establishes limits on what may or may not be done, where, and when. Hence, everything that has gone before in this chaptel is germane to the question of how the employees and followers of the movement are controlled. Beyond these practices, however, Scientology employs a formal machinery ol control, the Ethics system of the movement. The Ethics system is based upon a HCO Poliay l.etter, 26 September 1967 ' OEC, Vol. t, p. 88. Subject of course to the proziso that they are charged tot everything should thev decamp. J 'If almost any person in the Sea Organisation vere to appear in a Scientolog Group or Org he would be lionized, red-carpeted and Very-Important-Perzonec beyond belief', L. Ron Hubbard, 'The Sea Organisation', pamphlet, [Church o Scientologyj n.d. S We are unlikely to learn the true extent of Hubbards control over the organizatio of Scientology, and the Sea Org, until well after his death. 5 'Ship Open-House I rogramme, Sta Organisation Elag Ordsr, 29m, a August 1971. Danger Non-Existence Liability L)oubt Enemy Treason I Below Normal Operation, the individual or organization is liablc to penaldes, while above it they mav receive rewards The Condition of Liability, for example, is assigned when The being has ceased to be simply non-existent as a team member and has taken on the colour of an enemy. It is assigned where careless or malicious and knowing damage is caused to projects, organisations or activities. It is adjudicated that it is malicious and knowing because orders have been published against it or because it is contrary to the in[entions and actions of the remainder of the team or the purpose of the project or organisation,r list of 'Conditions' which could be said to indicate the state of glace of any individual or organization. The following Condihons are specified: Power Power Change Affluence Normal Operation An individual assigned to a Condition of Liability may not wear arty insignia or uniform or similar clothing to the group [sic] and must wear a dirty grey rag tied around the left arm. The formula of liability is: 1. Decide who are one s friends 2. Deliver an effective blow to the enemies of the group one has been pretending to be part of despite personal danger. 3 Make up the damage one has done by personal contribution far beyond the ordinary demands of a group member. 4. Apply for re-entry to the group by asking the permission of each member of it to rejoin and rejoining only by majority permission, and if refused, repeating (2) and 3) and (4) until one is allowed to be a group member again. The penalties attaching to the various Lower Conditions have varied since 19 is when they were inshtuted. The Condition of Enemy unhl late 1970 when penalties for Lower Condihons were said to have been abolished by the Org, indicated that the individual was a Suppressive Person . A Suppressive Person I L. Ron Hubbard, I/trodtdion to Scientolo thits (Scientology Publications Organisahon, Copenhagen 1970), p 23. 2 Ibid..p. 33t Ibid..pp. 33-4; for a reconsruction of the experiences of an individual in Liability, see aufman, op. cit..pp. 164-7. Foster, op. cit..p. 128. or Group is one that actively seeks to suppress or damage Scientology or: Scientologist by SuppreSsive Acts. Suppressive Acts are acts calculated t impede or destroy Scientology...n Apart from the other penalhes which included 'May be restrained or imprisoned',8 a Suppressive Person became 'Fair Game', By FAIR GAME is meant, without right for self possessions or position and no Scientologist may be brought before a Committee of Evidence or punished for any action taken against t Suppressive Person or Group during the period that person or group is 'fair game.3 May be deprived of property or injured by any means by any Scientologist without any discipline of the Scientologists. May be tricked, sued or lied to or destroyed.: In 1968 Hubbard issued a pollcy which ordered an end to the prachce of declaring people 'fair game', on the ground that it caused 'bad public relations.' He added, however, that this order did not 'cancel any policy on the treatment or handling of an S.P.'s Someone connected to a Suppressive Person was a Potential Trouble Source (PTS) and was required (until 1968) to 'handle' the S.P.. which seems to have meant showirg him the error of his ways, or to disconnect from him.S Disconnection involved cutting off all communication with the S.P. and de clanng one's intention to do so publicly. Disconnections were at one time pub ished in he Auditor. For eample: 1, Heath Douglas Creer, do swear that I do disavow and thoroughly disassociate claring one's intention to do so publicly. Disconnections were at one time published in 'Iht Auditor. For e7rample: I, Heath Douglas Creer, do swear that I do disavow and thoroughly disassoeiate myself from any overtly or covertly planned contact or arsociation with J. Roscoe Creer and Isabell Hodge Creer or anyone demonstrably guilty of Suppressive Aets (as described in HCO Policy Letters, March 1965). I understand that any breach of the above pledge will result in my being declared immediately a suppressive person. sigmed H. D. Creer.' Hubbard, Introduction to Scirntolr7y Ethios, op. cit..p. 48. ' Foster, op. cit..p. 128. t L. Ron Hubbard, Inlroduction to Sintoloy Ethies (Publications Organisation Wurld Wide, Edinburgh 1968), p. 49. : L. Ron Hubbard, HCO Poliey Letter, 18 October 1966, cited in Foster, op. cit..p. 129 The eoteric interpretation of this presented by public relations officials of the movement is that it meant no more than that the individual no longer received the proteetlon of the movement's ethieal codes. This is an interpretation which employs al hermeneutics to whieh I am not privy, seeming to be contradicted both by the word on the page, and by aetiDns taken against those regarded as enemies of the movement S Foster, op. cit..p 129. Although it was 'Poliey' to require the PTS to handle or disconnect, I have copie of Ethics Orders (one of which appears to have been validated by Hubbard), whiel order disconnection t0ul tourt. This does not, however, appear to have heen usua pracrice. 7 the AudRor, 9, n.d..p. 8. More usually, a brief note was sent to the S.P. by anyone who might be ordered or feel inclined to do so. 12.4.68 G-HI hereby disconnect from you A-L- ts.4.68 From M-STo HDear GI hearby disconnect rom you. M-S-.3 An individual could be required to disconnect from a relative, friend or a total stranger. Some interviewees who had been declared S.P. received as many as 200 disconnecting letters.3 Organiations or smaller sub-units could be assigned a Condition if they persistently manifested doun-statistics, employed 'out-tech' or 'out-admin'. When such a Lower Condition is assigned to an Org, its personnel are required to work longer hours, receive reduced pay and are liable for more severe ethics treatment. Practices similar to disconnection are relatively common among sectarian movements. Deviants or defectors from groups such as the Amush are 'banned', or 'shunned'. The Christadelphians practice 'disfellowshipmenths In each case, the practice involves the exclusion of the individual from effective interaction with the believers. He may not be allowed to enter the Church or to take communion, and believers in good standing may not be permitted to communicate with him. The ban usually extends even to members of his own family. When repentance has been appropriately signified and the elders or congregation agree, the individual may once again be accepted back into fellowship. Whole congregations might sometimes be 'disfellowshipped' .3 Conditions are normally assigned by an Ethics Officer. The Ethics Officers are located in the HCO Division, and their appointment is subject to approval by Hubbard on whose behalf they directly administer ethics. The actual authority on whieh Ethies operates, no matter who signs the order, u LRH.' Diseonnection letters provided by an informant. Ibid. One formerly prommnent figure in the movement received over 4oo. OEC, Vol. o, p. 195. S On the Amish, seeJ A Hostetler, Amish Society (Johns Hopkins Press, 1968). On the Chnstadelphians, see Bryan R Wilson, Sects ali Sociey (Heinemann, London, 61). ' Ibid. OEC, Vol. I, p. 4g6. Ethics O fficers are looked on by me as my Ethics Officers and none may be appointed without my okay with a review of their record by myseh I The Ethics Officers act as an internal police force and a substantial body of such personnel are maintained by each Org. By recent experience and tests in the Sea Org It requires a ratio of one Ethics Officer for every 20 people being handled in or by an Org.' As well as a police force, there e:cists an established judicial structure operated through 'Committees of Evidence' and 'Courts of Ethics', with Hubbard as the final court of appeal. Ethics are adrninistered on the basis of the mozement's Ethics Codes which classify a wide range of acts as Errors, Misdemeanours, Crimcs and High Crimes (Suppressize Acts). Among the Crimes are such offences as Not directly reporting dagrant departures from International Board policy in a section, unit, department, organization, zone or Division.' By this means Org personnel are constrained to monitor and control each other. Allying Scientology to a disrelated practice.5 Organizing or allowing a gathering or meeting of staff members or field auditors or the public to protest the orders of a senior G Only indiuiduul petitions are permitted, thus atomizing the personnel and Only individual petitit ns are permitted, thus atomizing the personnel and preventing organized opposition to, or constraint upon, the authority of the leadership. Heckling a Scientology Supervisor or leeturer.' Among the High Grimes Hubbard specifies are: Proposing, advising or voting for legislation or ordinances, rules or laws directed towards the Suppression of Scientology.s Testifying hostiley [sic] before state or public inquiries into Scientology to suppress it. Bringing civil suit against any Scientology Oreanisation IG Testifying as a hostile witness against Scientology in publicP' Publicly resigning staff or executive position in protest or with intent to suppressP I Ibid.Ibid..p. 482. J L. Ron Hubbard, Inlroduction to Scientology E(hics (Second edition), Scientology Publications Organization, Copenhagen, Denmark, rg70, p. 42. ' Staff members are also encouraged to report on each other for idleness, error, failure to carry out policy, etc. See OEC, Vol. O, pp. t66-7. 5 L R on Hubbard, /nbvduction to Scientology Ethics, op. cit..p. 4. D Ibid..p. 46. ' Ibid..p. 47 · Ibid..p. 49. D Ibid. IG Ibid. 1l Ibid. 12 Ibid. Anyone performing any of these acts is a Suppressive Person, and until 1968 was 'fair game'. Ethics are administered by means of Ethics Orders. These may be issued for the most trivial or the most serious offences. HCO Ethics Order To: Those Concerned Date 16 August 1965 From: Ethics Officer No F-g Subject: Suspension from Staff. Mary Austin is hereby suspended from Foundation Staff for creating DEV T [Dev T developed and unnecessary traffic] on August 13, 1965, by stopping ETHICS OFFICER, Anne Fewell, in her Route of Business to pay a personal compliment, and on the samc date, distracting D. of T. [Director of Training] John Gillespie's attention trom making out chits and other reports. To: Those Concerned From: Ethics Officer Subject: Disconnection Order Anne Fewell Ethics Officer, FoundationP HCO Ethics Order Date 6 September 1965 >No 69 I . Dick Saunders is hereby ordered to totally disconnect from literature issued by the Food and Drug Administration as it is restimulative to him. The FDA literature he comes in contact with is not to be read by him at all. [Seal.] Anne Fewell [Seal. Anne Fewell Emhics Officer. E.O. 3.7 AOLA Date 7 December 1969 Harvey Thorpe is assigned a condition of Doubt for spreading false reports about the location of Flag. He is to apply the formula immediately.5 Wn of Expulsion Date 7 December rg6g 1. MaxineJohnson and Michael Childs, practitioners, New York City, no longer being in agreement with or willing to support the stated aims of Scientology, are on this date duly expelled from the Church of Scientology of California. 2 They have aided and abetted Bernard Green, who was duly expelled from the Church, and condoned his erroneous Counselling of parishioners v hen he was not ordained to do so. 3 All certificates and awards issued to them by the Church of Scientology are hereby cancelled. . therefore, they are expelled from the Church of Scientology and may not receive spiritual counselling or training in any Church of Scientology until hey Cea/,Vcus,issuenumberunknown(lg6g),p.s. 'Cle2/JVeuos,issuenumberUnknown(lg6g)p s THE SUCT: SCirNTOLOGY have performed an zct of contrition and availed thentselves of resources to re-enter the Church. They mzy not enter any Church of Scientology. 5. They are dec]ared in no condition, as their actions indicate that mhey are below any condition currertly assignable.l While the sanctions for Ethics offences have been much modified in recent years, during the mid-lg60s the leadership briefly flirted with the use of coercive sanchons. Provision existed within the Ethics codes for the restriction of movement of those who contravened ethics regulations2 and former members have claimed that oflenders were locked up for periods on Sea Org vessels and at the Edinburgh Ofli es of the movement.3 A prachce known as 'Instant Ethics' ·vas employed at one time. This consisted of throwing an offender over the side of a Sea Org vessel sometimes with his hands or feet tied. On land organiations this practice was modified to throwing the offender in the lake at Saint Hill or throwing buckets of water over the offender elsewhere. Schismatics, seceders an t social control The most severe treatment appears to have bcen reserved for schismatics and seceders. Indeed an analysis of the development of social control within the movement clearly suggests that the threat of schism and secession was one of the major factors leading to the emergence of a severe formal machinery of social control. Until 1959 such formal control mechanisms were merely rudimentary. Inthisyear,however, severaloftheleadingexecutivesinthemovementdefected including Hubbard's eldest son L. Ron Hubbard Jr. ('Mbs'). Their defection was not accompanied by heresy, however. Hubbard's son left his Org office to take up more profitable private prachce independent of the organization. Hubbard initially attributed these defections to lack of sufficient auditing of his executivesS but he shortly came to the view that mere auditing was not sufficient to avert further serious defections. An attempt was made to isolate defectors by threatening to cancel the certificates of anyone giving them supportq and the practice of 'security checking' was instituted. Security checking involved asking an individual a series of questions while watching for 'meter reads' on the E-meter, to locate questions which would not 'clear' indicating that the individual being checked was withholding sometffing concerning that subject. Ibid. ' L. Ron Hubbard, Tenalties for lower condifion', HCO Policy Letter, Ul July 1968. Those in a conditmn of Doubt may be confined in or be barred from premise-'. The exBtence of a 'dungeon at the latter was also alleged by Alexander i!/fitchell, Sundoy rimes, 12 Eebruary rg6g. The praetice of 'Instant Ethics is portraved photographically in the Auditor, 4 (1968). 6 L. Ron Hubbard, Individuation, lecture 26 of the Eirst Melbourne Advanced Clinical Course, u5 November 1959 (tape-recordings). L. Ron Hubbard, 'Cancellation of Certificates, HCO Policy Letter, r3 May 1960. On a Security Check sheet you only note those questions that wouldn't clear. If something won't clear or cool offthe person is a security ruk. If he does tell you and clear it, if it's a heavy crime, note it. Remember as a security checker you are not merely an observer, or an auditor, you are a detective.' Among the questions asked on 'Sec checks' were: z. Are you a pervert? o. Areyouguiltyofanymajorcrimesinthislifetime? 1 l. Have you been sent here knowingly to injure Scientology? 12. Are you or have you ever been a Communist?s A security check to be administered to students before acceptance on courses contained the following questions: 2. Do you or your close familv currently have any connection vrith organisations violently opposed to L. on Hubbard ? g. Are you here purposely to upset or damage Scientology or Scientology organua- hons ? 9. Do you intend to quit this course just as soon as you have achieved your own ends ? I During 1962, the Johannesburg HASI appeared unresponsive to Hubbard's ordersS and arnong his efforts to restore control, he invented a particularly stringent security check known familiarly as the 'Jo'burg'. This security check contained 50 quesbons including: Are you guilty of anything' stringent security check known familiarly as the 'Jo'burg'. This Sf' contained 150 questions including: Are you guilty of a 2Ything ? Do you have a secret you are afraid I'll find out? Have you ever auaulted anyone, practised cannibaliim, been in gaol ? Do you have any overb on L. Ron Hubbard, Mary Sue Hubbard? curity check Have you ever had any unkind thoughb about L. Ron Hubbard or Scientology ? Do you plan to steal a Scientology organisation?' In 1964 a movement initially called Compulsions Analysis was founded by two individuals who had briefly been associated with Scientology in London, Robert and Mary Ann de Grimston. This movement, later known as The Process, and as the Church of the Final Judgement, began as an eclectic synthesis partly based on Scientology, employing the Ei-meter and many basic Scientology techniques. It later developed in altogether different L. Ron Hubbard, 'Security checks', HCO Bulletir. 26 May 1960. 2 Ibid. ' L. Ron Hubbard, 'HGC Pre-processing security check', CO Poicy Letter, 2g October 196n L. Ron Hubbard, 'HCO WW Security form sA, HCO Policy Letter, I November 61 . 6 L. Ron Hubbard, 'Ron'sJournal', Co /nfOTmetiOT Letter, 27 October 1962. L. Ron Hubbard, 'The only valid security check', CO Poicy Lctter, 22 May 1961, cited in Andenon, op. cit..pp. Ig3 9 150 THE SECT: SCIENTOLOGY directions,l moving toward an hierarchical occult order with a flexible system of beliefs, practices, and location.5 Neither the defection of Hubbard's son, nor the appearance of Compulsions Analysis had any profound effect on Scientology. Independent practitioners could not, in the long term, compete effectively with Hubbard and the organization while they remained orthodox in their practice, since only in the Org could the client be assurcd of receiving the most recent techniques and training. Senior executives who defected could initially secure a sizeable clientele on the basis of the charisma they had acquired in office. When out of contact with the organization, this charisma typically faded rather rapidly, and the clientele declined particularly in the face of the threat from Hubbard that those who supported non-approved practitioners would receive no future service from the organization. Compulsions Analysis never posed any serious threat to the organization. It has aimed its fluid and vanable message at a particularly youthful, upper and upper-middle class following, and its leaders made no attempt to win over Hubbard's followers. Precisely because it developed an heretical theory and practice and because its initial recruits were sought among Scientologists, Amprinistics, which emerged to prominence in 1965, posed a particularly acute threat. Ampnnistics was the first major heresy to affect the movement since the days of Dianetics. Harry Thompson, its founder, had been a prominent Scientology practitioner. Early in the 19605 he began to formulate a set of theories and practices at vanance with those of Hubbard, although these were not generally publicized until late in 1964.a Early in 1965, Thompson and his associates many of whom were also prominent Scientology auditors began offering professional training in Amprinistics (for 200 guineas in England and $1000 in the United States). Scientology mailing lists were employed to solicit support for the new movement. The heresy was well-timed. Social control within Scientology was becoming increasingly rigorous, as the Ethics system was applied with increasing severity. Many of the Scientologists approached thought that Amprinistics might be worth trying. The incipient schism within the movement rapidly came to Hubbard's attention, and his response was draconian. Ampnnistics was savagely attacked. Its leaders were characterized as thieves and sexual deviants. The techniques vvere clai.ned to be composed of outmoded Scientological prachces: Daily hvliil, 8 December 1965; Vews of thc World, 3 May l970; Sindiy relegriph, July 1966; Menhl Hcalth (Spring 1967). Interviews with Master5 of The Process; 'The Process', \ental Heilth (Spring 1967), pp 17-21; Da;ly hlail, 8 December 196$; JVeuss of the Wirld, 3 May 1970. See also Ihe movement-s publicly distributed magazine, 7 he Processean. George Malko, Scientolo y: the JOt2 .i2eligion (Dell, New York, rg70), pp. 136-67; 1 am mdebted to Miss Sheila Hoad for making available to me a number of documents concerning Amprinistics, and detailed notes on the history and belief-system of this bhort-lived heresy. ' L. Pon Hubbard, Amprinistics, HCO EJecvtireLetter, z7 September, 196$ OCIAL ORC.NtZAT10: AND SoCIAL CONTROL l5l We don't object to Dianetics and Scicntology being used. We prefel it ro have its right name. But we like to have it in clean hands. There's been too much betrayal in this universe already and for fellows whose records include homosexuality and theft to start up a fuss with t4 year old technology is a bit thick l Loyal followers werc enjoined to report to the Ethics Officer anyone they knew who v as going to this group: Treatment They are each fair game, can be sued or harassed. H-can be barred out of any Commonwealth t ountry or England as he was the subject of a deportation order l;om E;ngland and his file has come alive again in the Home Secretary's Ohfice. H-T-'s wives and vietims are always looking for him to have him arrested. W-is a set-up for arrest as a homosexual. Any meeting held by them should be torn up. The names of any persons attending should be collected alld they should be labelled SP as they have left Scientology. These people are SP because they are seeking to avoid auditing and retain their withholds. Once labelled, these persons ·vill not thcn be covered by amnesty and will never be admitted to further trahling or ?rocessing. Persons messing then.selves up with Amprinistics selfaudir and restim should be refused any assistance. If these persons move into your area act through any agency you can to have thcm deported or arrested on whatever grounds .5 Those who attended Amprinistics meetings claim that they found themselves spied upon by Scientology personnel, and shortly after were dec]ared Suppressive Persons, Enemies and Fair Game.3 Amprinistics only remained a potential threat to Scientology for a very brief period. The central Core of Thompson's disciples became disaffected when he began introducing elements into the belief system which accorded him a superior 'godly' status. He appears, moreover, to have lacked the requisite skills to institutionalize the movement's following. He relied to a gTeat exteDt on direct personal communication and in his absence his dispersed following fell away. When Thompson's Core disciples broke away they organized the New Principles Society and attempted to revive interest among the remaining followers of Amprinistics. This new gTOUp operated primarily hrough a correspondence course, but it progressively moved into financial difficulues. In 1971 one of the remaining core disciples of Amprinistics and its developments, Sheila Hoad, formed the Society for the Promotion of Principles. The be]ief systems of these developments from Scientology have moved increasingly far from their origins until the philosophy and educational system of Miss Hoad's Society bear little relation to Scientology. They have correspondingly proved progressively less of a threat .o the Scientology organization. Several other schismatic and heretical movements have dcveloped from Scientology. One prominent secession was led by Charles Berner in 1965. He Ibid. ' Ibid. The names of the individuals have been omitted here since the statement is most probably libellous. ' Interviews. initially split with Hubbard over the attempts of the movement leadership to exert greater control over his autonomous 'franchised' Church. Shortly after this schism, Berner began introducing new ideological elements and techniques and founded Abilitism.1 Later he moved closer to Eastern philosophy and founded the Anubhava School of Enlightenment. Dianology or Eductivism was started as an independent heresy by a formerly prominent Scientologist, Jack Horner.s It has developed relatively fittle from Scientology theory and practice, and it is perhaps for this reason that it has appealed to many Scientologists who have left the movement in protest against its severe internal controls. Other secessionary practices have been started by former practitioners who have defected from the movement or who have been expelled from it. Many of these non-approved practitioners are in contact with, and occasionally cooperate with each other. However, despite some attempts to form a more organized alliance, no formal organization has emerged. Usually, while their initial form of practice is close to that of Scientology, it progressively diverges further according to the personal predilections of the leader. It would appear, however, that all of these marginal practices have a common antipathy to the severe social control employed by Scientology, None, as far as I have been able to determine, emDloys anyhing approximating to the Ethics system of Scientology. These movements dispLay the re-emergence of cultic tendencies within Scientology, much fike the New Thought Movement which burgeoned around Christian Science.3 It is undoubtedly the challenge that these schismatic and heretical movements represent to the sectarian, aumoritarian, and dogmatic nature of Scientology that has led to the animosity visited upon them by the Org. The leaders of several of these movements have complained of harassment whuch they allege to stem from the Org. This harassment in some cases has been relatively trivial as in that of a practitioner who, until recently, continued to promote and practice Dianetics, and who often suffered from persistent spurious telephone I On Abilihsm, see Robert S. Ellwood, Rligious and Splritual Grous in Modtrn Amaica (Prentice Hall, NewJersey, 1973), ppm76-o. 5Jack Horner, Fductivism and rOu (The Personal Creative Ereedoms Foundation, Westwood, California, 1971); Jack Horner, Dianology a ssttr sridg< to Pasonal Crsatiui Frtcdom (The Associahon of International Dianologists, California, 1970); see also the movements periodical, Alttrnatiuts. 5 This cultic orientation is evident, for example, in the following statement of a schismauc who has moved some way from his Scientologioal origins in his current practice, incorporating Yoga and meditational techniques, as well as many of his own ideas: 'Millions oE people have a role to play in the spiritual growth of the people of this planet. I don't have anything speeial. I prefer my own methods. I like them and they're good. If I see something thats better than mine, i take it and incorporate it.' nterview. SOCIAL ORGANIZATION AND SOCIAL CONTROL 153 calls from young people inquinng whether they were speaking to the Scientology Organization. These calls ceased when he complained to the Scientology leadership. In other cases, schismatic leaders have found the bookings for halls in which they were to speak mysteriously cancelled. Yet another case reported to me by several independent witnesses involved a false announcement in a California newspaper that a prominent defector was to give a public lecture. When the audience arLived they were subjected to a barrage of stcreopbonic cacophony and chanting which included what were construed as threats against a local schismatic leader. It is alleged by my informants that Sea Org personnel were the organizeLs of this event. Some schismatic leaders claim their offices have been broken into and mailing lists and pre-clear files stolen. After the disappearance of mailing lists from the office of one schismahc leader, the individuals whose names were on the list were circulated with documents which were designed to suggest that this leader and his movement were close to bankruptcy, and which made other claims that would have been a source of embarrassment to him. His forged signature was appended to these documents. Copies of what appeared to be a page of the Los Angeles imes were also circu- lated, containing a story which reported the conviction of another schismatic for criminal se:cual offences. This story was a complete fabrication and had never appeared in the Los Angeles imes.l The eistence of such independent leaders and their movements are seen as a threat by the Scientology leadership without regard to their size. The schismatic groups are numerically insignificant in relation to Scientology. For all its bureaucratic organization, Scientology is a charismaic movement. The doctrine is subordinate to the character of the leader who, since first mtroducing Dian- etics, has modified the doctrine frequently without precipitating any significant OppOsition. Joseph Nyomarkay has argued that whereas in movements based around an ideology, such as Communism, fachons within the movement seek to capture the ideologY and in consequence effective schisms may develop around differing interpretations, this is not possible in charismatically led movements. In this case the belief-svstem is subordinate to the leader. Factions must therefore compete for the leader's support since only he, and not the belief-system, pmvides legitimacy. Hence in the Nazi party, factions appealed to the leader for support and legitimation. When Hitler supported one particular view, opponents either ceased their opposition or left the movement as individuals, In the case of Communism, however, appeal was to the legitimacy provided by the belief-system, and factions defended their own interpretation of the ideology against each other, leading to schisms in which the schismatic could claim to be offering the 'correct' interpretation.a Scientology's schismatics, unable to I Letter to the author from Richard W. 6mith, Assistant to the Editor, Los Angelss rimes, 7 May 197 ;. SJoseph yomarkay, Charisma and actionaiism in the Nazi Parly (University ot Minnrsota Press, Minneapolis, 1967). capture the leader, the Source, have never carried with them more than a handful of Hubbard's following. The movement leadership has reacted violently against independent practitioners and movements competing on the basis of principles and practices drawn from Scientology, and to any threat to its exclusive control over the movement, its organization, or its belief-system. One clear example is the case of a group of Scientologists who were distributing 'Advanced materials' at a reduced price. A widely promulgated Ethics Order declared them the 'Enemies of mankind, the planet and all life' and ordered the folloving sanctions. 4. They are fair game. 5. o amnesty may ever cover them. 6. If they ever come to a Qual Division they are to be run on reverse processes. 7. Any Sea Org member contacting any of them is to use Auditing Process R2 45. 8. The Criminals Prosecution Bureau is to find any and all crimes in their pasts and have them brought to court and prison I Maintaining a watchful eye on heretics, schismatics and prominent defectors is among the dubes of the Guardian's Office 2 Schismatics, heretics and defectors who publicize their disaffection present challenge to Scientolog-, by indicating that the structure or beliefs of th movement have been found less than perfect by insiders who have experience it sufficiently to have an authoritative view of its operation. Unlike the outsid cntic, they can not easily be shrugged off as merely ignorant. By criticizing the movement or establishing competing organizations or belief-systems, they offer a threat to the structure of power within Scientology, and to the validity of the social reality it maintains.a offcr a thrc.a t o Ar AA.. _ c .._ . ... .... Hubbard has exhibited a great deal of concern to ensure that senior executives within the movement do not become sufficiently powerful to challenge his owa authority, or to lead away any substantial following on secession. Senior executives have been purged when they appeared to be opposing Hubbard on I L. Ron Hubbard, 'Rackets exposed', HCO Ethics Order, 6 Ilarch 1968. Auditing process R2-4s refers to a Joke Hubbard once made that there was only one certain way to produce a 'one-shot' clear! S 'Enemies' of Scientology are the responsibility of the Guardian's Omce. OEC, Vol. O, p. 260. Such enemies, as 'Suppressive persons' are construed as beuond the protection of the organization. See OEC, Vol. 1, p. 554: no Committee oE Evidence may be called to punish any Scientologist for any offences of any kind against the suppressive person.... The homes, property, places and abode2 of persons who have been active in attempting to suppress Seientology or Scientologists are all beyond any protechon of Sclenmlogy Ethics.... a Dwight Harshbarger, The individual and the social order: notes on the management of heresy and deviance in complex orgaDisations uman Reiations, 26, z (1973) pp. 251-69. organizational or ideological issuesd Frequently thereafter they would be casl gated in movement publicahons as criminals, Communists or sexual deviants. Removing authority figures and charging them with deviance legitimated theil dismissal and provoked less questioning of the prevailing social order than charging them with heresy alone.3 The tendencv to impute immorality to defectors has also been characteristic of Christian Science. Mrs Eddy had Danirl Spofford, a former close associatt who had turned against her, expelled from the Ghristian Scientists' Association 'for immorality and as unworthy to be a member', and a notice to this effect was published in the Nevwburyport press.3 Mrs Eddy equated any disloyalty with 'immorality', and was reported on one occasion to have charged a woman prominent in the Boston Church with adultery, on the grounds, she later discovered, rhat 'You have adulterated the Truth; what are you, then, but an adultress?' Defectors and heretics were accused of practising Mlesmerism and even v. itchcraft. 5 Conclusions After the collapse of Dianetics, Hubbard sought to exercise greater control ove his new movement. He organ.zed it on centralized lines and arrogated authority by eliminating the lay basis of the practice and instituting a professional basis. Subsequently, professionals were transformed into organizationalfuncfionaries as Hubbard undermmned their independent authority and sought to eliminate 'private practice' independent of the Org. An elaborate bureaucratic machinery was created and an internal disci plinary system developed, particularly in response to the emergence of heresy and the defection of senior officials. Organizational controls were increased as Hubbard sought to avoid the earlier individualism of Dianetics and its accompanying organizational fragility. A high degree of substitutability was built into the bureaucratic posts of the organization, so that neither in the bureaucracy, nor in the ranks of the professional practitioners of the movement, should there be any locus of authority which might effectively challenge his own. As a further safeguard, an elite corps, the Sea Org, was established with international authority to which national leaders could be subjected. Dissenters within the For examples, see the cases of Helen O'Brien and Alphia Hart discussed earlier. For such attacks on former senior execubves, see among the multitude oE such eases, Ablity, minneoed edition, no number, no date, p. 3, copy in the author's possession; Anderson, op. eit.. p. 137; Ros Vosper, 'SubJeet: John MeMaster writ of expulsion', HCO 7i:lhics Order, r9 December 1969. S Ernest S. Bates and John V. Dittemore, Mary Ba-er Eddy: the rruth and the rradihon (George Routledge e Sons, London, 1933), p. 185. I Georgine Milmine, the if e of Mary Baker G. Eddy and the lstory of Chrishan Scienee (BakerBookHouse,GrandRapids,Michigan, Ig7l),p.a3s,. · Ibid.; Bates and Dittemore, op. cit. movement were expelled, and those who continued to challenge Hubbard' authonty after leaving the movement were roundly attacked in its pub]ications. Scientology displays a fusion of charismahc and bureaucratic domination also evident in some other manipulahonist sects. It was a notable feature of Christian Science dunng the lifetime of Mrs Eddy, and appears to be characteristic of the contemporary Soka Gakkai. The latter case diifers from those of Scientology and Christian Science. In these two movements the charismatic leader gradually developed an elaborate bureaucratic machine to cope with the administration of large, widely dispersed movements. The Soka Gakkai, however, was bureaucrahc from the beginning and charisma was only attributable to later Presidents of the movement, rather than to its founder.' As Scientology has become institutionalized, Hubbard has been less obliged to rely on a highly centralized authority structure as a means of control. The implementation of a high degree of formalization of rules and procedures made it less necessary for him to maintain a direct personal command of operations, and permitted him to delegate authority to other family members and to members of his bureaucratic staff. Peter Blau has argued that Formalised procedures and centralised authority may not be two expressions of the same underlying emphasis on strict discipline, but they may rather be two alterna. hve mechanisms for limiting the arbitrary exercise of discretion.S Analysis of Scientology, however, supports the more familiar view that centralization and formalizahon may sometimes not only both be expressions of the same emphasis on strict disciphne desired by the leadership of an organization, but may indeed be implemented sequentially as the leader relinquishes direct personal control over day-to-day operation of the movement or organization, and as his charisma becomes routinized.a Formalised procedurts and centrahsed authority may not be two expressionS of the same underlying emphasis on strict discipline, but they may rather be two altemative meebanisms for brmting the arbitrary exercise of discretion.' IJames W. White, the Sokagakkai and Mass Society (Stamford University Press, Stanford, California, 197O). ' Peter M. Blau, 'DeceDtralisation in bureaucracies', in Mayer Zald ed..Powt7 in Organisations (Vanderbit University Press, Nashville, Tennessee, 1970), p. 152. On the routinization of chansma, see Max Weber, Chansma, in Hans Gerth and C. Wright Miils, eds, rom Max Weber: ssays in Sociology (Routledge & Kegan Paul, London, 1970) 6. THE SCIENTOLOGICAL CAREER: FROM CASUAL CLIENT TO DEPLOYABLE AGENT Scientologv possessei an 'enrolment economy'. Its economic base is dependent upon the sale of services in the form of auditing and training, books, E-meters and memberships. Like any sales organization, therefore, Scientology is faced with the problems of marketing the available range of products locating and attracting potential consumerS, and creating 'brand loyalty' in all, with mobilizing commitment The movement leadership has always displayed a highly commercial orientation in its operations. The beliefs and practices of Scientology have been seen as a valuable commodity, worth whatever the market will bear, and to be distributed wherever a market can be found. Ree7uiment Recruitment has always been a major imperative for the organizatiOn in the view of its leadership....promote mtil the doors cave in because of the number of people and don't even...promote until the floors cave in bceause of thc number of pcople and don't even take notiee of that, jujt keep on promoting.l With the disappearance of the mass following generated by his article in Astoundin and by his book MSIH, and after establishing internal control of the movement, Hubbard increasingly turned his attention to the problem of recruitment. In a Professionel Auditor's Bulletin distributed to prachtiOnerS in 1956, Hubbard outlined 'Three methods of dissemination'. The first of these he labelled 'I will talk to anyone'. The gut of this plan uj to plac in newspaprj an ad whieb says 'personal counselling I will talk to anyone for you about anything. Phone Rev so-and so btwn hour and hour'...If it uj th purpoS' of th minijtr jimply to solve the problem of the preclear thus phoning, he can of courje cancel out his clientele with the I OIC, Vol. O, p. 83. greatest of ease. This however is not his purpose. His purpose i5 to get this individual into a weekly group processing unit...He should not talk to the person in such a way as to ease the problem. This may be the last problem this person has and it would be a disser ice to simply solve it as easily as that. One makes something of the problem, not makes nothing of it...at the interview the minister places in the hands of the person material relating to the vvork of the church group which the minister is actually conducting every Sunday morning...Of course it stands to reason that any auditor who has a fairly good sied group which is undergoing free processingwillgetfromthegroupmanycandidatesfor(l)personalaudltingand (2) a basic course in Scientology for which charge can be made.' The second method was labelled 'Illness researches'. This again reqmred the placement of a newspaper advertisement as foliows: 'Polio Victims. A research foundation, investigating polio, desires volunteers suffering from the after effects of that illness to call for examblation at address'. When the people arrived, usually with a phone interview first, they were immediately given ahout three hours of auditing...We did this for polio victims, arthritics and were about to do it for asthmatics v-hen the surging success of the project frightened various individuals who had other plans for Dianetics...He [the auditor] would not tell the person he was doing other than investigating the cause. He would tell them he was not interested in curing their polio but that educationally he could of course improve their ability to walk or breathe or whatever....One would then follow up the same principles of group [sic. He would eompose a group of such people....From this group he would tell them they could have free group processing and he would sell them individual auditing.., ,s The Third method recommended by Hubbard at this time was called 'Casualty contact' . One takes every daily paper he can get his hands on and cuts from it every story whereby he might have a preclear. He either has the address in the story itself or he gets the address as a minister from the newspaper. As speedily as possible he makes a personal call on the bereaved or injured person....He should represent himsetf to the person or to the penson's family as a minister whose compassion was compelled by the newspaper story concerning the penson. He should then enter the presence of the person and give a nominal assist, leave his card which states exactly where ehurch serviceS are held every Sunday and with the statement that a much fuller recovery is possihle by coming to these free services takes his departure. Some small percentage of the persons visited or their families will turn up in his group. Thus he will build a group and naturally from that group he will get a great many individual preclears.3 L.RonHubbard,'Threemethodsofdissemination', PtofessionelAuditor'sBulletm,73 (28 February tg56), pp 1-3. ' Ibid..pp 3-4. Helen O'Brien descnbes this practice in operation at the Wichita Foundation. Helen O'Brien, Dianetics in I.imbo (Whitmore Publishing Co..Philadelphia, 1966), pp. 34-7. L. Ron Hubbard, "Phree methods of dissemination', op. cit..pp. 4-5. THL SClrNTOLOGlCAL CARLLR 159 As indicated ear]ier, however, Hubbard had begun to feel that group auditing was an ineffective means of gathenng a permanent following. Individuals received group processing and ceased to attend or to devote further resources to Scientology. Auditors are pleaded with not to go on group processing people. Group processing people results in better individuals, but not better individuals for Scientology...It is not enough to make people feel better. What we're trying to do is to reach out into the publicP Hence from the midl 950S on, Hubbard advocated the establishment of Colleges of Personal (or Personnel) Efficiency which would offer basic courses in the more exoteric aspects of Scientology at a nominal fee, from the recruits to which paying preclears and students could be drawn 2 Hubbard realized that direct personal contact with prospective customers was not always necessary. Impersonal advertising might serve as well, if individuals could be located who were predisposed to purchase a commodity of this kind. In 1964, for example, Hubbard pointed out to the organization's executives the effechveness of advertising by the Rosicrucians, and ordered a survey of all magazines and newspapers to find where the Rosicrucians placed advertisements. He then proposed that advertisements for his next book should be placed in the same locations.3 He also advocated the purchase of mailing lists, which could be uscd for the distribution of promotional material. The kinds of mailing could be used for the distnbution of promotional material. The kinds of mailing lists which he recommended for purchasing provide an indication of his own view of the market for Scientology: The mailing lists of most interest would be: n Those of mystical groups. 2. Those of self-betterment groups. 3. Those of self-study groups. 4 Those of health groups. g. Those who subscribe to magazines of special interest to the above categories. 6. Recent buyers of books in the above categories.' Addresses of prospective customers were also secured through writing the name and address of every purchaser of any Scientology item on the receipt and its duplicates, and through mail-back cards enclosed with every volume on Scientology or Dianetics published by the organization. Initially Scientology staffwould write to all those whose names were collected in this way, to lapsed students and to preclears to try to interest them in further items or services. In more recent years the post of Letter Registrar has eLuerged, whose job it is to contact such individuals, and get them into communication and 'on Ibid..p. n Profession2i 21udtor's Buiietin, 78179 (April 19$6). L. Ron Hubbard, EerutiDr Letter, October 1964. ' L. Ron Hubbard, Poiy LHter, 6 September 1966. lines' for Scientology services. Once one's name is on a mailing list, one is generally subjected to a barrage of letters and promotional matenals over many months. The letters are warm, friendly, 'personalized' by the use of first names, and often handwritten rather than printed or cyclostyled. For example: Dear Roy, Hello there ! Do you remember who is writing to you. I signed you up for the communication course. Hope you are applying the data you learnt at college or what- Whatsoever meaning you everyday life ! [sic !] As usual we are very busy here but do find time to enjoy the sun. Funny how the weather ehanges so often in England. One day you are roasting and the next day you know thick sweaters are needed. Today being the perfect example of what I mean. Well Roy, do drop me a line as I really would like to now what's happening your end of the line. Best wishes M-p_ Dist Exec Sec Fdn p.s. please excuse the terrible typing but this is the 73rd letter I have typed today and my fingers are achirgP Students and preclears waiting for services that is for an auditor, Ethics Officer, or some other official to become available are often expected to stuff addressed envelopes with promotional material for mailing out to potential customers. Promotional activities are also carried out by entertainers comcustomers. Promotional activihes are also carried out by entertainers com- mitted to Scientology. The Incredible String Band, a pop group, have distnbuted mail-back cards at their concerts which suggested the sender would learn more about the group, A pamphlet is received in return telling how the group members came into Scientology and suggesting the inquirer also try out the practice at his nearest Org, the address of which is supplied t As well as advertising in local and other newspapers and magazines, and whenever possible in the telephone book Yellow Pages, the central organizations of the movement have also sought to attract the general public through subway advertisements (New York) or through the offer of a 'Free Personality Test'. The inquirer would be given a booklet and test sheet for the 'Oxford Capacity Analysis', an approximation to a schedule for the production of a personality profile. The inquirer would complete the schedule and after it has been processed, he would be shown an impressive graph divided into 'Desirable' and 'Unacceptable' states for a variety of dimensions: 'Stable'-'UnstablelDispersed'; 'Composed'-'Nervous'; 'Capable'-'lnhibited'; 'Appreciative'-'Lack of Accord', etc. The sechons of the graph falling into the 'Unacceptable' category would be pointed out to him. He would be told that he had a problem there, and that Scientology could help him. He would be encouraged to take the first etter to the author. I am grateful to Gordon Marshall for bnnging ihis to my attention. course, available at a nominal fee, as quickly as he possibly could, or he might be encouraged to take individual auditing. A further method of recruitnnent that has been used is personal dissemination. Hubbard estab]ished a 'Dissemination Drill' to facilitate this mode of recruitment, following four stages: ( I ) Contct the individual (z) Handle him '...handle any attacks, antagonism, challenge or hostility that the individual might express towards you andlor Scientology'. (3) 'Find their ruin and selDage. lFind out what is 'Messing them up? It must be a condition that is real to the individual as an unwanted condibon, or one that can be made real to him'. (4) Bring to understending that Scientology can handle this problem.l The promotional material of the movement has aimed at a variety of interests and concerns. Much of it shows bright, happy, young people jubilant after completing auditing or a course. A general promotional magazine, 'the Auditor, which has been wideLy distributed to potential customers, tends to lay a great deal of visual and textual emphasis on the successful and creahve individuals who employ Scientology. Beneath a photograph of an attractive girl and the headline 'Top Model' is the following text: Carlyn Ericksen is a beauoful photographic model and actress from New York City. She has been doing TV commercials for four years shown nationwide in the States and has also done magazine and fashion wDrk. 'I love high randomity and doing ness especially something truly creative.' Carlyn, who was introducted to Scientology through a friend in tg68, as far as training goes, has done the HAS, the HQS and is now about to complete the Hubbard Standard Dianeties Course in New York.2 Beneath another photograph and the headline 'Jesus Christ Superstar': Famous aetor and mwician Peter Winsnes is one of the most recent celebrities to enter Scientology.a Dr Harry Wood, Professor of Art at Arizona State University has been applying Scientology concepts to his teaching of art.' Thesuccessfulbusinessmanandthescientisthavealsobeenusedaspromotional material: INDUSTRIALIST. Unsure whether hiz businers would expand and if he could handle the new problems growth implied, Ken Kirk of Adelaide, South Austraha enrolled on the HCA Course in rg65...] .FonHubbard,'DisseminationDrill',7htAuditor,22(lg67),p.3. he Audrtor, 7o 1971, p. 5. a 7e Aud,tor, 80 (1972) p5' 7he Audltor, 82 (rg72), p. 8. Since he became a Scientologist, the value of the company's equipment has jumped from Ss,ooo to $2s,000. PHYSICIST Research Associate at Hansen Physics Laboratory (Stanford University) near Palo Alto, California, Dr Hal Puthoff is very much a Scientologist. He is OT 1ll Expanded and OT vll. An author and expert on laser beam technology, Dr Puthoff...considers Scientology an invaluable part of both his personal and profe%ional life and is currently busy applying Scientology concepts to modern physics .a Other promotional materials have been directed less to displaying the kind of individual that one might become, than to attracting individuals with problems. We don't care what your problem is we ean help you. Get some auditing J Wouldn't it help to know......how happiness happens ?: IJNDERSTAND OTHERS These books give you the keys to understanding the human mind and human natur, With them you have the Vital Knowledge necessary to understanding other handling them, and establishing sane, growing relationships.5 BE A MEMBER OF SCIENTOLOGY. The world has waited thousands of years for a technology to change conditions for the better. Seientology is the answer.5 If you have ever taken drugs of any kind you need L. Ron Hubbard's drug rehabilitation intensive.7 'Success stories' have often been reprinted in promotional publications. Hence the potential customer may be faced with material on the following lines: Is my chronic illness handled ? It is indeed. I've had it going more aeons than I can easily remember. And now it's gone. No more, finished, handled. And it feels great. Thanks to my Auditor for the application. Thanks to the Commodore for the Tech . Expanded Dianetics Case B.t The first thing I did on becoming Superliterate was pick up the most complicated book I could find. It was a dictionary of music - a subject I could never grasp at all. I started at 'scales' ad eventually worked through most of the dictionary by crost reference. I sat back and gasped. I'd picked up the information of a whole technical subjeet in 40 minutrs, and I understood it ! I couldn't believe it. [...] Vic Lyons (Superliterate)s 7heAuditot, 68 (19l), p. 7. J 7he .4uditat, 64 (1971), p. 5. J Grlainty, 19, 7 (1973), n.p. LeaJlet (197Z). S Chane, 62 (1974). 5 Chanje, 55 (97g). 7 LeaJ7el (19jl) ' LeaJ7et (1973). 9 Leadet, n.d. he second generchon As the movement has approached a quarter century of existence, provision has gradually emerged for recruitment from among the offspring of members. Separate courses of training and auditing have been available for children for some years in various Orgs, although the formalities surrounding auditing children have become greater in the face of public criticism. Increasingly, however, independent schools have appeared to educate the cmldren of Scientologists, in a Scientological manner. In Hollywood, the Theta Power School has been established, primar;lv for the children of Sea Org members. Our purpose is to educate the children so that when they are old enough and ready for it they can then go into Orgs or Franchises and get their Scientology processing or training. We use Scientologr study data, and also the codes, such as not forcing a child to communicate if they don't want to We do not teach Scientology as such, but all the teachers are somewherc on the bridge, and most of our parents are Scientologists, so the children w81 probably be future leaders in it. Naturally we use all we know to see that the children learn and keep their ethics in I Another such school is the As"C School at Kollerod in Denmark. In 1968 this school was reported to have twenty-one pupils.S l/rembership: background characrisics Like their Dianetics precursors, Scientologists are overwhelmingly muddle clasr. The occasional titled individual and the occasional manual labourer appear in the literature of the movement, but only rarely. This is re8ected in the responses of thirty seven practising or former Scientologists to my questionnaire. The educational level of the respondents was above average. Scronrary eduaation ' Secondary modern/Elementar/Technical trammar ,............. Publie/Boarding/Other private Unelassifiable Further sducation Teacher training or other full-time professional College of Advaneed Technology Unh/ersity9 None , Julia Lehis Salmen, Principsl, letter to the author, S December 973. ' 7he Audstor, 43 (l968). ' It should be noted, however, that three respondents indicatcd that they had not completcd their university courses, and there mry have been others. 64 THF. SrCT: SCIFN Agc at thc cnd offull-timc cducation Under 13 Unclassifiable The responses on a question concerning occupation indicated only one respondent to be a manual worker. Occupaton Housewife White collar Manual o. 4 32 Among the white-collar workers, there were relatively few engaged in lower level white-collar occupations. Thus there were no clerks among my questionnaire respondents. Among the occupations listed were: university lecturer, several teachers, tv.o draughtsmen, two photographers, two COpy vTiters, several branch and sales managers, two scientific research workers, two psychotherapists, a commercial artist, etc. As one might expect with such educahonal and occupational backgTounds, most of the respondents saw themselves as middle class. To a question on self-assigned class the following distribufion of responses appeared. Self-assignsd class Upper Middle Working c]ass Do not recognize classes No resporse 37 The data available, although not of a form to permit any rigorous correlational analysis, suggest a relatively low rate of inter-generational mobility. Most respondents had come from middle-class backgTounds. Fathcr's occufiation whtnyou wcnt Igyears ald Manual White eollar Dead No response Most of those in the manual category had skilled occupations. Treating all the respondents as 'white collar", it is evident that there is a considerable discrepancy between the rate of mobility for my respondents and the rates in the population of England found in four studies compared by McDonald and sidge S Faher's occupahon of non-manual sons: pecan2ges3 (a) (b) (c) (d) ScientoloLy respondents Non-manual 58 48 47 50 74 Manual 42 52 53 5o 26 The Scientology respondents display a very much lower rate of upward mobility than that ehibited in studies of the general populahon They are more solidly middle class in their social backgrounds. Given the small numbers of respondents in the Scientology study, however, it is not possible to have any great confidence in the validity of this finding. A guide to the movement's se distribution was obtained through classitication of the first names of 823 individuals listed as 'clears' after 1966 in available issues of 'Ihe Audior. Of these 29 could not be allocated. Of the remainder, 446 were male (59 per cent) and 348 were female (41 per cent). Observation, promotional and other material suggest that the average age of the current following has dropped from that of the Dianetics following. This was confirmed in the case of my questionnaire respondents. The distribution of their ages on entry into the movement were as follows: i A step not licensed by the data as the earlier table for occupeiwn shows. The possibility of an analysis of rates of intergenerational mobility was pointed out to me by Richard Bland, but unfortunately by this stage the data were not in a form to permit the elimination of the four housewives and one manual worker ' K. McDonald and J. Ridge, 'Social Mobility', in A. H. Halsey, 7 rends in Brituh Society (Macmmllan, London, 1972). 3 Tables (a), (b), (c) and (d) are adapted from Mcl:)onald and Ridge, op. cit..p. 146. I am grateful to Richard Bland for recasting these tables in the form of percentages of fathers of non-manual sons. ' Even if the four housewives and the manual worker were withdrawn from the category for non-manual fathers, reducing the percentages to: non-manual fathers, 69 per eent and manual fathers, 3i per eent, it is still evident that the Scientology respondents are more solidly middle class in their social origins, and have therefore experienced a lo er rate of upward mohility than has usually been discovered for the general populahon. The average age of entry among these 37 respondents was 32 years. It is my impression, but not one that I can support, that the age distribution of members has been dropping since the early 19605 and particularly since 1965. If this is the case I suggest it can be accounted for in terms of the image of the movement gleaned from the mass media coverage'by youthful potential recruits. Some younger former followers suggested that they were attracted in part by its anti- Establishment character and its message of 'Total Freedom'. Moreover, the 19605 was the penod when a post-war generation of young people was growing to adulthood, a generation which was richer, more leisured, better educated, and more self-conscious than any which had preceded it. lotivoton5 for recruitment As with followers of the early Dianetics phase of the movement, the motivations of recruits fall into three analytically distinct types: the career-oriented; the truth-seeker; and the problem solver. he ctrreer onented Those ·who fall into thi category saw Scientology as either providing a new or an alternative career, or as providing the means of advancing or developing a career in a psychological or therapeutic field in which they were already engaged. One young man, for example, had attended university in Canada where he had not been satisfied by his psychology courses and had therefore failed to complete his degree. He had read widely in religious literature, including Buddhism and Theosophy, had tried meditation, and was interested in the work of Wilhehm Reieh. Through his interest in Reich he became acquainted with Subud, since some of me Subudians in Canada were former disciples of Reich. He had tried psychoanalysis bnefly when his studies were not going too well. On his return to England he took up a course of study in Osteopathy and Naturopathy, but found it too physically oriented. He had always wanted to work in the area of psychotherapy but found that a medical degree was generally required. He heard of Scientology and thought he would give it a try. He had no definite idea of practsing as an auditor, but rather of acquiring skills that might be useful as a therapist in the future. One young man, for example, had attended university in Canada where he had not been satisfied by his psychology courses and had therefore failed to 'the truth seeker Some recruits identified their motivation for recruitment to Scientology in terms of a search for the truth: lve always studied cmparative philosophy and comparative religion sinee as far back as I can remember...They've been my chief interest because there didn't seem much purpose iiving here nnd not haing any purpose or any plan. Way back l Interiew. m my teens I more or less threw out the orthodox religion that I wa broueht up ir because it didn't seem logical. Quite frankly the first half of my life was seeking fol logie, believing that logic held the whole answer to everything. I learned bette. Iater...One went through all the rather far south people like Gurdjieff, Ouspensky, and then after handling that quite a lot I went totally the other side the didaetic materialists, the logical positivists, and so on... Somewhere must come that leap forward which transcends reason... You can go along with logic so far and then you've got to just leap forward...or lateral thinking if you like, on a philosophical level. At this point I saw one must look a bit beyond logic. Of course that led naturally into studying extra-sensory perception . ..Then r mought, so many people much wiser than I have lived by some religion. The only way to study religion is to go back to the roots...the source. So I spent several years doing just that . ..It didn't lead one anyuhere...I'd read sis UrDtiled and hs Secret Doctrire. I read every word of 'rhr Biole. After this intellectual journey of many years ghe read a copy of hlS H which her husband had been given. I thought if part of this is true, only a little part, it's worth investigating. So I will investigate it. So I wrote and asked where my nearest t'entre was. 'the proDlem-solDer The dominant motivational theme, however, was that provided by a problem solving perspective. Many questionnaire respondents indicated that they had earlier sought solutions to the problems facing them through medicine, psychiatry, psychoanalysis, hypnotherapy, marginal and fringe religious movements, marriage guidance counselling, speech therapy and Pelmanism. Despite the reduced emphasis on healing after the transition to Scientology, some recruits were attracted to the movement by what they regarded as an implied claim to therapeutic efficacy for physical illness and disatility. They entered the movement in pursuit of therapeutic methods to alleviate themselves or someone close to them of physical problems. (The Guardian'j Office assert that: 'The Church does not attempt to handle physical illness and disability and ensures that all newcomers are made aware of this.') j I had only been married less than six months, and my wife had contracted canr.er. I was told she would live maybe 12 weeks to 12 months and that would be it...Prior to her operation I called the organisation because that was the only group I knew of that could be in some way of assistance to me and to her.' [What attracted you to it?] At fitst I was not attracted to it, but tended to argue with the ideas expressed about it by my friend. However at this time (and actually for most of my life) I had a rather bad speech impediment, and my friend suggested, on a number of oecasions, that Interview. ersonal communication, November 1974. Interview. Scientology therapy might enable me to overcome this difficuLty. Eventually I agreed to read one of the elementary books on Dianetics. I was particularly attracted by the scientifie approaeh which appeared to have been made, in investigating the mind, and the behaviour of man. I was also attracted by the suggestion in that book, that the use of the therapy proposed would enable a person to overcome a stammer I Others saw the movement as a possible source of alleviation of problems they regarded as pschoso7natic in character. I was having a few psychosomatic ills at the time things one got pills for but didn t really know what they were one of which was a thyroid condition.t Another suffered from migraine headaches for which he had received medication, but had come to the conclusion that they were of psychological origin. He therefore bought works of popular psychology from time to time in an attempt to find a soluhon to his problem. One day he came across MSMH in a bookstore and was eYcited by the prospect that this mmght solve his difficulty. Finding the book hard to follow he contacted the Org address given in the book and one Christmas in a fit of depression went in for audihng.3 The boundary between physical and psychological problems is obviously a fluid one. Some respondents identified their problems in unambiguously psychological terms. For eYample, one man who had first contacted the movement in hms late twenties, and who was out of work when he first became interested in Scientology: [What did you think it might be able to do tor you? [What did you think it might be able to do for you ?] Well I kmew damm well at the time I had to sort myself out. I d had a nervous breakdown about nine monms previous. Found out me medical profestion were a load of charlatans and I had to find my own salvation. He saw an advertisement in a magazine invitmg the reader to Come and have your personality tested. He went along for a test and a lecture, found the lecture logical, and began to attend co-audit sessions. A queshonnaire respondent indicated mat he was attracted to Scientology by the hope that it might help to tackle my nervous trouble . Some recruits indicated that they were suffering from difficulties of a primarily sociel or interersono/ kind. One young man interviewed had had a very unhappy home life with a violent father and a large and inadequately provided for family. His father had been resentful of his staying on at a school until he was 19. He had no friends and beightened adolescent difficulties wieh girls. After being rejected by a girl whom he wished to marry and a final row at home, he left Glasgow for London. There, lonely and frustrated, he came across a sign: Solve your problems by increasing your mental ability. Phone D-F-, Scientologist. He arranged an appointment.S Similarly, a questionnaire Questionnaire respondent. Interview. a Interview. 4 Interview. Interview. THE SCIENTOLOUICAL CAREER 169 respondent indicated that he was attracted to Scientology in the hope that it would 'solve my problem of loneliness'. Most of those interviewed, from whom such imformation could be secured, had rather more mixed motivations. The following respondent displayed a combination of seeker and psychologieal themes. I was always interested in things like spiritualism. I went to one or two spiritualist meetings...From about the age of 13 I was trying to find the answer to the Mystery of Existence. I used to read anything I found on mysticism, philosophy, spiritualism, and so on.l He and his wife would follow up advertisements in ste and similar periodicals. His wife had a great deal of 'emotional trouble' and he now regards her as having been 'a borderline psychotic'. When he came across fS./fH in a local library he had considerable hope that Scientology would help to alleviate her problems. A large number of respondents displayed a combination of psycholog*al and social themes. One respondent was 21 to 22 years old when his mother became interested in Scientology. He had dropped out of medical school because he felt that he wasn't 'cut out to be a doctor'. He was very shy at the time, felt unable to study, to communicate with people, or to make friends. He was suffering from lengthy periods of 'black depression', and felt that Scientology might be able to help him.2 Some displayed a combination of psychological and cateer-orientel themes, like the following respondent who was a qualified doctor of medicine and had been undergoing Jungian analysis for personal problems when a friend told him he was getting a lot out of Scientology: I had been interested in the field of mental health sunce my undergraduate days, having done a degree in psychology, and intending to do something in this hne. I had got a bit dissatisfied with eonventional approaehes like hospital psychiatry. 1 thought I'd see what there was in it. There was no harm in going to a lecture. So there was thii kind of professional interest. There was also a personal one in that I had some problems myself at the time whieh weren't being solved by conventional analysis.3 A number displayed more, sometimes all, of these themes in their accounts. The following individual exhmbits at least a combination of seeker, problemsolving (psychosomatic illness), and social themes: I used to be an avid reader of almost every book I could get my bands on. I used to haunt the publie libraries for books, whieh I read in an attempt to satisfy my thirst for knowledge. I would read of this and that and the other and would often feel I'd found something only to follow it through and find it lead up a very interesting but quite blind alley. I eould never find the answers to the questions I had been asking myself and others from ehildhood up. ' Interview. ' Interview. ' Interview. THE SECT: SCIE'TOLOGY I wanted to know what I was doing here, why I wtts here and what was the purpose behind this experience we called life. These were aome of my questions. I searched and searched for the answers but with no real success. I found my reading and searching was often mterfered with quite considerably by the regular attacks of migraine headaches v-hich used to lay me out completely for several days at a time. This, together with the frequent attacks of theumatism to which I was subject, did not make my life particularly enjoyable In fact, looking back to-day [sic], I v. ould say that a large percentage of the reason why I was searchi ng so avidly, was to take my mind o ff the realiry of my own situation Life was really a bit too grim for me, so I would lose myself in my books and long philosophical discussions which seemed to relieve the pressure of everyday living. Iy job, which I did not care for particularly, was that of a 'white collar worker' and as I used to attend various evening classes for the study of psychology and related subjects, I did not have much time for feminine eompany Anyway I was a little too shy to talk to girls very much. Then one day, while browsing through the book-shelves in the public library my usual shelves, those on philosophy, psychology and comparative religions the librarian drew my aetention to a book which the library had reeently acquired at th request of another member. The title of this book was 'Scientology 8-8008' by a author called L. Ron Hubbard...I took it home with me to study I Twenty-nine of the 37 Scientology questionnaire respondents completed a question directed to ascertaining the kind of problems which they hoped Scientology would solve for them when they joined. Four incicated that they did not join in search of a solution to any problems. The remaining 25 displayed a wide range of problems (they could indicate more than one). The least important category was that of marital problems, wbile the most important wls that of psychological probems. The distribution of problems to which responsts were indicated, was as follows: Probltm (a) Loneliness (b) Financial problems (c) Marital problems Other problems of interpersonal relationships (e) Psychological problems (f) Physical illness Combining categories (d) and (c), it would seem that in general, problems of interpersonal relations were prominent sources of motivation to seek help through Scientology, particularly if combined with category (a). Over half of Frank Harding, 'How I became a Scientology Auditor', CTrainty, 3, 7, n.d..PP Z-3 A self-eompletion category elicited the further responses: philosophical; deafness; sexual inadequacy; speech impediment(z); problems with communication; smoking; 'enigma of life'; 'why people bebave as they do'. those who responded to this question acknowledged some form of psychologica problem as a motivating faetor, and over one-third, a physical problem. Given its general style and teacbings, it would be surprising were individual to move into Scientology as a result of dramatic conversion experiences although this sometimes occurred as a result of sudden cures. Those interviewe( generally revealed that their association with the movement was the result of a progressive process rather than a sudden event. Few felt they had made any major commitment, that what they had entered embodied the complete truth from the beginning. Kaufman recounts the process of 'drift' by which he entered the movement, and his experience may not be untyi ical: If anyone had asked me 'Why would you be willing to join a cult?' I would have contended that I wasn't joining anything. I didn't even consider Scientology a cult cults were peopled by the lonely, the alienated, the not-so-bright, not by comfortable, intelligent individuals like Felicia and her husband...I thought it the result of a combination of chance meetings, fortuitous circumstances, and the gentle suggestions of valued friends who believed that I had wanted auditing all along I Lofiand and Stark and Gerlach and Hine argue that new social movements spread through networks of acquaintances on the basis of face-to-face interaction 2 My own findings bear out this hypothesis to a considerable extent. Fifty-seven per cent of the respondents to my questionnaire had a friend or relative involved in the movement, and 68 per cent claim that they first came into contact with it by such means. Thirty per cent (2 per cent did not respond) claim first to have come into contact with the movement by impersonal means through the medium of a book, magazine article, an advertisement, or a circular. In many cases, however, personal contact seems to have been sbght and of only limited importance in their recruitment or their attachment to the movement. m nn Af .ti n advrtiement or a circular. In manv Attachment Once an individual has come into contact with Scientology, the organization brings to bear on him a great deal of pressure to amliate himself further with the movement. As one Policy Letter states, When somebody enrolls, consider he or she has joined up for the duration of the universe never permit an 'open-minded' approach.' The individual v ho takes a 'Personality Test' is uniformly advised that Scientology can help him in some way, since that is the sincere belief of most ' Robert Kaufman, Inside Scientolog)l (Olympia Press, London, 1972, p. 8. r Jobn Lofland and Rodney Stark, 'Becoming a world-saver: a theory of conversion toadeviantperspective',ASP,30(1g6s), pp.862-7s;LutherP.GerlachandVirginia H. Hine, Peoplc, Power, Chante: Mouements of Sociol 7r:nsformrtion (Bobbs-Merrill, New York, 1970. ' OEC, Vol. O, p. 38. ================================ 17 THE SECT: SCIENTOLOGY Scientology personnel. Many recruits first attend a free public lecture or nominally priced Personal Efficiency Foundation Course. These courses are devised to interest the public in Scientology and draw them into further commitment. A P13 Foundation is a programmed drill calculated to introduce people to Scientology and to bring their cases up to a high level of reality both on Scientology and on life....PE Foundation in its attitude goes for broke on the newcomers, builds up their interest with lectures and knocks their cases apart with comm course and upper indoc,...Never let anyone simply walk out. Convince him he's loony if he doesn't gain on it becawe that's the truth... Under the broad heading of attachment the factors which led to the emergence of some initial firm commitment on the part of those recruited to the movement will be examined. From the material available, three bases of affiliation can be discerned: cognitive, experienhal and affechve. By vog1litive grounds are meant bases for further commitment of a primarily intellectual kind. For example, a doctor cited earlier attended an introductory Scientology lecture and found it stimulating, the lectuTer was talking ahout practical life and relationships in simplified terms about three concepts involved. I was tired of reading academic books containing r7 theories of learning which had no bearing on the way one actually lives. I was also tired of hospital psychiatry. r'd done psychiatnc clinics myself in which one saw people for 30 minutes and pre)cribed a pill and never rcally had much contact with them. Thu at least seemed to be direct and immediate.' Others indicated that they found the talks 'logical', that they were impressed by the explanations Oiven for human behaviour, or that they found it made particular sense. Many became committed to Scientology on expot intial gTounds. Some particular experience convrtced them that Scientology was the key to something important. One questionnaire respondent indicated that he lost his doubts when his wife was cured of migraine by a 'touch assist'. An mterview respondent indicated that he became convinced during his first auditing session when they did an assessment and the charged item was 'a child'. So then they ran me on a process - what have you done to a child, what have you withheld from a child. And the moment they assed those questions, something happened. Suddenly I was looking at the body of a little boy and I was recalling and suddenly I knew it was what I had done to this hody when it was a child whieh had established the patterns for whatever bappered later...3 Less dramatically, a number of individuals found that as a result of Scientology drills and techniques they were better able to communicate with others, or experienced other iL provements, psychological or interpersonal. I L. Ron Hubbard, 'The organisation of a PE Foundation', ICO Bulletin, 29 September sg59, cited in Kevin Vietor Andenon, eport of ths soard of nqur mto Sc)ntoloy (Government Printer, Melbourne, Awtralia, s965), pwo3. 3 Interview. 3 Inteniew. I found that [co-auditing with other beginning students] helped mo tremendouSIY. and it seemed to help the people I was auditing too.l When I began having Scientology auditing I was impressed by the fact that it did work just as the books had said it would.S The other major theme emerging from the interviews was that in which the motivatiOn for amliation developed on primarily lfltctivr grounds. The indi vidual became emotionally committed to Hubbard, to other Scientologists in narticular or to the warm expressive atmosphere displayed in many Scientology .ganizationS One interview respondent cited earlier became emotionally .nvolved with a committed Scientologist who discussed past lives with her and told her she was one of a group of thetans who through all the centuries had been influencing people for good...I was... one of this fantastic group...At first I thought he was insane, and then I was slightly flattered of course.t Others were attracted by Hubbard's 'magnetic personality'. Many were impressed by the immediate acceptance that they found among Scientologists. They were warmly welcomed into the group, greeted, and applauded. Every success was broadcast and congratulated. They were 'validated' in what they did . Mine was the time of 'Quickie Release Grades' a fairly short period - and people went around saying 'This is fantastic. This is a record'. Flinging their arms around me. 'Never been done before. What a fantastic thetan you must be'. Of course this puffed me up tremendowly. With everybody eongratulatmg me so much of course I had to write the most fantastic Success Story. I mean I owed it to these people who eongratulated me. Many found themselves with a group of friends for the first time in years. People eome in and immediately they're enclosed in this atmosphere, which, when it first hits you seems a tremendously good and healthy atmosphere becawe everybody seems to be friends with everybody else. An awful lot of lonely people go into it I think becawe they find this tremendous welcome...for the loner coming in...People need company. They want to be accepted and one thing the Scitntologists did was accept people. They would tolerate an awful lot, beeause they had this thing, you must never invalidate any- body. For someone who's been pushed down, suddenly to find people coming up and saying, 'Well, look you're a beautiful person in your own right. There are qualities in you which are likeable and lovable...; it's bound to do them good, to give them a lift, and then they eome back and buy the courses.- Sveivliztttion Individuals enter Scientology with a multiplicity of goals of a personal kind which they wish to pursue. Socia]ization within the movement is oriented to the Interview. 5 Questionnaire respondent. ' Interview. ' Interview. 5 Interview. 17. THE SECT: SCIENTOLOOY progressive transmutation of such personal goals into Scientology goals, that is to ends permitted or preferred by the movement's leaders. Individuals also enter Scientology on a largely unselected basis. There is of course a differential appeal to certain categories of potential recruit, and no doubt considerable self-selection, but the movement does not require the display of any particular mark of merit nor the negotiation of any test of merit before an individual may join. [oreover, unlike other movements which proselytize widely, such as Jehovah's Witnesses, no extensive probationary penod is required before full acceptance into the movement. Thus recruits are a potential source of disruphon and must be socialized as quicklv as possible into the movement's norms and values to neutraiize this disruptive potential. A major step is taken in the socialization of recruits once the individual comes to see the current level of training or auditing on which he is worhng as but the beginning of a journey through the increasing number of such levels that are available up to O.T.8 and Class XIII auditor (or whatever happens to be the number at any particular time). The recruit often appears to experience a considerable increase in self-confidence after the lower levels of training. After several hours of 'confronting' and 'bull-baiting' the individual may feel freer and more confident in interpersonal relations. After auditing in which he may have come to speak of or even think of things which he has reprcssed and hidden for many years and v hich he has probably never confided to anyone, he may experier.ce a profound sense of relief He has been released from some sccret experience a profound sense of relief. He has been released from some secret guilt or fear of many years standing, which will, he is assured, never trouble him again. The lectures which he attends provide him with a simple model of human behaviour which in the tight of his confusions, uncertainties, and lack of comprehension of iife's complexities, may appear as a sudden revelation In a few simple but scientific-sounding terms he is offered an account of his own actions and those of others which is presented with absolute conviction. These insights and 'wins' provide the motivation to continue to the next course of training and auditing. If so much can be achieved at the lower levels, it is reasoned, what can not be achieved at those beyond? CurTent doubts and dmssatisfactions can be held in abeyance. Since one is only a beginner one cannot expect everything to be revealed at once. What one does not understand may be explained later. What one does not accept may merely be the consequence of some aspect of one's reactive mind, which will be resolved through future auditing. The enthusiasm of others on the course, or of Scientology friends, is infectious. Group expectations lead the recruit to search for some gain, to achieve a success, to believe that it has worked. Ever -body believed so firmiy Lhat it could work for me, so l couldn't not believe it because I so much wanted to believe that it wruld work. verybody wants to believe that its working...or the whole thing is meaningless. So there is this tremendous what they call ·group agreement' that it does work. Instantly I was caught up in this. I wasn't examining the thing, and it did work, or I felt that it worked. Now, I think to myself: I say it did work, but wh2t worked? I can't think of anything that worked, but at the same time, yes, I thought, well thrist, I feel marvellous, this works.l Having experienced that some aspect of the belief system 'works', having come to recognize his 'gains' as a consequence of Scientology, perhaps even having committed himself to this in writing in a 'Success Story', and having been applauded and congratulated and handed a certificate, the member would often willingly sign up for, and even pay a deposit or sign a cheque for, a further course of audihng and training. Anderson suggests that more intensive 'hard-sell' tacbcs have sometimes been employed in some Orgs to ensure maximum financial commitment by pre-clears. After convincing and signing up a recruit for an amount of auditing, generally twenty-five hours, the Registrar vould take the applicant and hls form to the Director of Processing. The latter would talk to the applicant and endorse the form to the effect that he could not accept the applicant, since it was his considered opinion that only after some 250 to 300 hours of auditing could the indivldual achieve a 'stable result' He would then return the matter to the Registrar. The applicant, aghast at his plight, would then often readily sign up for the greater number of hours of audihng recommended.2 (The Church of Scientology assert that the Anderson Report contained many inaccuracies, and point out that the legislation which followed it has since [and in my view rightly] been repealed in some states of Australia, or effectively nullified by registration of the national Scientology church as a recognized denomination for purposes of the Federal Marriage Act.)s A parttcularly important means of both enhancing commitment and socializing the individual is that of convincing him to take an active part in Scientology by training as an auditor. When he has achieved some success with Scientology, the member may become convinced that this is something which he should not only benefit from, but the benefits of which he should carry to others. Scientology literature is studded with statements to the effect that nuclear war, communist revolution, and sundry other ills can be prevented only by the spread of Scientology. Thus appeal is made to the altruism of the pre-clear. However, he shortly learns that such altruism has concrete rewards. Taking the path to 'clear' by the Training or Professional Route rather than by the Pre-clear Route, that is taking courses to train as an auditor, while taking auditing to become a 'clear', will save him nearly one-third in total cost. In 197Z, the Training Route to clear cost in total ul33 while the Pre-clear Route cost in the region of ul980.4 Helping Ron to 'clear the planet' by becoming ' Interview. Anderson, op. cit., pp. m4-5. Pensonal communication Guardian's Office, November 1974. Auditor, 77 (1972), p. 4 The prices are higher today. trained as a professional auditor also promises a further return since the indi vidual will then be qua ified to practise for a fee. Those w ho are recruited to the movement without sufficient funds to pay for training and auditing are encouraged to join the Org staffwhere in return for long hours and low pay the member will receive auditung free, or at a reduced rate. The individual thereby commits himself as an employee as well as a follower. By these means the recruit comes to identify his own goals with those of the movement.l Only within Scientology is he fully recogruzed and accepted as he is. Only Scientology has any real answer to his particu]ar problem. As ht becomes increasingly committed to the movement, he is increasingly alienated from features of the world beyond. The literature which he reads heaps invective on the medical profession, psychiatrists, politicians, and newspapers He comes to learn that all of these, as well as a number of Scientology defectors, are involved in a conspiracy to silence Scientology through propaganda and legal attack, out of fear of its innovatory message. He comes to learn that inside Scientology individuals are sane and releasing all their abilities, while outside fi a world full of people subject to their 'Banks'2 and liable to engage in irresponsible and destructive behaviour at any time. In the light of what he learns to see as the hostility of the outside world and the attempts by communists and squirrels'S to obtain Hubbard's 'data', he comes to recognize the need for strict internal control. The more closely he comes to see his own goals as linked to the avowed aims of the movement, the greater is the legitimacy with which he endows the movement's norms as embodied in the Ethics codes. The rigorous discipline of the movement, and the regimentation to which recruits are subjected in the central organizations, is accepted as necessary to achieving the goals the individual has set, or those which he is beginning to acquire: there was much that pleased me about the life at Samt Hill. I was being taught tr crack down. It was one more burden lifted not to have to be rebellious anymore rather, to be obedient. They were gdving me the discipline I had lacked all my life, discipljne whieh was going to be - in the long run - as beneficial as clearing...Ar. almost impercephble change was occurring in me: I no longer supposed that I was using Scientology for my own purposes. I liked the feeling; it was a clean one. My old ways had been grandiose - impure. Perhaps I was being afiected by the lines, the strict regimen...If so, I appreeiated the value of what I was getting, and was gladtoseemyselfbecominglessawilfulintruderandmoreoneofthegroupattheH ill.' I This proeess is eentral to Kanter's concept of eommitment: 'Commitment thus refers to the willingness of people to do what will help maintain the group because it provides what they need.' Rosabeth Moss Kanter, Gmmlement and Community (Harvard University Press, Cambridge Massaehussetts, 197Z), p. 66. S Reactive memory banks. ' Non-approved practihonens. ' Kaufman, op. cit., pmor. TL sclLNToLoGIaAL cARrrR 177 The gToup itself brings pressure to bear to secure conformity, in part because being associated with someone whose Ethics are suspect may lead to suspicion about their own. It is a truly illuminating experience to be aisigned a Condition of Liability... Colleagues whom you regarded as friends, seem suddenly distant. They won't talk to you. They don't offer you cigarettes or suggest you take a swig out of their Coke bottle. In some really Eager Beaver cases, they even refuse your cigarettes when you offer them !l The recruit begins applying the Ethics codes to himself rather than waihng to have them applied to him by the Ethics Officer. Henceforth should he suffer any nagging scepticism he will realize that it is not a rahonal response but simply the consequence of his being in a 'Condition of Doubt'. Having assigned himself to this condition, he can then proceed to apply the Ethics formula and begin to work his way out. The individual begins to conceive of the system of social control as central to the survival of the movement, hence Ethics sanctions are not merely something to submit to and suffer, they are to be wclcomed as a source of EnlightenLr.ent. I have just completed three days of fabulous wins with Ethics. I really know what Ethics is all about now. Previously I'd had it confused with punisbment, which its not at all. Clarice has helped me to make my environment safer so that now I can be audited succejsfully. I really know what it means to be 'jalvaged with Ethics' and it's great ! Gloria Nickel, Clear No 700.' Gloria Nickel, Clear No. 702.J So this is Ethics ! Its beautiful. It's safe and helpful. I can really see for once how it makes things right so tech can go in. Janet Wiggins, Clear No. 1986.4 As the member begins to organize his daily life in terms of the Ethics Condition and formulae, he comes to embrace and mternalize the norms of the movement. After receiving Integrity Processing and applying ethicj to her situatdon as a writer, Ros Baws sat down and completed the script for her comedy screen play...'I had been sitting there with thousands of blocks, kmowing something was wrong', says Eos. 'After some auditing and looking at the formulas for the Conditions...I just did it. I had statistics on how many pages I had to do each day to be in a Normal Condition. It was amazing. When I set my mind to it I completed the entire script' .5 ProgTessively, the recruit comes to acquire a vocabulary peculiar to the movement through which he can articulate his thoughts and experiences, and in terms of which he can locate and define the behaviour of others. He is feeling 'banky' that day (under the reshmulated influence of his reactive mind); an acquaintance is '1 l on the Tone Scale', or 'covertly hostile'; while another Cyril Vosper, rhe Mnd Bendtrs (Neville Spearman, London, 1971), pp. 138 9. aufman, op. cit., p. 155. ' Cltar Ner s, number and date unknown, p 5. Clear Ntus, number unknown ( 1969, p. 5. · 'Integrity Processing: a writers win-, Celthity Maeazint, Major Issue 6 (1972). t78 THr srcT: sclrNToLoGY shows a high degree of ARC (Amnity, realitv and Communication). Locahng his own situation and that of others in terms of this vocabulary carTics with it as an almost automatic concomitant the identification of the movement as the means of improving or managing this situacion. Only Scientology beliefs and practices prescribe means of coping vith problems identified in Scientology language, or achieving a situation or state of mind that only Scientology reveals, and to which it alone offers access. The added lectures had their effect, however. I'd never paid much attention to the specific meaning of the individual grades, except for IV. fter hearing about them repeatedly, I began to eel that I really was a Communicationr Release, a Problems Release, and the rest. It got so that I reveled rsic] in Gerald's speech. He was recounting my gains; it was mt he was describing, a Grade IV Release....It was plain now that my rceital had been the result of processing after all. I did owe it to Scientology. I was glad I had taken the course and gone to the added lectures. It wasn't until Gerald had given me a complete list of my gains that they became a reality to me I As the pre-clear accepts the first steps of the theory and technique he learns to see himseif suffermg from the restimulation of traumatic events. The model of mental and spiritual functioning on the basis of which he has achieved 'gains' in interpersonal relations or in relief from some hidden guilt, also prescribes the state of 'clear' as the only condition under which he would be fully free from such problems in future. From the relief of some parbcular pressing concern, the individual's goals are redirected toward achieving the state of clear. The recruit, in the light of his newfound commdence, psychological relief, or enhanced ability, redemmes his past biogTaphy as somethmng to which he does not wish to return: I saw my old life as one big reaceive mind. My moods had been a8feeted by everything around me: weather, plaees, people. A person with a reactive mind was like a piece of lint blown about on a windowsill.' Hence his current improvementS can only be seen in the context of a scientologically-defined biogTaphy. His current condition is only the beginning, and can only be stabilized by continuing with training and auditing, at least to the state of clear. Cleanng, he learns, is the only permanent means of maintaining his currently improved condition, and advancing beyond it. He acquires a 'vision' of clearing which motivates heightened commitment, and submission to the ngorous discipline cf the movement: This vision represented fulfillment of all hope and escape from all aversions. Tl gains that I felt I owed o Scientology were based entirely upon a projection into tl future. The aversions were mostly unknown to me until Seientology made me awa of them.a Kaufman, op. cit., p. 44Kaufman, op. cit., p. 68. 3 Ibid., p. 67. By the time that he reaches this state he will have spent anything between six months and two years in the movement undergoing training andor auditing, and have invested between ul3 and u2000. Having achieved clear, he learns that to be sure of maintaining his gains, and to achieve the spiritual abilities only a short distance beyond, he must take the OT levels. In the case of a number of those interviewed, on achieving the state of clear, they felt, after the initial exultation had subsided, that very little of any concrete kind had been gained. In the hope that the OT levels ·vould provide more concrete demonstration of the efficacy of the theory and practice on which they had spent so much time and money, and in the pursuit of which they may have suffered indignity and embarrassment as a result of Ethics treatment, they invested sums in the region of umOO to ul37s to secure the further knowledge and e:cperience they had come to see as so vital to their personal development. The novice is rendered more malleable to this process of socialization by the injunction that he approach the material without a 'ftxed opinion', that what he is being told is 'stable data' tested on many thousands of cases, and that he should only accept what is 'true for you' . The assumption, however, is that shortly it will all become true for him, since the entire system is an interlocking whole. The student is enjoined not to puzzle over possible sources of disagreement. 'Figure, f gure', and 'Q A' (Question and Answer) are not approved. Iaintaining reservations indicates that one is 'hung up on a maybe'. A person who's being imparhal, conservahve, eic. is hung up on a maybe so hard that it would take tugs to get him off. Maintaining reservations indicates that one is 'hung up on a maybe'. A person who's being imparhal, conservative, etc. is hung up on a maybe so ha that it would take tugs to get him off. ...figure, figure, figure is...very far from eertainty.3 This condition is in need of remedy through auditing and 'cramming', before one proceeds further, and therefore slows one's progress to the goals one seeks to achieve (and is, moreover, a source of further expense). [Scientology] attains [its] aims in precise and definite ways, ways in which there is no rnom for 'maybes'.t As one progresses further up the grades and levels of training it becomes increasingly difficult to admit disagreements or doubts, since to do so would endanger one's earlier achievements. Disagreement might suggest that one had 'falsely attested' to the earlier grades and levels, requiring that one retakt them, have a 'review', or become subject to Ethics penalhes. Doubts and disagreements, as matters for remedy, have costly consequences, and the incentives are therefore entirely in favour of easy acquiescence.4 l The cost of the OT levels is detailed in Sir John G. Foster, Enquiry into the Prectic and Effecls of Scicntoloy (HMSO, London, 1971, p. 102, The higher of the two figures is that given in Aduancc!, issue 20 (AugustlSeptember, 1973), pmS. 2BothquotatinnsarefromPtofessionelAudior'sBull6tin, 1 (mMay sgs3,p.4 3 Herbert Parkhouse, Scientoiogy and religion', Ccrtainty, 2, 9, p. 14. : One of the characterishcs of the 'Suppressive Person', for example, is that he does not 'respond to audihng'. 180 THE SZCT: SCILNTOLOGY The further one progresses, the greater the commitment of time, money, and ego-involvement one has made, and the harder it is to admit that one has made a mistake. One's purpose in continuing involvement has become not the achievement of some particular improvement that, however nebulously, ont had identified in oneself, but the achievement of a goal identified by the organi- zation, by means vhich it alone provides. The client has become transmuted into a follower. Mobiliz,2tion Scientology is a movement with some totalitarian features. Its leadership seeks not merely to secure a clientele for its services, but to maximize the commitment of a large unselected membership and mobilize them in the service ol the organization. Mobilization is directed to the end of transforming followers into achve, deployable agents who see their own salvation intimately linked with the achievement of ends established by the organizahon leadership. Generally such ends are those of promotion and dissemination of Scientology, but othe include staffing of Scientology Orgs, recruitment to the Sea Org, and tl enhancement of the individual's commitmenr and dependency. The members of the movement are early accusmmed to submitting heL selves to direction by Org personnel. On entry into an Org facility, the member ha8 to 'go through lines', that i8 through an establisbed routine of pas5age from one post to another collecting forms or other documentation, paying fees, awaiting an auditor, etc. While waiting for service8 he will often be expected to occupy hi8 time on some clencal task for promotional purposes. After a day at the Org he may be asked to distribute leaflets to houses on his route home,9 and when taking his traimng he will be required to secure a pre-clear from among the public, on whom he can demonstrate his competence and, if possible, recruit for Scientology. During later stages of his training he is required to undertake penods of 'intern8hip' during which he audits full-time for the Org. When not taking training or auditing, the follower is mobilized in the field. His increasing ahenation from the rest of society, particularly from inter- I When interviewed after having severed their connecOOn with Scientology, some would refer to this proeess in which they were transfommed into a following of the movement in terms which, if often less elegant than those of Fischer referring to his own commitment to Stalinism, mirrored his conclusions closely, on 'the lengths to which a man can go who, though neither stupid nor vicious, deliberately eeaseS to see, to listen, to think criticallY, subordinabng his intellect to the "Credo gul: absurdurn" so as not to doubt the cause he serves and, having thus snbordinated bis intellect, proceeds to abuse it by clothing the resulung nonsense in thretdbare syllogisms.' Ernst Fischer, An Opposine Man (Allen Lane, London, 1974), cited in a review by George Stelner, Sundcy Imes, 17 arch 1974 9 Kauman, op. cit., p. 199. personal relations with non-Scientoiogists is exploited to the end of proselytization for the movement: LONESOME? Have people who don't know Scientology stopped making 'sense' to you? Start a Group. People don't bite. Ask them over to a sociable evening to discuss forming a mental health group. When they get there, don't ask them to join,Just eLect them as omCers. Get them to agree on future meetings and the programs. Assume they want to know more about Scientology. Explain Scientology offhandedly as though it's sort of strange they don't know and get on with group organisation and business I He is encouraged to commit further resources to Scientology in order to maintain his advances. He receives promotional hterature on the follosving lines: Targets to Total Freedom These targets have been designed to Decide on arrival date at ASHOIAOLA [Etc.r To go clear by- ASHOIAOLA (date) [Etc.]' AOLA is your home for Clear and OT. The popular 'thetaccount' (the 'unbank' account) was designed for you so you can invest in your future self, Clear and OT, by sending regular advance payments to the AO. [Etc.]3 He is encouraged throughout his association with Scientology to take not only audihng, but also training, to become an auditor rather than merely a preclear. Becoming an auditor offers the porsibility not only of conducting the self-audit levels of processing more competently, but also of recouping some of the costs of auditing and training by auditing others professionally in private practice . Those who have not committed themselves to a professional career as an auditor, or have not yet achieved the necessary qualif cations, can be mobilized as partor full-time Field Staff Members. These individuals act as recruiting agents for the Org, receiving a commission on the amount spent on Org services by the 'selected' individual. In recent vears, the leadership have sought to mobilize a Ir rger proportion of the membership as Field Staff Members, and to tie them more closely to official Orgs. Policy published in 1968 expressed an Abilty, 50, p. 8. Promotional leaflet. ASHO is Advanced organisation, Saint Hill; AOLA lo Advanced organisation, Los ngeles. Promotmnal leaflet 182 Tr SECT: SClrNTOLOGY aspiration 'to reclaim and enrol as staff members everyone we have ever trained' 5 The member is encouraged to attend Congresses and other mass membersbip events designed to increase promobonal and disseminational activities in the field, such as a mass meeting early in 1974, which heralded the 'Battle of Britain' . The True Battle of Britain is Beginning. L. Ron Hubbard has sent Special Representatives to the United Kingdom. They have a message from him for eaeh and every lJK Scientologist...It u imprratiK thatyou atknd! ! ! A Special tape from L. Ron Hubbard, will be played which you mtut hear. [Etc.]' Encouragement is also particularly strong for members to join the Org staffon a contractual basis or more permanently. The incentives for younger members to join are considerable Without an established career to which thev are committed and without adequate resources to finance training and processing, working for the Org often has considerable attraction. In particular, auditing and training are made available (in the evenings) at reduced rates or free. Staff Status Two, ii on contract, is entitled to free processing up to Grade V, and so % discount on training and further processing and uniforms.3 While pay is low and condihons often arduous, the young member without familial obligations may find this no great bar. The staff member is not tied to the Org by the mere formality of a contract. Should he break his contract, for example, by defection, he becomes liable for the full cost of all the training, processing and travel expenses that he has received.4 Staffseconded for advanced training and auditing are required to sign prommssory notes to the sum of $5000 on each occasion. pmccssinandtravelexnensesthathehrsreceivefl ISaffserondrdforadvanced Such a Note...must be legally binding in that if he breaks his Contract, he is automatically in debt to the Org for 55,ooo.' The acme of Scientology involvement is membersbip of the Sea Org. Members at all levels of the movement are encouraged to join up. Come and work as part of Ron's expanding team of Sea Org members here at Saint Hill now I Contaet me immediately ! Love, G-[sigmed] G-E- Area SecretaryC I L. Ron Hubbard, 'Field auditors become staff', C0 Polic Ltkr May g AD [After Dianetics] rs, revised and reissued 14January 1968. ' Promotional Leaflet, emphasis in the onginal. OEC, Vol. O, p. 4f. ' Ibid., pp. 48-9. ' Ibid., p. 52 One interview respondent received a bill for $ 14 ooo for services ren. dered while on eourse at the Sea Org Flag ship, when expelled shordy after taking tht course, and was threalened with civi